Home

Reference manual

image

Contents

1. beac This program will draw the edge view of floor and roof deck The scale is affected O FioorDeck Roof Deck by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command Deck descriptions are stored in the data file US_deck dat in your autosd data folder You may edit this file to add more descriptions to it using the database i Eg editor See chapter 4 and Appendix B U U U U U F START POINT END POINT 8 ELEVATIONGENERATOR Emmen Pulldown AutoSD gt Erection Tools gt ie S sj Elevation Generator ET ss NE CE ms Toolbar Erection Tools se SG ey Ribbon AutoSD I gt Erection Tools LE z o VE Show Cap PL Width 15 08 Show Cap PL This program is for creating elevation an views for erection drawings and plan views dre EEE LI p of stairs The information is entered into mmm F i dialog boxes and saved to a file name and oe om location of your choosing One file holds o FEE NE o 2 one view You can create elevation views EG EE Erection Tools Chapter 2 AutoSD Steel Detailing show
2. Canada C MC WWT MT ST WT TS HSS DN HP M S W WWF WRF CF L UK C BT CT RHS SHS CHS ERW L J UB UC UBP Europe UAP UPN HSS L HD HE HL HP HX IPE IPN IPEA IPEO IPER IPEV DIL U Australia PFC TFC BT CT RHS CHS WB WC UB UC TFB EA UA The shape files are located in the DATA sub folder of your AutoSD folder Canada UK Europe and Australia are available only if the drawing is setup for metric This program uses dialog boxes for selecting shapes and displaying the dimensions If you pick OK the size shape selected will be saved and recalled the next time the program is selected from the menu in the current drawing session If you pick CANCEL the size shape that was last saved will be recalled the next time Command Pick AutoSD or AutoSD II gt Beams gt Sectional Properties Dimension for Detailing Anges Pipes Size L v 4 x3 x5 16 v Type Australia Canada O UK Europe GQ USA Metric size L102 x76x7 9 v S57T0 O X Strg o XX Strg Shape Min Rows 3 ene Metric size Weight 7 20 Ib ft Radi of Gyration Size 3 x
3. Beam Detail Configuration Input is in FT ISS for shop bolted clips 3 r Bevel Flanges r Shop bolted Clips and Stiff r Blocks r Beams sloping up to the right B 3 4 0 0204 Style O Tail to top of beam is the setback from the pa AN 6 n eal thes 2 0 0208 poe Tail to bottom of beam oO heel to end of web 4 FLG a mos Work length isat ie 4 is the clearance he i He 4 po roet gna s hides x as 10005 k dimension Right End between beams at the SI DE Groupon DI Overall length is at i Min k of blocked b Left End flange block 5 1S the r Bevel Flanges for field welds 2 ee O Right End i s r Di blocks to _ Ig n clip thickness Enter O ls po Ja pooma Je pomo c pome ore See gt End of beam Clip Use max rows for item 6 to make the Wing PL block option Round Stiffener Plate width to nearest 0 0001 A ER LSE Gide Dim clip edge distance 1 Show b ri length of stiffeners and recenstuniom oad torend eect ay son eats Notch plate top only V Show support member size wing plates that welded rens otbeam wiheles ine Notch plete Tap and Bot 7 S
4. description will be put in the shop bill only if Pl E Aa i the side view is drawn You enter the beam f vu e Iorecnon FROM mar Peur G LL mn at length as the length shown on the detail from HETT E na dimension line to dimension line not the cut a fr a pom BEAM LENGTH NEAR FAR Mak ma length or work length The space at left and ma P r Meterial on toy r Material on botom right end is entered as the distance from the Pe inge g 3 3 O Nore Neer Side Vertcalleg 20400 ZI Neer Side Varicelleg pom dimension line on the beam to the end of the ar Base et os yaw To View SelectAngle ee P Flate alectAngle lintel Enter a negative dimension if the lintel F ME I m s T Mark 2 verse Legs extends beyond the end of the beam TT 3 Space atrightend 1 0000 C Suspend plate To enter an angle size you can pick the orme o Hages ne eal a tag Lon Diameter 578 7 Gage 20200 Otfsetneerside 10700 Select Angle button or enter the leg size and w f a oe ll md irst space Plate thickness hicknese thickness directly in the three boxes to the 5f 0 em fom EE tene EE right of this button If you need to swap the v rer
5. Post Connection Input I in FTJISS olte ide plate elder A B THK O 1 Sided bot c E CO Side PLis NS OK Cancel Select Bottom Ral Condition x Stair Rad Bottom Input is in FTISS 11 f RETURN i Grab Rail V Return OK Cancel or Cancel Another icon menu appears A dialog box of the bottom condition is shown Pick the bottom condition for input If 8 is the same as 6 then the rail would end at the post Pick Bolted if posts are bolted to the top of the stringer and enter dimensions for A B and THK Select 1 Sided bot if the bottom post needs a plate with both bolts above the post and enter dimension for C D and E Pick Side plate if posts have a vertical plate at the bottom of the post that are welded to the outside of the stringer and enter dimensions for A B C and THK and select if the plate is on the near side NS of the post or not Pick Welded as shown if posts are welded to the top of the stringer Grab rail is Near side or Far side N F N Insertion point A box is displayed around the cross hairs outlining 188 AutoSD Steel Detailing Rails Chapter 13 the area re
6. rr ec left side There is only one landing configuration per elevation ee view The same configuration is used on all floors in one peat suse ENE ay elevation view The configuration set here will be the default ee EE for the next elevation file EL sem L Frame location Left side Right side Select the side that you aa i ed ng want to configure When you have finished that side select the JE m other side If you want this side configured to be the same as E Sn pe mete the first side pick the Same as other side button delser deg en Frame type The frame type can be built up or mitered dog Es leg shop welded to stringer or none for framing the stringer G dk to a floor beam The one you select is reflected in the Plan EE input at the bottom of the dialog box Fill out all information ma i s q i som 0 for both right and left fs fi Va Mode p pee sides i i oF art 0 i 4 gt m Section This is i i enabled if you select ds ape s k 7 ae aE J either built up or fs mitered frame type Ls i This shows a section through the frame BUILT UP LANDING MITERED LANDING LANDING NONE showing the end view of the header beam with a CMU wall In a built up frame the header is one side of the frame so the header to stri
7. See Tread Type Draw steps only Change Upper end Change Lower end r Slope UR File name r Blocks at Upper end to the Right T Pick WPs r Top flange 2 oa to the Left Length 0 FS Browse 1 6 0 Treads are near side Delete Depth Use Plate for Stringers 2 4 06 p Botflenge ETG Length 0 ancel 3 Ep EG UPPER WORK POINT 4 6 Depth 0 01 Select the tread type Ng g 6 01 r Blocks at Lower end N WORK LOMMER 7 02 r Top flange Change Upper end Ei pes 9 Length z4 Change Lower end 12 Depth 7 10 2 06 E Pick these to select an Botflenge PE 1 l 10 4108 Length end condition from an 4 TREADS ns icon menu R pom Dept Start Point Upper member C10x15 3 Upper PL Depth Upper SE Slope UP Sloped member C10x15 3 Sloped PL Depth Select to the right or Lower member Lower PL Depth Lower CE OK to the Left to change the orientation of the stair Draw steps only Checking this option will reduce the amount of input required and will draw the treads as solid lines but will not draw any other part of the stair or rail Treads ar
8. Pulldown AutoSD gt Nailer Holes Toolbar Detail a lle 7 ks ko S Ribbon AutoSD II gt Detail e we Fe et Her swere Va Ste i o Angle O Top flange ONS amp Beam Stringer This command will automatically insert 9 mee i i O Plat Botflange BS holes on a selected line in the web flange j s 3 Distance down 0 0308 Hole diameter 0 0013 or angle leg and optionally dimension the o 1s beit FS Slot length spacing and put tail dimensions to each s ean STOL ae smon hole O STAGGER Angle Leg Width alk fhe el H Overall distance 12 0000 5 SPAG 2 0 10 0 d i Pal li FT F i i Hole spacing 2 0000 Tete raihan 2 0 BRA el The length of the first and last spaces Will less roe rane erre Put overall dimensions be drawn to scale The distance between amp rxtesmensens the first and last hole will be divided evenly Two different dialog boxes are used One for CNC and another if you are not saving CNC data The dialog box shown to the left is for CNC NAILER PLATE Pulldown AutoSD gt Detail gt Nailer Plate Toolbar Detail paenan 12 0000 Ribbon AutoSD II gt Detail 0009 This program will detail a plate that is to be shipped loose with one line of holes or slots
9. Fill Select this to fill the mline with a solid color Justification Sets the location of the end points ee ZE Line Type The hidden option makes all lines hidden Select Scale Sets the scale the mline will be drawn a e eS MLine Scale Applies a scale factor to the mline on PE j Left end amp Right end Sets the closure style for the ends os oa yee Standard MLine Select to draw a preset mline EVE a femme MMe Ore Angles Select an angle size for a preset mline Otin ec E EN Custom MLine Use an existing mline by selecting it me nel E from the list or create a new mline Selecting a mline from the list will populate all boxes so you can see the Fr properties of the line If you edit the boxes below Create EI cm mm varm new MLine you must select Create new MLine for those changes to be used sample mline using the options selected will be shown in the lower right corner of the Custom MLine section Buttons OK will close the dialog box create a new MLine and set the new MLine current You can use the mline command or pick MultiLine from the AutoCAD menu to draw the line Cancel will close the dialog box and void all changes Multiline will close the dialog box create a new MLine set the new MLine current and start the mline command
10. There are seven different hip and valley connections to choose from The first three and the last one shown in the icon menus above have the purlin sitting on top of the rafter The shapes for purlins and rafters are noted in each icon menu The example below is the hip connection shown in the lower left corner of the icon menu above 2 RISE 3sva A slide is displayed for user reference Eave Line BUD PA 4 Eave Line FT IISS Enter Base control dim fl 22 FT IISS Enter Rise control dim 2 11 Decimal Enter Horiz control angle D 45 203 Hip amp Valley Chapter 15 AutoSD Steel Detailing Decimal Enter Horiz control angle DD lt 45 0000 gt Enter 5 O COLUMNS BENT PLATE A slide is displayed for user reference NO ROWS PURLIN WEB FT IISS Thickness of connection plate 0006 Enter Number of columns of holes 5 1 Enter Number of rows Max will fit is 5 6 4 FT IISS Enter edge distance at end of purlin El 0108 FT IISS Enter edge distance on plate E2 0108 FT IISS Enter WP to first hole Gl Min 4 7 8 05 FT IISS Enter WP to first hole G2 Min 3 1 2 0308 FT IISS Thickness of bent plate on top flange 0002 Some of the p
11. OS zo Carcel Spacing 2 is the vertical distance from center line of rail to center line of rail It can be entered as a single distance or as a list of distances separated by commas If the number of distances is less than the number of spaces required for the of lines the last distance will be used for the remaining spaces The of lines and spacing 9 for ends with a return can be different from the main rail T B P and D are for the actual outside dimension not nominal Select OK when finished Insertion point at top left corner of rail c pe Enter input C as a negative to HE di ere le put the clip on the left side of the 3 NL Lf i A 0004 post al ft C C ol CUT AT TOP OF ANGLE POST 1 Degrees 2 oK Cancel OK Cancel Select post connection Piece mark of toe plate Enter mark or use lt pa gt Enter 193 Rails Chapter 13 AutoSD Steel Detailing Section mark for post connection A Select Top Condition to Next Post x CONTINUE STRAIGHT NO POST
12. selected with CNC xdata Holes A slide drawing of the current selection is shown Sed mise Ck for reference The value for Detail of can be a Angle a Fam gt m Beam or Stringer or Column or Brace Column or Tei dimension FU TAL ANGLE Ter Brace includes everything where the gage of the web is Hole diameter 0 0013 SIDE IF_H DIAMETER a sm ETTE g FR SE measured about the center line The Side value is not opion nie SH open important if the shape is a channel You can change the Layer CNC_1B1 p SI re i layer the hole is on with the Layer button The hole EE must be on the layer with the same name as the main mark the hole is in The hole can be changed to a slot by 213 CNC Chapter 1 6 AutoSD Steel Detailing putting a check in the box for Make slot and filling in the values or a slot can be changed to a hole by unchecking Make slot To view the values of another hole pick Select Entity You can use crossing window or a point to select Surface Top Flange 7 Length x 0308 Depth Y 02 Setback S 0008 Side 7 p Angle 0 0000 Layer CNC 1B1 Member is an angle IF X GOES TO CLIP Type Block S SETBACK IF X GOES TO WEB S 0 End Left end 7 WES B 4
13. OK Select Entity Burns If you are adding xdata for a burn such as a block select the length dimension of the block and the box on the right will be displayed with the selected value in the Length X box Pick Assoc dim next to Depth Y and select the block depth dimension This will put the value in the Depth Y box and associate the two dimensions with the xdata If you use Replace Dimension to change the depth later the depth value will be updated in the burn xdata for the block Side and Angle Side is used for flange notch flange thinning and skewed cuts as listed below Angle can be 0 positive or negative The sign of the angle determines which way the cut goes for a skewed cut Refer to the slide in the dialog box to see which way positive and negative angles are cut Skewed cut on web top or bottom flange or angle leg There are several variations for X Y and Angle that are used to determine the size and direction of this cut In all variations the sign of the angle determines the location of the cut not the side See the slides in the program The side option is only important as noted below The variations are as follows X 0 Y 0 Flange cut only If side is BS Y is full width of flange If side is NS or FS Y is half width of flange Y and angle are used to calculate X X 0 Y 0 Web cut only Y is full depth of web Y and angle are u
14. ELEVATION FROM EL DOWN AND FROM EL UP ARE ENTERED AS A LIST OF DIMENSIONS SEPARATED BY COMMAS EX 0 1 0112 0308 HOLES ARE CENTERED ON FLANGE AND WEB MORE THAN ONE GAGE CAN BE USED FOR WEB HOLES MORE THAN ONE GAGE CAN BE USED FOR FLG HOLES WHEN DETAILING BEAMS CONN TO NS SHOULD BE INPUT AS FACE B AND CONN TO FS SHOULD BE INPUT AS FACE D FROM EL DOWN AND FROM EL UP ARE ENTERED AS A LIST OF DIMENSIONS SEPARATED BY COMMAS EX 03 03 03 03 ELEVATION FROM EL FROM EL UP FROM EL pf FROM EL UP ke ie E E THICKNESS D A VALUE CAN BE ENTERED FOR FROM EL UP OR LEFT BLANK FROM EL DOWN IS ENTERED AS 1 02 OR 0 1 02 IF FROM EL UP IS LEFT BLANK elevation FROM ELEV UP is the location of plates above the given elevation 0 will put the bottom of a plate at the elevation THICKNESS 10 Stiff Plate THICKNESS is the thickness of the plate FROM ELEV DOWN is the location of stiffeners below the given elevation 0 will put a stiffener at the elevation FROM ELEV UP is the location of stiffeners above the given elevation 0 will put a stiffener at the elevation 11 Holes GAGE is the horizontal center to center of holes FROM ELEV DOWN is the location of holes below the given elevation 0 will pu
15. Match colors r Linetypes SDS 2 AutoSD Color SDS2 3 X CONTINUOUS v Cancel Print Names for specific line types under Line types will be changed to the name in the list next to each name The color 2 here will override the colors shown above Line types 25 Introduction Chapter 1 AutoSD Steel Detailing After making changes pick OK to save those changes Picking Cancel will remove all changes made to colors and line weights LINE WEIGHTS At the bottom of the customer colors configuration dialog box is a button that opens a line weight dialog box shown to the right This option is for setting line weights for plotting lines of different thicknesses by line weight Any settings here will override line weights based on color when plotting Putting a check in the box for Enable Line weights will cause the program to use the values set here for line weights Un checking the box will disable this feature After making changes pick OK to save those changes Picking Cancel will remove all changes ARROWHEADS Setting Line weights x Configuration file AutoSD Enable Line weights ByLayer Color 2 Color 3 Color 4 Color 5 Color 6 Color 7 Color 8 Color 9 Color 10 Color 11 Color 12 Color 13 Cancel Arrowheads in previous versions of Auto
16. Cancel The dialog box shown to the left is for editing a schedule file Enter a file name and the title that will be placed at the top of the schedule You can have up to 10 columns with column 1 on the left side Enter the text you want for the heading of each column Multi line headings can be character to separate the headings Enter the width of the column select the justification for the text and pick if the input is for text or a dimension created by using the r When selecting the insertion point for the schedule an image of the outline of the schedule will be drawn to allow for easy placement Press the key to LOG SCHEDULE JQUAN DESCRIPTION SE LINTEL MARK LOCATION OPENING S make the schedule taller Press the key to reduce the height of the schedule After the schedule is drawn you are prompted for the text for the first column An X is drawn at the insertion point of the text After the text is entered it is placed in the column and the X moves to the insertion point of the text for the next column and you are prompted for the text After the last column is entered the X moves to the intersection of the next line down and the left border 66 AutoSD Steel Detailing Draw Chapter 3 TAIL 7 of the schedule You are given the options to Continue Skip or eXit The def
17. FROM EL DOWN IS ENTERED AS LIST OF DIMENSIONS SEPARATED BY COMMAS EX 03 03 03 COLUMN CAN BE 0 FOR ONE COLUMN OF HOLES FROM ELEV DOWN is the location of holes below the given elevation FROM ELEV UP is the location of holes above the given elevation 9 WING PL 9 Wing Plate POSITIVE OFFSET WILL OFFSET DRAW THE CONN AS OFFSET SHOWN NEGATIVE WILL O DRAW ON REVERSE SIDE OF ANGLE i i GAGEIL COLUMN ABSOLUTE VALUE GAGE is from the center of the column to the first hole OF ANGLE MUST emanon og FOUAL 10 45 OFFSET is from the center of the column to the side of ste eee the plate Positive goes to the right negative to the left as viewed facing the side of the column the plate is on THICKNESS is the thickness of the plate COLUMN is the distance to the 2 column of holes from EE nie Gane SEE the 1 This is 0 or blank for one column COLUMN CAN BE 0 FOR ANGLE is the angle from horizontal if the plate is on face A or C It is the angle from vertical if the plate is on 4Y IF WING PL IN WEB IS TO EXTEND TO STIFF PL YOU MUS INPUT STIFF FIRST 78 LE ANGE 4 eA fig mos 5 face B or D FROM ELEV DOWN is the location of holes below the given elevation FROM ELEV UP is the location of holes above the given elevation If wing plat
18. ate attached End amp Lettend Roht end Side Near side Far side r Shop connection amp Bolted Welded r Columns e T r Field connection r Rows Bolted Welded FE 1 10 0300 2 0 0300 3 0 0208 4 0 0300 5 6 7 8 0 0104 0 0300 Thickness Bolt diameter 0 0006 v mE Put vertical dimensions Save as DSTV file OK Cancel dimensions and you can choose to put the vertical dimensions This splice plate offers more 122 AutoSD Steel Detailing Beams Chapter 7 options than the one above but is not affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command Pick OK to draw the plate and end the program Pick Save as DSTV file to create the file and come back to the input dialog box pd FS Insertion point top flange at end of beam of Location of horizontal dimensions T Ta t L34 9 Location of vertical dimensions a On R 143 Mark for plate Enter mark or use lt pd gt Enter Add piece pd to shop bill Y N lt Y gt N 1f 1311172 123 Beams Chapter 7 AutoSD Steel Detailing 124 AutoSD Steel Detailing Bracing Chapter
19. 23 Anchor bolt side view cescccceseceeeeeceeeeees 27 Wing PL block option eonrrorrrrvervrrvrrrrrvnr 22 Angle Beam glansen 113 Work length is at 22 Arched texter ere f rere 48 Bearing plate so renere error ede bed 49 PRTC Shas east HE E RESET SES SEERE SER ES SEES NERE SEES 81 Bearing plate edge view urrnnrnrrrrvnrrrrvnrrrreeer 28 AT D Ne delse 73 Block wall plan view ecese 29 AroWheadsyunntusvrtenlkianssd ike 25 26 Block wall section erarrrarnrrnrvnnenvrsvsrnrnnvnnns 28 Arrowheads to ticks 210s sccssssscsceccetceseeseateateacde 73 BMCONNES Trash 9 ASD BETPINISH irino ir 50 Pollarduard4ve fare 51 ASD BLTLOCATE seigere enken 50 Bolted tread detail uuunsseimsndmiesibedui 178 ASD BLTMARK ii csssnccsatictessoganssceateenscnactey 50 BOS sees eget 18 sd AESP under 233 ANCHOR sic cS SEERE SES EAE SEES SENERE SES 48 ASD DRAW uge 12 24 UG EE E T TA E 49 ASD FIREDBOET sisternen 50 diameter jaaa see 20 ASD MARK 3 5 cccesssivatsasvascatedsivenceyss 12 24 212 2 EE 20 ASD SECT sn NGT 12 24 212 EXPANSION ae 50 Assembly mark 1 48 153 157 167 Extract 2 2 04 stein tele 54 Attributes vs Texts sccsssseisisctisssscaescesecatacnstacs 157 Round UP onlyunaussgsnnssininssanbsiavse 18 AutoSD 2012 Report Form rranvrnnnvnvvrnvrnr 254 Round up or down sonorenvrnvnrnrvrnvrvensnvnnnnener 18 NSD te 151 Sep aS 21 Base pl edge view sic eee 141 VINEN ur 51 B se C ap Plink denn 141 Brace lines Wd
20. POLYUNE DRAWN TO SCALE DSTV editor opens and is shown below You can edit CONTOUR BEVEL FLANGE ANGLE 0 any of the active edit boxes Nr SAMPLE 10 CNC Chapter 16 AutoSD Steel Detailing shown The other information is shown for reference only You can change the length of the member but not the member size The items that are blank in the example are reference information and are usually not needed Camber Opens the dialog box to edit the camber You can have Blots i GE N e camber on any of the four faces To add a camber pick the Add 0000 Sma cone button Enter an X location the distance from the left most end of panove 200 apa the member to the point of camber and an amount of camper at that sene om fo E point and pick OK Remove a camber by selecting one from the list bia PE labeled X location and pick Remove Changing the face will refresh the X location list to show the camber for that face Pick OK to save your changes and close the box Pick Cancel to ignore rae Peco fe om son your changes and close the box Holes Powder Punch and Text All of these works similar to Cambe
21. lt amp fe m I a im T a en lt 5 ns fe fer OO In gt Eat gt 2 on if 7 Seat Plate o lhe VERT SEAT DEPTH 1 SEAT DEPTH GAGE is the distance from the center of the column to the hole This can be 0 if no holes are required HL C C is the center to center of holes This should be 0 if GAGE is 0 He FRPS NE ML C C 0 F GAGE 0 HORIZ DIM is the horizontal size of the stiffener OLE SPACING IS ENTERED 4S A UST OF nMENSONS seFARATED Bv comas ex 0309 VERT DIM is the vertical size of the stiffener WIDTH is the width of the horizontal plate 147 Columns Chapter 9 AutoSD Steel Detailing SEAT DEPTH is the distance from the given elevation down to the top of the horizontal plate POE OET SET vee eae 8 Split T DRAI SHOWN NEGATIVE WILL O OFFSET THIS VIEW WILL Oo OFFSET DEN EN ne BE DRANN ONLY Split t can be WT MT or ST GAGE GAGE COLUMN GAGE GAGE is from the center of the column to the first GER hole ET i OFFSET is from the center of the column to the side of lagen the Sem TUBES T nd od Lo COLUMN the distance to the 2 column of holes from the 1 This is 0 or blank for one column ELEVATION onf
22. Include Girt connections Checking this option will include a string of dimensions on the right side for girts and add girt connections to the ROTATION ANGLE FACE B FACE B column connection dialog box Stiffeners a Stiffener plate Input is in SS bi ol EN pr Pick the image under 4 R r Stiffeners to open the rh roto i nS options for stiffeners La SET TO 0 FOR 4S CLP a 00100 The pictures to the right 4 ano or B gt o ABEC 0 A amp B 0 FOR SOR a C 0 FOR 45 CLIP GD Ser show the various shapes E Thickness mw you can have for B Min overhang of cap 0 0400 AR Er dd SET A amp B TO 0 FOR SQ E atflg for stiffto be drawn stiffener plates A i i oO i i oO CK stiffener will not tae tl it iTi be drawn on the lasl flange of a W shape or any side of a tube SARA MIO or pipe if the cap extends less than the value entered for the minimum overhang Column Grid Reference After entering the main mark and quantity you are prompted for the Column Grid Reference This is optional information that will be placed under the main mark Pressing the enter key without supplying any text will omit this option Entering text with the character as in
23. I OK Cancel 105 Beams Chapter 7 AutoSD Steel Detailing SEAT ANGLE SEAT PLATE Seat connection input Input is in FT This connection is for creating a seat using angles or a plate O Plate r Material Angle ti 1 L31 206 16 P sommeren may have 0 2 or 4 bolts Long leg horizontal 02 If there are no bolts then 4 is from the work point to the end of the beam Support Beam W18x35 Bf 6 Gage 31 2 You may elect to draw a top view or not 1 0 0104 i Do not add R L to the mark if using an angle with holes It will be n po added automatically 4 00112 5 10600 6 0 0612 e 10208 Seat mark Draw top view OK Cancel m ax INTERNAL CONNECTIONS MAIN and AUX Main Internal Connections Input is libs Connection r Center Right Bolt Rows r Side Ist Hole Shop rr I st Hole 2nd Hole a e eel sem ss oa ov The MAIN internal connections are Wells Holes EH DE aa Jr Te i used after the le
24. Inpt2 WEB VIEW Each end at the top Cancel SHAPES Pulldown AutoSD gt Draw gt Shapes Toolbar Miscellaneous Ribbon AutoSD I gt Miscellaneous This menu is for drawing the end view side view and top view of various shapes This will draw the shapes with a flange and web thickness that will look attractive when plotted The flange will be 3 4 thick and the web and angles will be 1 2 thick at a scale of 1 1 ZEE and CEE shapes are drawn 1 4 thick Scaled Shapes will draw various shapes to exact scale and thickness ZEE and CEE sizes are listed by depth x width x thickness Wshape dwg SCALED SHAPE Ol 4 i E ril CANCEL PREVIOUS 65 Draw Chapter 3 AutoSD Steel Detailing Drawing Wshape dwg located in your C autosd sec folder is a special dynamic block Once inserted it may be changed to represent any size W shape You must be using AutoCAD 2010 or later to use this block The insertion point is the mid point of the top flange To change the size select the block and click on the triangle at the insertion point and select the depth and weight I SCHEDULE MAKER Pulldown AutoSD gt Draw gt Schedule Maker Schedule Maker File name Colors Ribbon Auto
25. 1 28 PIPE x 26 0 ma 1HR1 ONE 197 Rails Chapter 13 AutoSD Steel Detailing 198 AutoSD Steel Detailing Ladders Chapter 14 Chapter 14 Ladders All programs in this chapter are under the AutoSD gt Ladders pulldown menu Ladders toolbar and AutoSD II gt Ladders ribbon menu Ladders can be detailed with or without cages Ladders without cages can be wall mounted or sit on the floor and also bolted to the wall Some can go over a parapet and others can go in an elevator pit or up to a roof hatch Ladders with cages can be roof hatch side step near side side step far side or step through The ladder itself is a block that is inserted and dimensions are added to the block based on your input Hoops are drawn to scale and the shop bill is filled out for you FA LADDERS WITH CAGE Pulldown AutoSD gt Ladders gt Ladders W Cage lege H ng mente oe Change ladder types by selecting Roof Side step or oma omme osses esse oi os e Creme Ste
26. END OR TURN W POST K Cancel Piece mark of Post clip Enter angle mark or use lt aa gt Enter Select the upper left icon to continue going straight to the next post Select the upper right or the lower left icon to zigzag to the next post Select the lower right icon to end the handrail or turn a corner The image at the top center indicates the portion of the rail that is being detailed Select configuration of rail to next post FT IISS Distance to next post 3 Is this post connection the same as the last Yes No lt Y gt Enter er a 4 No post S iden END RETURN TURN FS SPLICE EE Je NO POST vf H i og TURN dy Pos TURN NS amp SPUCE RETURN FAR SIDE RETURN NEAR SIDE i f OK T Cancel Select configuration of Select the right end condition rail to next post Toe Plate Splice Input Input is in FT IISS x TOEPLNS TOP oF FLOORS Late 5 mm s mu TOE PLATE ENTER 0 FOR B TO OMIT HOLES E a IE B i NT Cance
27. previous dialog box Picking OK will save the current file and close the dialog box If gusset plate tear out had been a factor a warning message would be printed at the command line You would then have the option to increase the gusset plate thickness or let the program increase the number of rows until tear out is eliminated If the gusset plate is welded to the brace the plate will be sized 1 bigger in the direction of the brace Dimensions 5 6 and 13 are always above the work line and 5a 6a and 13a are always below the work line If 5 amp 5a 6 amp 6a or 13 amp 13a are not the same that is your connection is not symmetrical about the work line you will need to calculate a separate plate for each end of the brace Gussets calculated in a particular quadrant that are not symmetrical should be drawn only in that quadrant Otherwise the plate will not be correct Plates with holes that are symmetrical about the work line can be drawn in any position Note In order to calculate a gusset plate with a single line of holes offset below the work line you would input 5 as negative and the same absolute value as 5a In other words if 5a is 01 then 5 must be 01 PRINTING FILE Below is what the print of the input and output looks like A print like this one without the input or output listed along with a copy of each gusset plate type and each orientation is provided for your use in appendix C They can be used by other draf
28. 1 TABS View Changes the direction the rail is sloped sd Bar type Perimeter bars can be 2 Flat bars or 1 i U bar Attachment of the panel to the rail can be wit or ENTEr THE sLoPE without tabs 0 FOR OR THE BASE 1 BASE LEVEL RAIL View Bar type r Attachment age a Orientation The wire in the mesh can be E Ran forum e winrene 9 Oe 2 T horizontal 0 45 degrees or parallel to the top rail 2 19 meet Jowtet ime mm Piece Mark A ba en 4 0108 PI 0112 i i Piece Mark B bb O 45 5 01 P2 0112 Dimension 1 can be entered as the Base or the me me Ho rete vever F 5 T Slope length Select the one required by picking the p 3 i a oe B f10706 c fos p 0108 Dese FB 418 option to the right of the 1 input box swan FE ml ESSE OK Cancel Enter a value for all of the fields that are enabled and pick OK Command Insertion point at lower left corner 2009 The last mark was 1HR1 m jesse Main mark PANEL A T EEE of Are marks RIGHT and LEFT Yes No lt N gt Enter a Cy apne i ls PANEL
29. ds ss Cancel vertical and horizontal leg sizes just pick the Reverse Legs button Top flange anchors will be placed horizontally on one angle If no angle is used the anchors will be placed vertically on the top flange Enter values in all boxes that are not disabled by picking the box and typing the value needed using the FT IISS format of input LIST FIELD BOLTS in SHOP BILL Pulldown AutoSD gt List Field Bolts in Shop Bill Ribbon AutoSD I gt Shop bill This command will total summarize and list the summary of field bolts in the shop bill giving a total of each different bolt nut and washer listed in the current drawing MEASURE 2D LINE Pulldown AutoSD gt Tools gt Measure 2D Line Ribbon AutoSD I gt Utilities This command works the same as AutoCAD s Measure command except that the spacing is controlled by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command The command places point objects or blocks on a line at measured intervals using the FT IISS format of input MULTILINE STYLE Pulldown AutoSD gt Format gt MultiLine Style Toolbar Miscellaneous Ribbon AutoSD I gt Utilities 59 Draw Chapter 3 AutoSD Steel Detailing Create preset and custom MultiLines Display joints Select this to draw a line at each joint
30. of the beam or girder Picking the Select button allows you to select a beam size and will fill in the beam depth for you Base plate Base plates can be put on by the column program or they can be added later Checking Show edge view will draw a base plate at the bottom of the column and give you the option to draw the plan view Leaving it unchecked will cause the column to be drawn without a base plate Base plates can be rotated when they are drawn Cap plate Cap plates can be put on by the column program or they can be added later Checking Show edge view will draw a cap plate at the top of the column and give you the option to draw the plan view and add stiffeners Leaving it unchecked will cause the column to be drawn without a cap plate or stiffeners 139 Columns Chapter 9 AutoSD Steel Detailing ROTATION Rotate cap plate in plan Cap plates can be rotated to any angle between 90 and 90 Slope cap plate from horizontal Cap plates can be sloped to any angle between 75 and 75 or to eae are any bevel between 45 and 45 Picking the Help gt s Ned button will open the dialog box shown to the left ROTATION ANGLE lt 0 ROTATION ANGLE gt 0 SLOPE ANGLE gt 0 SLOPE ANGLE lt 0 ROTATION 0 a in 0 ROTATION ANGLE lt 0 ROTATION ANGLE gt gt 0 SLOPE ANGLE lt 0 ROTATION SLOPE ANGLE 3 ROTATIOI RANGE OF ROTATION 90 TO 90 e
31. If bottom is type 1 2 3 4 6 or 7 with clip or plate Sub assembly mark for bottom connection Clip is 1 NS 2 FS 3 BS Gage of OP iiei riene Add piece to shop bill Yes QUANUILY eet n aE EE Description Sub assembly mark for bottom closure plate Add piece to shop bill Yes Qvuantity sosisesndsiadedksdejern If bottom is type 3 or 7 Minus dimension at lower end Sub assembly mark for bottom stringer Are marks RIGHT and LEFT Yes Add piece to shop bill OY sssesasss ole dies If top is with clip or end plate Sub assembly mark 00 eee eee eres Clip is 1 NS 2 FS 3 BS oe Gage of clip or end plate we Add piece to shop bill 00 0 eee Yes QUNIN eiee gar soklen erne aen Description If 6 is negative Sub assembly mark for top vertical closure plate Add piece to shop bill Yes _ Quanti eaea ena ESSENS a ENES If top is type 1 3 or 4 Assembly mark for top horizontal closure plate Add piece to shop bill Yes No Quantity er a EA EE If top is type 2 Sub assembly mark for top stringer Are marks RIGHT and LEFT Yes No Add piece to shop bill Yes No Quanti Y eiren feet Sub assembly mark for sloping stringer Are marks RIGHT and LEFT Yes No Add piece to shop bill Yes No Quant simenn a h Tread type Pan Grating P G Standard stair
32. will increase by one and you will be place in the last bay at the right end of the elevation You can add a bay at any time Picking Copy will add a copy of the last bay to the right end of the elevation Copy will only be available when you are viewing the last bay Picking Delete will delete the current bay To select a different bay you can pick the Next or Prev buttons or you can pick the down arrow to the right of Bay This will drop down the list of all bays where you can select the number of the bay you want All bays must have a width Enter the width from center line of the column on the left to the center line of the column on the right in this edit box Main Elevations Elevations entered here will be dimension on the left side of the elevation detail and apply to all bays To enter an elevation type a number in the edit box and pick Add Repeat this until all elevations have been entered To change an elevation pick the elevation type in a new number in the edit box and pick Change Picking Delete will remove the currently selected elevation EL Note If you want to add a note such as First Floor or 2nd Floor to the detail pick the elevation you want the note associated with and then enter the note in this edit box Bottom center section This is for entering information in the current bay by picking a button that opens a new dialog box for that member The followi
33. 100 AutoSD Steel Detailing Beams Chapter 7 Input skewed angle of end connection The default setting is Auto This setting will skew the end of the beam automatically based on the offset dimension or angle shown in the plan view on page 102 Auto will keep both ends parallel with each other in plan view If you need one end skewed and the other end square or at some other angle check Manual to input the angle Positive angles rotate counterclockwise and negative angles rotate clockwise Connection Type The top and bottom flanges can have nothing holes a clip or if you have purchased the bracing package you can import a gusset plate that has been previously calculated and saved The web can have any one of the connections noted under End Connections on page Error Bookmark not defined except for item 9 Import column file data If you have created column files you can import the data for certain types of connections to avoid entering it again here Clip Connection If a clip is chosen for the web connection you need to select whether it is on the Near Side Far Side or on Both Sides and the setback from the heel of the clip to the end of the beam The setback defaults to the setting in the customer configuration but is provided here for a per beam setting If a shop bolted clip is chosen you can change the Ist gage for shop bolts dimension The default is from the customer confi
34. Beams Chapter 7 AutoSD Steel Detailing WING PLATE side view Plate Only or Plate and End View of Shape The wing plate program is for drawing the side view of a shear lug on an existing column detail or end view section The end view can also be drawn at the same time The lug can be on either side or both sides and will be dimensioned down from the top You can have 1 to 14 rows and one or two columns of holes The plate can be square or skewed with the web of a beam and the beam can be level or sloping All sections for plates on beams are cut looking to the left The wing plate will be drawn to the scale set by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command Plate amp End View of Shape Wing Plate side view p Draw plate on Select member Channel is toed Beam web Column web Column flange Select HSS 10x2x3 16 lo Let amp Right Draw end view of member Extend to stiffeners Vertical sideis 10 Horizontelsideis 2 Re id Select side plate is on View input far E Reverse sides Left nearside 1 Right far side la Let Right C Connect plate to top flange Section mark for detail Copy other side C Conn
35. Connection at battom a OO pa ADERE FJNONE I JCUP JHOLES JPL PLAIN CUP HOLES PLATE m TOP 4 PLAN Jeur HOLES JeLate PLAIN ONLY Upper stringer size Sloping stringer size mg Thickness of tread support Flat Bars 2 Width of tread support Flat Bars roonrrorrnronnnernr Sub assembly mark for Bottom tread support Upper support size Lower stringer size Lower support size Sub assembly mark for Standard tread supports End of material Right end Header or Clip size es TATA He co 10 100 ind 11a zH mn 13 4 I FH a e frp I DD 252 AutoSD Steel Detailing Error Handling Appendix F ERROR HANDLING AND REPORTING AutoSD Inc takes every step to insure the quality and performance of the products it sells There are however times when a certain course of events that we have not subjected the software may cause an error If you experience problems we want to hear about them If you have a suggestion or an idea of how the product can better serve your needs we encourage you to contact us The future of AutoSD depends on the comments and needs of our users REPORTING PROBLEMS and COMMENTS There are three ways you can contact AutoSD Inc for problem reporting or general comments e Voice 601 679 5800 e Fax 815 346 5164 e E mail support O autosd com Mail or fax a copy of the AutoSD REPORT FORM A copy o
36. EL TOP FLOOR Ends Dimension 4 is from the work point at the bottom end OK Cancel to the end of the stringer and 5 is from the work point at the top end to the end of the stringer BAY WIDTH 1 2 Po R n f1 BAY WIDTH 1 2 13 12 Rikt 1 Elevation view of stair image 6 is from top of upper floor to top of frame member 7 is from nosing line to top of stringer 8 is from top of lower floor to top of frame member 9 is from the work point at the bottom tread to the back of the header on the lower landing This dimension is required even if this is the ground floor It can be 0 10 is from the work point at the upper floor to the back of the header beam 11 is the depth of the landing on the left side from back of header to back of wall member 12 is the depth of the landing on the right side from back of header to back of wall member 11 amp 12 locate the face of the CMU wall shown in the landing setup 13 is a global dimension used for all stairs in one bay The dimension can be the same as the bay width or inside distance of CMU walls at each end of stair If the stair frames into a floor beam on the column center line on the left for example 36 AutoSD Steel Detailing Erection Tools Chapter 2 dimension 11 will not be u
37. Ww STRINGER BRACING This program will detail a view of the stair looking up from the bottom detailing shop 4 5 YR ENTER 0 FOR 10 amp 11 IF TALS GO TO END OF MATERIAL bolted or shop welded bracing on the underside ee Fi of the stair stingers Tail dimensions may go to either end of material or to a work point y Stair Bracing Input is in FT IISS x Note PER p i TAIL TO HERE FOR MK2 When detailing the stringers and saving CNC 1 data you will need to have the tails coming ose loteswtetens otaua Tagen erene p MK2 from the right end of one stringer and the left lovs otsiiwinss o talsionsitens maese c12x207 end of the other stringer to match the stringer ad am i ve FE details Both stringers and stringer bracing will E E oe pi a have to be on the same drawing r amp 181 Stairs Chapter 12 AutoSD Steel Detailing E Header Beam This program is for detailing simple header beams at stair landings It is supplied with the Stair package in case you did not purchase the Beam package It uses the configuration settings for beams but will only detail channels and horizontal dimensions will always be b
38. message box appears warning that loading of a template file overwrites the menu source file Select YES To continue loading the MNU file For AutoCAD 14 2000 2005 Select AUTOSD from Menu Groups and pick the Menu Bar tab Select where you want to place the AutoSD menu group in the Menu Bar list and pick Insert Select Close All versions of AutoCAD can load the autosd mnu file You may need to change Files of type to Legacy menu files mns mnu at the bottom of the Select Customization File 227 Installation Appendix A AutoSD Steel Detailing dialog box to be able to select the AUTOSD MNU file The MNU file does not have the ribbon menu in it If you have AutoCAD 2010 or later and load the AUTOSD CUIX menu file you can use the ribbon menu in AutoSD Use the RIBBON command to turn the ribbon menu on Use the RIBBONCLOSE command to turn the ribbon menu off The ribbon menu can be used with or without the pulldown and toolbar menus Pulldown menus can be turned on and off with the command MENUBAR Set the value to 1 to turn it on and to 0 to turn it off WARNING If you are updating AutoSD from version 2011 or older do not use the menus in the sub folders of C autosd menus Only load the autosd mnu autosd cuix autosd15 mnu or autosd15 cuix file with the MENULOAD command Do not load any auto sd mnu cui or cuix files You should delete these files after transferring any changes you have made to t
39. 0104 8 03 9 3 Insertion point at top center of end view Plate Only on an existing W8 x 31 column flange Draw plate on Column flange Right far side Member W8x31 1 0608 2 0 3 03 4 0012 5 0013 6 0104 7 0104 8 03 9 3 Pick center of column web view at elevation line Plate Only Skewed on Sloping Beam OF BEAM R38x5916x1 4 16 Draw plate on Beam web AR 3116 12 Left near side Member Wl6x26 Connect plate to top flange pA Connect plate to bottom flange 12 Slope of support beam from horizontal 19 9831 1 05 115 Beams Chapter 7 AutoSD Steel Detailing 2 3 04 4 0012 Pick center of beam on top flange D 0013 6 0104 7 0104 8 03 ime ERE ANGLE ANGLE 9 10 0002 Thickness of plate 0006 The slope of the beam may be entered as positive or negative as shown above Note 1 The angle entered can be from the web of the support beam or from a line that is 90 from the web Note 2 As you look down on the beam as detailed that the plate is attached to entering Left would mean the plate is on the left side of a vertical line through the work point Right would mean the plate is on the right side of a vertical line through the work point Note 3 10 is the half web thickness of the beam framing into the plate The end view of the beam will not be drawn if the plate is skewed even if you select
40. AutoSD 2012 is installed in C autosd Install AutoSD 2015 in C autosd 2015 Note You can only use Windows Uninstall Programs function to uninstall the last version of AutoSD that was installed In the example above you would not be able to uninstall AutoSD 2012 because AutoSD 2015 was installed after AutoSD 2012 You would have to delete the AutoSD 2012 folder manually to remove the installation Open a drawing in AutoCAD and pick Tools gt Options gt Profiles If you do not have a profile named for the current version of AutoSD pick rename and change the name of the current profile to AutoSD 2012 To make a new profile pick Add to list Enter the name AutoSD 2015 and pick Apply amp close Pick Set Current Pick the Files tab Change the Support file search path for AutoSD to C autosd 2015 support Pick Apply Pick OK Load the AutoSD menu as noted below To change from one version of AutoSD to another just pick Tools gt Options gt Profiles select the profile you want and set it current AutoCAD Release 14 configuration From the pulldown menu select TOOLS and then Preferences or type CONFIG and press enter dialog box is displayed Select Files Double click on Support file search path Select Add Add the following line in the newly created box C AUTOSD SUPPORT Where C is the drive where AutoSD is installed AUTOSD is the name you gave for the AutoSD folder Close AutoCAD Start AutoCAD To e
41. AutoSD Steel Detailing Draw Chapter 3 PIPE Pulldown AutoSD gt Draw gt Pipe Ribbon AutoSD I gt Miscellaneous This program will convert a single polyline to a double line representation of a pipe with the option of drawing the inside wall The scale is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command POUR STOP Shop Attached Pulldown AutoSD gt Detail gt Pour Stop shop attached Toolbar Detail 1 0 20 0 1 0 Ribbon AutoSD II gt Detail 1 0 7 SPA amp 7 9 14 0 1 0 8 studs ma REU D FS 240 Ne SPA 3 0 my O T Pour Stop shop attached Input is in FT IISS va cs 7 ee ae NE ve pr Ke S I 2 ngis E a om I I ER M LeftSide O Right Side 0500 s gt FA A Le oasen EN m OE ON PE EE EE This draws a pour stop on top of a beam and or a section En Pan mm View The pour stop can be a bent plate or angle toed Spaces amp 340 10 0 Space at righi end is 20 9 Spaces amp 2 0 10 0 Space otright end is 1 0 near side or far side You can draw just the side view
42. E f 5 r Top After selecting the location for the vertical dimensions for the Stair Elevation the dialog box shown to the left pops up It is for entering information to draw the elevation view of the handrail on the stair This 6 0 0100 program can also be accessed from AutoSD gt Stairs Rails gt Erection gt Rail Elevation When popped up by the stringer sg program several options are pre selected and mM disabled Select the end conditions from the 8 2 06 9 3 06 10 3 03 r Bottom 0 choices on each side of the main view and mo SER enter the dimensions required Select Cancel if you do not want any handrail on the stair Cancel NOTE e This program is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command e The tread type shown in the lower right corner of EN the 3rd icon menu is for concrete steps e If you choose to pick the i a3 e Lower work point this point is on the finish floor on a vertical line through the noising point of the f E first tread EL 10 90 1 ba 3 10 EROT 3 EL 5 6 816 1 0 6 0 LEVEL HANDRAIL The Level Handrail program will draw single and multiple line level handrails with posts bolte
43. Last space is 3 Ok If 3 is too small for the first space you can increase it and the number of spaces and the remainder will be re calculated Embed angle can have one hole by making Hole spacing and First space the same dimension and at the center of the angle The length must be drawn to scale for this option EMBED PLATE Pulldown AutoSD gt Detail gt Embed Plate Toolbar Detail T Py Ribbon AutoSD II gt Detail i bs This program will detail an embed plate Insertion is aided with v EL Length 40000 the help of an outline box Press the minus key on the numeric nous po keypad while the outline box is displayed to reduce the length F te P tg o1 2 Deformed OFB O Headed Hooked the picture will be drawn The default is to draw the length to 1 m au Em scale and cannot be drawn longer ey En onrenan t First space 0500 Anchors can be deformed rod FB headed stud bent rod The PER brune program will automatically calculate the number of studs that air will fit a given length The default for the first space is the same as the last space OK Cancel EXTRACT BOLTS All Drawings Pulldown AutoSD gt Extract gt Bolts All drawings Ribbon AutoSD I gt Shop bill Use this command to extract the field bolts from all dra
44. Next Bay Bottom 110 0000 Member L4x4x3 8 Top EL 120 0000 Add F Type KNEE KNEE r Orientation a ae Example 47k p 21D1 will be printed as 47k peepee Patten 21D1 eas en Work Point at Bottom of brace and Work Point at Top of brace Peer ed Sen Select where the work line of the brace will intersect the beam and Wark line is at column either Center or Face Work Line is at Select where the work line of the brace is located Top of brace Bottom of brace amp Center of brace OK Cancel After making all selections for one brace pick Add to add another brace The selections of the currently selected brace will be the defaults for the new brace Pick OK to save and close the Brace dialog box Pick Cancel to close the Brace dialog box without saving the changes CMU wall CMU wal Input isin FT ISS CMU walls between Columns The wall can include brick on either side Dimension A can be referenced from either column line and from either side of the wall Block widths available are 4 6 8 10 and 12 The dimension locating the wall from the column will be drawn above the top of the wall If you have two walls the same height located from t
45. OF HOLES Single Line or Word Wrap SL WW lt SL gt WW Maximum characters per line lt 0 gt 15 2nd Leader start point Press Enter to exit Enter Type an R and press enter to rotate the text to any angle The default angle is 0 degrees QUICK Pulldown AutoSD gt Dimension gt Leader Toolbars Dimension I Leader Ribbon AutoSD I gt Dimension This is AutoCAD s multi line leader command MULTI LINE Pulldown AutoSD gt Dimension gt Leader multi line Toolbars Dimension I Leader Ribbon AutoSD I gt Dimension This leader command can place a single line of text or multiple lines It can have one leader or multiple leaders Leader start to point to point Rotation Ist Leader note NO PAINT WITHIN 3 OF HOLES Type an R and press 2nd Leader note Press X to exit Enter enter to rotate the text to 2nd Leader start point Press Enter to exit Enter any angle w Bubble Pulldown AutoSD gt Dimension gt Leader w bubble Toolbars Dimension I Leader Ribbon AutoSD I gt Dimension This leader command can place text in a circle It can have one leader or multiple leaders Leader start 97 Dimensioning Chapter 6 AutoSD Steel Detailing to point to point Ist Leader note Press X to exit lt gt 1 2nd Leader start point Press Enter to exit Enter Dynamic Pulldown AutoSD gt Dimension gt DLeader Toolbars Dimension I Leader Ribbon AutoSD I gt Dimens
46. RHS SHS PS CHS ERW HE ESN listeur W DIL HD HE HL HP HX IPE IPN IPEA IPEO IPER IPEV C U UAP UPN TS HSS PS HSS L L listaus W TE UB UC WB THC 9 BT CT C PEC TEC TS RHS tpg TERS OLY RAUA j Where listus is for US listcan is for Canada listuk is for United Kingdom listeur is for European listaus is for Australian In order to add more members of an existing shape to the data base just edit the file that contains the shape type using the database editor found under AutoSD gt Modify gt AISC database As the name implies it will only edit the shapes used in the US Shape files for other countries will have to be edited manually 234 AutoSD Steel Detailing Support Files Appendix B To add different shape types to the data base create a file that contains the shape type definitions Put the file in the autosd data folder Edit the file asd_data cfg and add the new shape and alias ie shape alias to the second line of the country section Add the shape and the corresponding data file name to the third line of the country section Add the new shape designation to the list for it s alias in the SHAPES section A copy of the first four lines of the data file us w dat is shown below The format is typical of all US data files D We M
47. Rows The insertion points of the text in a row must line up within 1 of each other Justification The justification of all of the text in a single column must be the same but may be different from column to column Mark amp Quantity 1 If the main mark and sub mark are in the same column their quantities must be in different columns 2 If the main quantity and sub quantity are in the same column their marks must be in different columns Any text that was selected whose insertion point does not line up with the column and row requirements will be omitted from the Imp or csv file and written to a file with the same name as the imp or csv file but with an err extension This could be weight values or text in columns not requested In most cases these files may be deleted The text in the shop bill for Model space and each Paper space layout will be extracted as long as the Paper space layout name does not begin with Layout All output will be in one file with the same name as the drawing file EXTRACT for Fabtrol using Attributes Pulldown AutoSD gt Extract gt for Fabtrol Using Attributes Ribbon AutoSD I gt Shop bill Shopbill and Fieldbolt Extract File Utility Warning Attributes must not be used if you are eemeime Meet Pau Shop Bil rive elect Files drawing in Model space and Paper space or just Paper Ge micron fre 2 KSS space with multiple layouts Directory 3 kss C
48. Select a color configuration file and pick the EDIT button The Setting Colors Configuration box pops up These files store the colors for dimension lines extension lines dimension text section labels text holes hidden lines object lines Main marks Grab Rails Column Grid text Column Grid bubble Column Grid line Color toolbar and Line toolbar The color of layer ASD_DRAW is used to control the color of text the layer ASD_SECT is used for the color of section labels and the layer ASD_MARK is used for the color of main marks 24 AutoSD Steel Detailing Introduction Chapter I Substitute for Color toolbar The color used for the Color and Line toolbars are controlled by these settings The actual color of the icons in the toolbars will not change but you can vary the color used by each icon The color used by the Red icon for example can be changed to any shade of red or any other color To change a color select a color swath to display the color choices Pick a color and pick OK The default color configuration files copied to your AUTOSD folder when AutoSD is installed are AutoSD CVSpro SDS 2 SteelCAD and XSteel These are just arbitrary file names and have no association with the color configuration when importing DXF files into AutoSD for CVSpro SDS 2 or XSteel You can rename these files as you like Save colors for importing DWG s from Below the color choices is a row of check boxes When you import a DXF
49. under Beams to enter a description in the shop bill do not add a space after the shape if you have this box checked A space will be added automatically Putting one when you type the description will result in two spaces Put a space on each side of x Put a check in this box if you want to have a space on each side of the x character in the description When using Shop Bill Text Attributes under Beams to enter a description in the shop bill do not add a space before or after the x if you have this box checked A space will be added automatically Putting one when you type the description will result in two spaces Lines are numbered from Select Top down or Bottom up Limits of shop bill for extracting text Enter the X and Y coordinates of the upper left and lower right extents of text that will be in the shop bill This is used to select the text using these two points as a window when you extract the shop bill information using text instead of attributes Make sure the window does not include the headings or any line numbers Text Height and Text Color Enter the height for text in the edit box To change the text color pick the color swatch and then select the color you want The height and color selections affect attributes as well Print Picking this will give you a print of all settings and options selected If the Weight category is non zero you need to select whether the weight for su
50. 39 8056 10 to 12 15 0707 To the right is a view of the file 1 gus that was saved from the calculation of gusset plate type 1 Pick VIEW GUS FILE from AutoSD gt Bracing menu to view a gusset file Enter the folder name and select the file This view of the file is provided for reference in case you need to verify an input 9 29 2012 10 24am 1 Setback 1 2 fillet fillet View Gusset Plate File File C Customer Sss 5 gus Type 1 Bolts Rows of bolts Bolts arein Single sheer Horiz 0 Mio 120 Bolt size 3 4 vaar 5 82 100 Bolt value 750 Boltspacing 3 0 Slope 6 Wu Connections 84 6 Horiz welded Horiz setback 5 0 Vert 2 clips Vert setback 172 FAN Slope Bolted Slope welded ve 2 Loads Plate size Load 00 A 1103 8 Hear 2 Area 24 BE 148 3 FY Grade 36 NR FE i Thickness 5 16 Gp raceisin tension de 0A 50 00 tension Clip Outside comer YES 10 3 0 compression Clip Inside comer NO 11 o 12 0 Angle 40058 Brace thickness 5 16 3 35 8 Bevel 10 to 12 Slope 1577 16 Actual clearance 1116 yan 35 8 129 Bracing Chapter 8 AutoSD Steel Detailing LIST GUS FILES This command will give a complete listing of the file names with the extension gus in the folder that you enter The gus files are created when you save a gusset plate calculation to be used to draw a gusset plate H EDIT GUSSET PLA
51. A1 Connection file Draw length A2 Connection file Draw length A3 Connection file Draw length A4 Bolt size 5 5 FT IISS Input FT IISS Input for Al 1 to scale Y N for A2 1 to scale Y N for A3 1 to scale Y N for A4 1 to scale Y N 8 6 3 4 8 lt 0 gt Enter 9 lt 0 gt Enter lt Y gt Enter lt Y gt Enter lt Y gt Enter lt Y gt Enter 7 7 8 8 L 9 1 1 8 10 1 1 4 lt 6 gt Insert point at left end Pick a point for the lower left end of brace la pg BRACE 2 amp 3 BRACE The main brace shown as Brace I in the slide to the B D left is drawn first The insertion point is the lower left end Brace 1 and 2 will be drawn second and third and their insertion point is the upper left end DIMENSIONS AT A4 Lu ST BRACE DI S z z HA m N O y Fa BRACE o p i 1 BRACE 1 x The last mark was 1 Ma Are marks RIGHT Q Sub assembly mar in mark 1D1 and LEFT Yes No lt N gt Enter uantity 1 k for brace aa Shop bill information on mark 1D1 Place shop bill Sub assembly mar Shop bill information on mark pa DECIMAL Bolt value single shear lt 6 6300 gt 9 9 I ASTM A36 A572 xxx For same area as brace 11 3 4 FT IISS Width of center plate using Load Thickness A588 A992 lt A36 gt Enter FT IISS Thickness of center plate
52. After finishing you can press the enter key to open the dialog box MultiPolyline same as the Multiline button but the lines will be drawn using polylines Does not work in AutoCAD 14 You can use the Tube 1 MLine and the MLine Scale to create any size pipe or tube mline If you need a tube use a MLine Scale of 1 75 and the Tube 1 standard MLine NAILER ANGLE Chanel Pulldown AutoSD gt Detail gt Nailer Angle Toolbar Detail Ribbon AutoSD II gt Detail eae a Size L5x3x3 8 C Usasa Long leg horizontal Length O Toed up amp Toed down Rotation 00 This program will detail an angle that is to be shipped loose with holes or slots in one leg The angle length may be drawn to scale Insertion is aided with the help of an outline box Press the usnu minus key on the numeric keypad while the outline box is aruse er 7 displayed to reduce the length the picture will be drawn The Ps program will automatically calculate the number of holes that will fit a given length The default for the first space is the same as the last space Overall Length 2 0000 Gage of vertical leg web 0 0106 ox Cencel 60 AutoSD Steel Detailing Draw Chapter 3 NAILER HOLES
53. Bracing Chapter 8 Command Pick AutoSD or AutoSD II gt Bracing gt Gusset Plate Brace SELECT OPTION SELECT GUSSET PLATE TYPE Cancel An icon menu appears Pick the gusset plate type SELECT OPTION SELECT BRACE ORIENTATION gt N Another icon menu appears for orientation Gusset Plate Input is in FT IISS Horizontal Connection Welded 1 Clip 2 Clips O End PL O Bolted Setback 0 0008 pr Outside Corner Clip O Square After selecting the orientation a dialog box is put on the screen with the gusset plate type r Vertical Connection O Welded 1 Clip 2 Clips O End PL O Bolted Setback 0 0008 Inside Corner O Clip Square and in the orientation that you picked r Connection to gusset Bolted O Welded O Welded w 1 Bolt Weld size on brace e 3 16 O 1 4 O 5 16 O 3 8 After selecting the options at the top and BOTH 5 AND 5a MUST BE HA 1 2 3 4 5 5a 6 68 E filling in all of the empty boxes select OK at ja the bottom of the dialog box m E You can enter 0 for A if you want to give a f specific clearance inst
54. GOL of clip 0 0204 Clips are bolted to WF column V Long leg is outstanding Split Tee WT 4x5 Gage of Tee stem 0 0204 Split Tee is bolted to WF column Stiffener plate thickness Wing plate thickness Welded edge to first hole V Stiffeners required when plate is in column web 0 0006 0 0204 0 0006 Grade of connection material Bolt value Other value Left side of column in elevation is Face x Cancel Joist config looking at line 1 the face on the left side of the column in the elevation view would be D Looking at line A the face on the left side of the column in the elevation view would be A After creating the column file for the first elevation view append the results of the second view to the existing file The two views may be processed in either order Girt configuration Girt connection Input is in FT IISS size L3x3x1 4 2 1 D Stem is down Connect with fe GL I i f i ER Joist configuration Select the Joist config button
55. I t t PR VIEW WILL BE OFFSET HOLES IN WIDE LY ON FLANGE SHAPES ONLY DRAWN ONI IF COL GAGE IS 0 ANGLE WILL BE WELDED TO COLUMN IF NUMBER OF ANGLES IS SET TO 2 OFFSET WILL EQUAL THE SPACE BETWEEN ANGLES FROM EL DOWN IS ENTERED AS 03 03 09 R L bo HLS RIGHT HLS LEFT GAGE OSI ELEVATION _ a a RIGHT f rat GAGE OSL ELEVATION PE 3 is HLS RIGHT RIGHT H l re SPACING GAGE OSL LEE ELEVATION GAGE OSU SPACING ALS RIGHT TE 0 Og SPACING gl GAGE OSL CAN BE 0 FOR NO HOLES HLS LEFT amp HLS RIGHT CAN BE O FOR NO HOLES SPACING IS ENTERED AS A LIST OF DIMENSIONS SEPARATED BY COMMAS EX 03 09 OR CAN BE O FOR ONE HOLE GIRT WT ELEVATION WT IS CENTERED ON FLANGE AND WEB HL SPACING ELEVATION _ E GAGE CAN BE 0 FOR NO HOLES SPACING IS ENTERED AS A LIST OF DIMENSIONS SEPARATED BY COMMAS EX 10 03 1 Clip Angle GAGE is from center of column to center of holes OFFSET is from center of column to face of clip It is the
56. Modify gt AISC database Ribbon AutoSD I gt Modify i oo 1 This program will allow you to edit all information in the amc meoies po M AutoSD AISC database of US shapes The example to the left n shows the dialog box for editing W shapes but all dialog boxes i oe work the same First select the type of shape then the size that IA Kr S you want to edit This is selected from a drop down list The T wo metric equivalent is given in an edit box below the drop down i Ep EP list Click on any edit box and make your change All dimensional input is in decimal inches After all editing is Save as r Er E finished pick OK to save the changes back to the file Picking a JE i EE Cancel will cause you to lose all changes for that shape type gene a L pee L aea Save This will save changes to the current size Selecting a i SSP different size will also save any changes to the current size Save as This will save the current size to a new size All Im changes made before picking Save as will be saved to the new size and not the current size Delete This will delete the current size from the database If it exists in the
57. ONE 1B1 W8x31 15 3 1 4 473 40 1 2 aa L3x3 1 2x5 16 0 5 1 2 6 05 2 ab L4x3 1 2x5 16 2 5 1 2 37 86 2 1B2 W14x22 14 10 3 4 655 42 1 1 4 ac L4x3 1 2x5 16 0 8 1 2 21 82 4 ad L4x3 1 2x5 16 0 8 1 2 21 82 2 pa PL 3 8x10 3 8 1 2 1 4 31 42 2 af L3x3x1 4 14 10 3 4 145 98 ONE 1B3 W16x31 22 3 689 75 1 4 ag L3x3 1 2x5 16 0 11 1 2 25 30 Print OK This is a sample print of a sbl file If you were to print this file it would run off the right side of an 8 1 2 wide page because the lines are too long This sample shows all of the columns that are generated from the asd sbl txt file To make this print on the page without running off the edge you would need to edit the asd sbl txt file and remove the lines for the columns you do not want The template file used to extract the attributes MUST be the same file used to convert or print the sbl file 160 AutoSD Steel Detailing Shop Bill Chapter 10 EJE ATT EXTRACT for EJE using Attributes Pulldown AutoSD gt Extract gt for EJE using Attributes Ribbon AutoSD I gt Shop bill not z Warning Attributes must not be used if you ar drawing in Model space and Paper space or just Convert File Merge Files Print Shop Bill Paper space with multiple layouts Drive Select Files Oc MICRON v Timp R Directory imp AutoSD supports Structural Material Manger sold by acy 4 imp ustomer E J E Industries Inc P O Box 268 Washington
58. PA CES 15301 Phone 1 800 321 3955 Fax 412 228 7668 You can order a full working demo from E J E Industries ken Tyi C Customer Sss TEMP imp gt When you select AutoSD gt Extract gt for SMM using OK Ewt Attributes from the pulldown menu shop bill attributes will be extracted from the drawing and automatically converted to an ASCII file format that can be imported by the SMM program The file name will be the same as the drawing name but will have an imp or csv extension and will be located in the same folder as the drawing The extension type is set in your customer configuration imp is for the older fixed field format and csv is for the newer ASCII delimited file format After extracting for SMM you will have a separate imp or csv file for each drawing You can merge these files together by using the extract program Select Extract Program from the AutoSD gt Extract pulldown menu Select the tab Merge Files Change the drive and then the folder to where the imp or csv files are located Change the Type to imp or csv Enter a file name in the File Name box Do not give an extension If the file does not exist it will be created to hold the merged files If it does exist the files selected will be merged to it Select the files that you want to merge and select OK You can merge files into an existin
59. RESULT 10 0208 5 0304 15 0512 1520512 81 Calculator Chapter 5 AutoSD Steel Detailing 6 03 Enter 20 11 RESULT 6 0300 20 1100 27 0200 27 0200 6 RESULT 6 0300 20 1100 27 0200 27 0200 x 6 0000 163 0000 163 0000 5 RESULT 163 0000 5 0000 168 0000 168 0000 Press SPACE bar to exit Command For those of you not accustomed to the RPN style and would prefer the standard entry format there is another version of the calculator in the BONUS folder The file name is CALC LSP If you like a calculator that works the same way you would write a math problem out by hand If you want to add 2 2 you type in 2 2 Enter you can copy this file to your AUTOSD folder using Windows Explorer Other functions of the calculator include 1 X CHS X lt gt Y SQUARE ROOT and EXPONENT e 1 X This is the reciprocal of x To take the reciprocal simply press the X key either upper or lower case e CHS This is the change sign function Press the letter C to change signs e X lt gt Y This function swaps X with Y Press the lt or key X lt gt Y will swap two numbers on the screen If only one number is on the screen then the number on display will be swapped with the number in the X register The CALC calculator RPN type only has three stack registers called X Y and Z and a fourth register which is the display Stack registers enable you to solve complex equations without actually rewritin
60. SPACING oinn nd 201 See use AG ease 200 Landing Pene EA ENNS RENNER 183 Frame ennei er e aE 184 Grating venninde a i 184 Pleso 184 PAM ID uupssdsaeake dodekaeder 183 BE VS Sie eens STE SS EN BESES SES SEES ENE EGESS 78 Change objects layer s scscsasicsssssssensetenticcaees 78 Breeze layette EaR 78 Boldte Jayena noina er naiiai 78 Set layer EN ER 79 Thaw all layersunasansasansensssmmete 79 Lederne 58 Ada nr eva 58 Default nnnapannrenejanssdanbedunet 58 TUT EEE EE ecru 58 REMOVE pel 58 SG ed DS 58 SOF TE ca delse Eleg 58 Le dersvunssnapaasnansstanseinnshktanet 96 DEE aa 98 MULE iher errime anan eanna 97 QUICK Sorat he E Arte oA ee 97 WDD DIGS undrende ken 97 WITS VISION SA Mise ce advise aetna 98 Wordpress 96 E yveltallesniconi doa 192 Library Add to Hbri y on eae 57 KEENE NE AN 57 MENUS saae derhen 57 Line Welsbsav4qasadautdnssttuntin 26 Lintel A0056 nine 58 Lintel shop attached onronnvnrrrrvnrrrrnnernrnner 58 List field bolts in shop bill sororornrororrrrrrr 59 Loading the mennLsarveagstudretse 227 Lode BT ie satchel tea festa Sass 86 Locate weight COIUMN cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 85 Matk EE EE 16 Marks Sec Tags ae 41 N lene 167 Measure 2D line 4 59 Member 5 ae ran en arrene er 43 MENU SU I E el eee 7 Mehmet STN 196 Modify Break LING fps 73 Chriss Tear 74 Change to Pline iia Fl 74 SE stis 74 Color wAkteruu uunrqnaesndniteiike 74 Line Types ste 76 Line Weg ERR REE EEN BESS ERERSE
61. The load will be determined from the area based on the strength of the member If your brace is double angles you must give the total area of both angles to determine the correct load 3 Load gt 0 Area gt 0 The load used will be the greater of the load given or the load as determined in condition number 2 4 Load 0 Area 0 You will be asked to furnish the number of bolts in the brace The load will be determined by the number of bolts times bolt value times number of shear planes The number of bolts for the horizontal and vertical vectors will be determined from this load Note 125 Bracing Chapter 8 AutoSD Steel Detailing The tear out of the brace and gusset plate will not be checked if the load and area are input as 0 The number of bolts input will be the number used The design method used for calculating loads is set in your customer configuration Dimension A This is the dimension from the work point to the first hole in the brace If you leave it blank the dimension will be determined for you based on the rule of thumb clearance method If you input a dimension you will be asked to give the desired clearance If the dimension you input works with the given clearance then it will be used If it does not work the correct dimension will be calculated based on the given clearance and that will be used This means that the program can be used to check as well as detail a gusset plate by entering the dimension the
62. Up 44 0000 1 0000 This program is used to process or edit an existing column description file or create one from scratch When you select Edit Col File from the AutoSD gt Columns pulldown menu this program is launched Use your mouse to select items in the program or use the tab key to move forward and shift tab to move backward If you have created a description file from the beam program pick OPEN Change the directories box to your customer job folder select the file and then select Open or double click on the file A list of elevations is shown in the Elevations box at the top of the screen They will be listed in order with the lowest elevation at the bottom The number of connections at a selected elevation is shown to the right of the Elevations in the Connections box You change from one connection to another at the same elevation by selecting a different number in the Connections box The FACE box indicates which face the connection is on Face A is the left flange B is near side web C is the right flange and D is far side web 143 Columns Chapter 9 AutoSD Steel Detailing New Creates a new empty column file Open Opens an existing column file Save Saves the current column file SAVE AS This will save the current file under a different name giving you a copy This is useful when you have two columns that are similar After completing the description
63. come back to the input dialog box The shim plate will be Thk ROWS P 0 0600 ja 2 0 0300 3 0 0104 5 HOLE DIA mm N drawn to the scale set by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I BEN rm gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command OK Cancel fil VERTICAL PLATES This program will draw one or two vertical plates or one bent ee EE plate on top of or below a level or sloping line You can draw ot Under Bottom EN r View Plates are Right Plate an edge view or a front view To omit the plate on the left in ess oron osm snse somre the edge view select Single and Right Plate To omit the plate on the right select Single and Left Plate To draw a ge a EE single plate centered on the work line Select Single and Both HE i je m Plates and enter 9 and 10 as 0 To have the plates er all am plate centered on work ne 5 0 0013 dimensioned to the outside surface enter 9 and 10 as a 5 30 e HE negative If you change the bolt diameter from the default i I rm the hole size will be noted MT Plates square Plates vertical with surface 10 0 0300 Plates are square with surface amp Plates are vertical Cancel 113
64. displayed You are asked to select the method of entering control dimensions The method you select will be used to calculate the true length of the beam and the true lengths between connections For example If method 1 is selected as in this case the slope length 2 is calculated using the dimension entered as dimension 1 for the base and the difference in elevations for the rise If an offset is entered and is not 0 the SEERE este true length 4 is calculated using dimension 2 for the base and the offset for the rise PLAN VIEW TRUE LENGTH DIM ELEVATION OFFSET A SQUARE WEB GENE WEB Number of dimension to input 1 2 3 4 lt 1 gt Enter FT IISS Input dimension fl 15 06 FT IISS Angle Dimension of Offset of right end in plan is far side lt 0 gt 2 03 Instead of entering an offset dimension you can enter an angle by entering the letter A press enter and at the angle prompt enter the angle 102 AutoSD Steel Detailing Beams Chapter 7 Cut flanges square Yes No lt N gt Enter Extend skewed flange cut beyond end of web Y N N Answering Y to extend skewed flange will result in the be picture to the far left Answering N will result in cutting the flange off at the web as shown to the left Flanges will be extended by default if the Bevel flanges option is selected Select End Condition For sloping beams an icon menu is dis
65. gap between clips if you have 2 clips COL GAGE is the gage of the column Enter 0 if the clips are shop welded to the column FROM ELEV DOWN is the location of holes below the given elevation Use the Rows pop down list to select the number of rows needed FROM ELEV UP is the location of holes above the given elevation Use the Rows pop down list to select the number of rows needed 2 Girt Angle GAGE OSL is the gage of the outstanding leg This can be 0 if no holes are required OFFSET is from the elevation line down to the heel of the angle HLS RIGHT is from center of column to center of first hole to the right HLS LEFT is from center of column to center of first hole to the left 1 and 2 is how far the angle will extend from the center line HOLE SPACING is the spacing between holes ANGLE IS TOED Up or Down is the direction of the vertical leg 3 Girt WT GAGE is the gage of the WT flange This can be 0 if no holes are required OFFSET is from the elevation line down to the flange of the WT LENGTH is the length of the WT from the column center line HOLE SPACING is the spacing of holes from the center of the column STEM IS TOED Up or Down is the direction of the stem 146 AutoSD Steel Detailing Columns Chapter 9 JOIST L ror BOTTOM CHORD EXTENSIONS 4 Joist Angle nam This is a joist bottom chord stabilizer angle Do not use this connection for a seat ma Mu JOIST DEPTH is the distance fr
66. if not the correct dimension for A will be calculated and used Either way the answer for A that is displayed in the output will be the one that works 170 AutoSD Steel Detailing Stairs Chapter 12 Chapter 12 Stairs All programs in this chapter are under the AutoSD gt Stair pulldown menu Stairs Rails Toolbar and AutoSD II gt Stairs ribbon menu unless noted otherwise Sy gt gt gt L The STAIR program uses icon menus and dialog boxes for user friendly input You can draw pan stairs bolted tread stairs and butterfly stairs for pre cast treads that sit on top of the stringer The orientation of the stringer can be sloping up to the right or sloping up to the left Tail dimensions for bolted treads will be determined for you and put in a easy to read table or on the stringer detail if you select to draw the length to scale There are many different pan options to choose from and you can create your own to be used by the stringer program with the easy to use Tread Builder There are four top and seven bottom stringer conditions to choose from You can have holes for handrail post automatically located and placed on the stringer The stair stringer can be drawn to the actual length and to the actual bevel The depth will be drawn to scale Your sheet should be set up to a scale of 1 1 0 1 12 for metric Command Pick AutoSD or AutoSD II gt Stairs gt Stringer Stair Stringer Input is in FT II
67. lt 1 8 gt Enter Sub assembly mark for sloping stringer mb Sub assembly mark for clip at lower end aa Clip is 1 NS 2 FS 3 BS lt 1 gt Enter FT IISS Gage of clip 0112 Select angle from dialog box Add piece to shop bill Yes No lt Y gt Enter Shop bill information on mark aa Total sub quantity 1 Bolt size 5 5 8 6 3 4 7 7 8 8 1 lt 6 gt Enter Number of field bolts in Bottom end lt 1 gt Enter FT IISS Total grip less washers lt 5 16 gt 0112 Add another field bolt Yes No lt N gt Enter Sub assembly mark for closure plate at lower end pa Add piece to shop bill Yes No lt Y gt Enter Shop bill information on mark pa Total sub quantity 1 Sub assembly mark for upper stringer ma Sub assembly mark for clip at upper end ab Clip is 1 NS 2 FS 3 BS lt 1 gt Enter Separate spacing of holes with a comma FT IISS Gage of clip lt 1 3 4 gt Enter Enter gage as 02 0112 for 1 row 2 columns Select angle from dialog box Add piece to shop bill Yes No lt Y gt Enter Shop bill information on mark ab Total sub quantity 1 Bolt size 5 5 8 6 3 4 7 7 8 8 1 lt 6 gt Enter Number of field bolts in Top end lt 2 gt Enter FT IISS Total grip less washers lt 5 16 gt 0010 Add another field bolt Yes No lt N gt Enter Sub assembly mark for floor support angle at upper end ac Floor support angle is 1 NS 2 FS lt 1 gt Enter Select floor support angle from dialog box A
68. material list and color configurations This allows you to have several paper sizes for one job and several different customers If you had an older version that used the detvar cfg sbtext cfg and material tbl files you can import them with the Import buttons You can also import individual configurations from other custVAR cfg custBOM cfg custMAT cfg and custCLR cfg files If you need to edit a file or set a different one current you will use Customer Configuration to do this After selecting the configurations to use for this drawing pick OK The names selected will be stored in the drawing in a block called asdcust The next time the drawing is opened and edited you will not be asked to select the configurations to use unless the names stored in the drawing do not match any configuration files This can happen if the file names were changed EDITING A CONFIGURATION Pulldown AutoSD gt Customer Configuration Ribbon AutoSD I gt Shop bill Pick one of the buttons in the top section to display a list of configurations under File name 15 Introduction Chapter I AutoSD Steel Detailing The first time you open the configuration box and pick Detail variables you will have one file in it called Unnamed You can edit and use this file You can rename it or copy it with the Save as button and make more files If you have more than one file you can delete them but you cannot delete the last one There wi
69. mid ordinate arc length Te Veke angle chord radius and the rise from the chord to the arc at any distance ee cow ren from one end of a circular segment Select the two values to enter from 5 GN the list on the right side Select the Input Unit type Enter the two values er in the format of the unit type and pick Calc The answers are given in pe the lower right of the dialog box If you want a written record in your eres orms Oo oms drawing pick Print results to screen and pick a point AR melon 1947 oie ae nee Arc Length 127 0 Heian Helate gis Angle 44 9999 Chord 11 8 5 16 fo Height 1 1 15 16 Radius 15 3 5 16 bas Pick OK to close the program The next time the program is opened the previous input and answers are given T CALC Pulldown AutoSD gt Calculator gt Calc gt Decimal Pulldown AutoSD gt Calculator gt Calc gt FT IISS Toolbar Calculator Ribbon AutoSD I gt Miscellaneous This is a calculator It s basic functions are add subtract multiply and divide It uses the RPN reverse polish notation method You type in a number press enter type in another number and then press the function key either or To continue adding a chain of dimensions type in the next number and press the function key Command Pick AutoSD gt Calculator or AutoSD I gt Miscellaneous gt FT IISS gt Calc FT IISS CALCULATOR Press SPACE bar or Esc to exit 10 0208 Enter 5 0304
70. of the elevation view and will move with the cross hairs After picking a point the box disappears and the elevation is drawn GRID LINES w DIM Pulldown AutoSD gt Erection Tools gt Grid Lines w Dims Toolbar Erection Tools Ribbon AutoSD I gt Erection Tools This program will draw grid lines with column grid bubbles and optional dimensions between grid lines You draw the first grid line The end you start with is the end the grid bubble will be on After the first grid line and bubble has been placed you select one side of the line for the placement of other grid lines and bubbles and you select the location of dimensions if any are required After that all you input is the distance to the next line and the designation for the grid bubble Press ESC or enter 0 for the distance to the next grid line to end the program Entering the Grid mark as 150 11 will stack the text with 150 on top and 11 underneath The scale is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command JOIST LINES Pulldown AutoSD gt Erection Tools gt Joist Lines Toolbar Erection Tools Ribbon AutoSD I gt Erection Tools This program is similar to the beam lines program This program will place joist inside a four sided area The boundaries of this area do not have to be square or parallel The joist lines will be put on a layer called JOIST At the prompt FT IISS lt Joist spacing gt Nu
71. picking the start point and end point The holes will be drawn to the scale set by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command Select the options you want and the layer you want the objects drawn on and pick OK HOLE SIZE HOLES SLOT SIZE Pulldown AutoSD gt Draw gt Hole Size CEIDA Pulldown AutoSD gt Draw gt Slot Size w Leader Pulldown AutoSD gt Draw gt Slot Size wo Leader Toolbar Miscellaneous Ribbon AutoSD I gt Miscellaneous These are for labeling hole and slot sizes There are two slot commands one with a leader and one without The insertion point for the one without the leader is the left end of the symbol For the hole and slot command with leader you start with the location for the arrow The NEAR snap is automatically activated for this selection Pick the next point for the leader line and continue picking points Press Enter after selecting the last point If the first leader segment crosses any lines you will be asked if you want to select lines to omit arrowheads If you answer No arrows will be put at each intersection between the first leader segment and each line it crosses If you want to select lines to omit arrowheads you should use crossing to select them in case there are two lines in the same location one on top of the other The symbol is placed in the drawing at the end of the last leader segment After entering the slot size you are prompted for a note This note
72. the rail will 7 JA extend a minimum of 4 past the post or bend f e Number of rails must be greater than to allow the option for pickets e The number of rails and vertical spacing for end types 3 and 5 can be different from the center section of rail e If you have a multiple line rail and want a single line at the end beyond the post you need to select an end that has a return type 3 or 5 SEC 4 e Choose end type 4 or 5 if you want to include additional post at the floor level The spacing of post is entered as a single distance or as a list of distances separated by commas One dimension for mm each post space If you want the program to EEN Eee calculate the post spacing using input MS as the KS max space then enter 6 or 7 as negative and the distance from the work point to the end post and do NOT check the box to include additional post 1 ils a LENEA 3 6 BJ 1 0 189 Rails Chapter 13 AutoSD Steel Detailing Wall Rail
73. up and Move down buttons to change the order If you want the wing plate in the web to extend upward and downward to weld to stiffener plates the stiffeners should be listed first and the wing plate second If the wing plates are listed first they will not extend to the stiffener plates IMPORT GUSSET This is used to add the hole spacing for a gusset plate ABOVE BEAM connection that uses clips on the gusset to connect to BELOW BEAM a column When selected a file and folder dialog box ok CANCEL pops up After selecting the file another box pops up asking for the placement of holes Select above or below beam and then select OK If you select below beam another box pops up asking for the location of the work line Enter the dimension and select OK There are 16 different connections available to the column program 15 are shown below The 16th is NONE It puts an elevation line with no connections for use in allowing space for adding a detail later Start by picking AutoSD gt Columns gt Connections After completing one connection you can start another one by pressing Enter 145 Columns Chapter 9 AutoSD Steel Detailing CONNECTIONS CLIP L POSITIVE OFFSET WILL DRAW THE CONN AS SHOWN NEGATIVE WILL DRAW ON REVERSE ORGEL THIS VIEW WILL BE GAGE E DRAWN ONLY ON GAGE ET GAGE ELEVATION S tdr 1 of fe
74. up ee eo a See feo ED Pr ka FERRE TE EN E CT OO CM CC SEH Fomr E ES ET NE EE SS em eT a we Spee Leelee Pe ee ete eee CANAM JOIST DWG GRDER END SPACE UAL JOIST SPACES END SPACE TEX ARK JOIST DWG E PD BX FT FLORENCE SC 29302 FILE NUMBER A a CUSTOMER 2 JOB NAME E 3 NH SHIP TO PANT FLORENCE S C TST WO com 305 3 OE TST No SHEET oF DRAWN BY CHECKED BY fey QTY MARK GIRDER TYPE OAL A B C D E F G6 H K REMARKS SPECIFY NET UPLIFT PLF AND OR WIND END MOMENTS FT KIP AS REQUIRED To aE Oe EE morfar a YR ir seer sree r VULCRAFT GIRDER DWG 123 VULCRAFT LONG SPAN DWG 71 Draw Chapter 3 AutoSD Steel Detailing a LORENCE sc ge w E E i OND f TXL
75. 0 216 Thick TE en Me ar FY Decima eee Width BF 53 4 Depth 14 pee azn 86 Gar 1200 OD 3 500 OD 31 2in s Tiik Area 10 00 xd NE 0887 SLBB 0 Gapi 1790 ID 8 068 ID 81 16in Bld 2tf g 7 16 d 2tf 131 8 k z rZ 0 647 SLBB 3 8 Gap rY 1 930 Wall 0215 Wall 846i 5 tw Web a 81 4 ss 7 XY 11 4 Netural Axis Of Long Leg 2 re ana por Thick tw i 1158 yX 3 4 Netural Axis Of Short Leg 2 4 in 4 K ee ER 198 ok Cancel faren Weight 7 58 bitt Area 2 230 Angles Pipes Tubes Min Edge fr 1160 OK Cancel OK Canecl Tubes x USUAL GAGES FOR ANGLES Minimum Edge Distance Table J3 5 Size 1 Center of Standard Hole to Edge of Connected Part EF KE LEG 817 8 5 4 32 3 g fatal 4 st 3 22 2 15 3 eine asel aar as 2 Dia in Edges Gas Cut or Saw cut Edges b Weight 15 62 Ib ft rX 2 190 Area 4500 rY 1 600 3 12 78 3 4 OK Canecl y ia ue 7 8 11 20 118 1 13 40 11 4 118 2 11 2 11 4 21 4 15 8 Over 11 4 13 4 x Dia 11 4 x Dia OK redi kg 25 of the maximum design strength in the element c These may be 1 1 4 in at the ends of beam connection angles E sie P z Sze paxs 1 Size 3 4 ae 30 Metric size ieii Metric size s GRIP R THK 4 in E o 1 gere HR 7 i LD q1 9 kr or Qi l main O So A n a n MaxD 5 8 w 11 16 D 3 8 g 11 16 ml El ma r si Weight iib SD vila ni 5 8 g 71 8 TPN 16 LD 17 16 5 37 8 Weight 10019 e 9 16 TYPE UNC Weight 1 12 Ib of cone OK Cancel OK
76. 150 11 will place the 150 grid number over the 11 reference number separated by a line If you draw the column by supplying the connections manually you have the option of drawing faces A and C If you do not draw face A or C and have a connection in face A and B at the same elevation the dimensions will overwrite each other You should draw a face if you have any connections in that face Face A is the left flange B is near side web C is right flange and D is far side web Start with the lowest elevation and work your way up When you see the prompt Hole Spacing or From Elev Down or From Elev Up enter the spacing in the format the drawing was set up to use i e FT IISS or millimeters for metric 3 rows of holes at a spacing of 4 1 2 with the first hole starting 3 below the elevation would be entered as 03 0408 0408 If you do not have any holes above or below the elevation just press enter at the prompt Entering 0 will put a hole at the referenced elevation 140 AutoSD Steel Detailing Columns Chapter 9 If you draw the column by using a column file the program will draw face B and one or both of the other two faces When prompted for the insertion point a highlighted box will appear The outline of the box will be the limits of the picture for the column Pressing the key will increase the height of the box making the column taller At maximum height the column will be drawn to scale and
77. 16 from the bottom floor 2 Enter a single dimension greater than 0 example 6 06 to add equally spaced brackets between the bottom and top brackets where the spacing is less than or equal to your input 3 Enter multiple dimensions separated by a comma example 4 5 4 06 to add brackets spaced at 4 0 5 0 and the remaining space divided equally where the spacing is less than or equal to the last dimension of your input 4 199 Ladders Chapter 14 AutoSD Steel Detailing Enter multiple dimensions separated by a comma with the last dimension 0 example 4 5 4 06 0 to add brackets spaced at 4 0 5 0 and 4 6 with no additional brackets except for the one at the top Hoop Spacing 17 is for the space from the top hoop down to the second hoop The remaining distance between 13 and 17 will be divided into equal spaces where the spacing is less than or equal to the Max Spacing After picking OK and entering the main mark and quantity a dialog box is used for input of the hoops The stringer size defaults to that chosen in the ladder input dialog box Enter input 1 9 as required and the hoop Width and Thickness and pick OK A rectangular outline box is used to help in placing the detail The top hoop is drawn billed out and this process is repeated for the mid hoop Bottom ho
78. 3 4 rods only have KIY es ces mn Es 4 one clevis size but 7 8 and larger have more than one Ar er he size available 1 en MER JE ET ee mr Select the end conditions and a turnbuckle length If a clevis is used and more than one is available select the one needed Now click on the Calc Defaults button This will fill m some of the entries based on the end condition and turnbuckle selected Verify these values and enter the remaining entries 1 can be 0 to draw the brace in the vertical position 2 can be 0 to draw the brace in the horizontal position Select the pin type and pick OK to draw the rod brace Insertion point at lower left end Main mark 1D1 Are marks RIGHT and LEFT Yes No lt N gt Enter 136 AutoSD Steel Detailing Bracing Chapter 8 Quantity 1 Sub assembly mark for rod left end ra Sub assembly mark for rod right end rb Sub assembly mark for Turnbuckle ma Sub assembly mark for Clevis mb Sub assembly mark for Clevis Pin mc 112 CLEVIS mb w 8s6 BOLT nc Shop bill information on mark 1D1 LP Place shop bill text on LINE lt 4 gt Enter Y 3 i Shop bill information on mark ra Shop bill information on mark rb FEN Shop bill information on mark ma FRR Shop bill information on mark mb fr Shop bill information on mark mc me Command M Command Parallel Brace Tower Pick AutoS
79. 5 1 2 3 13 16 Left end Top flg Web 9 5 1 2 6 13 16 Left end Top flg Web 9 11 3 13 16 Left end Top flg Web 9 11 6 13 16 Left end Top flg Web 21 6 1 4 9 13 16 Left end Top flg Web 21 6 1 4 3 13 16 Left end Top flg Web 21 6 1 4 6 13 16 Left end Top flg Web 21 9 1 4 6 13 16 Left end Top flg Web 21 9 1 4 9 13 16 Left end Top flg Web 21 9 1 4 5 13 16 Left end Top flg Burns Type End Surface Length X Depth Y Setback Side Angle Notch D Bevel cut Left Bottom Flange 2 0 45 mm Rat Hole Left Bottom Flange 334 1 7 8 0 wenn eee Bevel cut Left Top Flange 2 4 menn 0 45 Rat Hole Left Top Flange 3 1 7 8 0 ween Block Right Bottom Flange 21 1 1 8 0 Block Right Top Flange 212 1 1 8 0 Side NS Near side Left Left side of center line in column web gage FS Far side Right Right side of center line in column web gage BS Both side No CNC data found A a EDIT Data Se Add CNC data for This program is for editing adding or viewing all of the xdata of a single O Hole hole clip tee or burn The dialog box shown below will open if a hole was jo O Tee
80. Brace z 3 A 506 OG D so PT KN 35 ee ae 3 04 RK g lt lt Cx al sake SS G Er S SD a me ENG Sr 6 05 RS 4 Eri JE Sa ts 1 1 7a 02 TOK Cancel OK Cancel Or C 23 An icon menu appears Another icon menu appears A dialog box is used to enter Pick Welded Pick the type of brace dimensions If the lower end is on a horizontal support and not at a corner enter 3 as a negative number that would cause the vertical line for 3 to fall to the left of the extreme end point of the brace This will give a single cut at the end of the brace This same technique can be used at each end for 3 4 5 and 6 Australia Canada O UK Europe USA Flanges TH E EH e amp After entering the dimensions and selecting a Angles L Np as k 3 5 g member size and insertion Pipes fss TJ sT Oxsm Oxs 014 point the brace is drawn se fe eye and billed out Tubes ass p E mH amp H fee Cold Formed 7 Cancel Member size is selected from a dialog box 1D1 ONE 135 Bracing Chapter 8 AutoSD Steel Detailing LP HSS in Frame Command Pick AutoSD or AutoSD II gt Bracing gt Draw gt HSS in Frame Step I Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 This command is for drawing the tube members in a welded frame Start with
81. By using the list under File name select a file and pick Load This list shows all of the stringer inputs that have been saved for this job List from other jobs can be selected with the Browse button The Delete button will delete a file from the current B Include Grab AGAINST FLOOR GR EA FLOOR 93 for G R pon Pipe bends O Miered oT Long radius amp Short radius C Mid rails are wire FLOGR TOP FLG TO LANDING Ja CONTINUE 1 4 TREADS list MS NAX SPACING Draw Leng to Scale C Print input C Continue top fange to botom landing The number of rail lines must be greater than I in order to enable the picket option Pickets can be Mid rail Post Angle rail sizes Top rail Botrail between any two pair of rails Spacing is the vertical distance from center line of rail to center line of rail It can be entered as a single distance or as a list of distances separated by commas If the number of distances is less than the number of spaces required for the of lines the last distance will be used for the remaining spaces 6 and 7 can be negative in order to put top or bottom post on the floor instead of on the stair T M B P and
82. CUT WHEN BLOCK OR FLANGE THIN IS SKEWED WP FOR COPE WHEN BOTTOM IS SKEWED WP FOR COPE WHEN BOTTOM IS SKEWED ANGLE BLOCK F OR BEVE The drawing below right shows the many combinations you can have for skewed beam ends The xdata for the blocks is stored in the X value The xdata for skewed web burns is stored in the line where noted in the drawing Since one entity can represent only one burn type if you have a skewed web or flange and the web or flange is also beveled you will need to pick a different entity to add the Bevel prep data to It can be any entity as long as it is on the correct layer SKEW EDIT DSTV file F Note You can edit most aspects of the file by changing values in the editor but if you want to add or change something not available in the editor you must draw the views first edit the drawing manually that needs changing and convert the perimeter of the view to a polyline before running the DSTV file editor The first prompt asks if you x X SKEW X SKEWED ANGLE 0 SKEWED ANGLE SAMPLE 6 ee BLOCK ANGLES lt 0 A SKEWED ANGLE lt 0 fh 4 want to Draw data from file lt N gt If you answer Yes the program will draw the views from the selected file using the program to graphically check DSTV files and then RAT HOLE ANGLE 0 opens the DSTV file editor The main dialog box of the
83. Dimension SE Cuts Copes and Blocks rer z h r This program will add a cut to an existing beam detail The options are Block Cut amp chip or Cut flange width The way the block is dimensioned EE is set in the customer configuration for beams A S K Cancel Select Block Cut amp chip cut flg Width B C W lt B gt Select top flange of beam Select left end of beam Pick location of horizontal dimension line Lo N Pick location of vertical dimension line FT IISS Block length 0308 FT IISS Block depth 0104 4 Flange Gage Leader Note This program is for adding the gage to an existing beam The default will be the gage of the last member selected wa Property symbol This program will put the symbol shown to the left showing the depth and web thickness Me W and the flange width and thickness F at your insertion point It uses a dialog box to 928 select the member size 99 Beams Chapter 7 AutoSD Steel Detailing 3 END CONNECTIONS Selections for the end connection are made from a dialog box Left End In
84. Draw blowup GE OL Draw blowup r Pan Material 4 E 0 0112 Select Gage L Save Optional Gage 10GA M Calculate F Dec Thick T 0 1345 TOC F Checkered Plate Reffrom nose G 0 0204 H Tread 1 C J me TO RED INSIDE BEND a Select the type of nose Selecting None Support Only will just draw the supports on the stringer Select the type of rise available for the nose that was selected Select the type of bottom available for the nose and rise that was selected Select the Support configuration The top option is for mitered supports Select the support type Putting a check in the box for None will cause supports to NOT be drawn under the tread and rise Put a check in the box for Tread if you want a support under the tread Put a check in the box for Rise if you want a support on the riser Put a check in the box for Drop pan if you have a cast nosing Pick the Select Gage button if a gage material is needed If a gage is entered it will be used in the description optional Leave the gage box blank to use the thickness in the description Enter a thickness for the pan material required Put a check in the box for Checkered Plate if it is Checkered Plate Enter a value for Tread Rise and A K as required 176 AutoSD Steel Detailing Stairs Chapter 12 ad Putting a check in the box for Calcu
85. EDGE Quantity p 172 TYP Shop bill information on mark PANEL A HEHEHE EE EE Place shop bill text on LINE lt 9 gt Enter Vee 8 4 Shop bill information on mark ba BANE Shop bill information on mark bb ONE Shop bill information on mark bc Command pr Insert Pickets This program will draw pickets in an existing handrail detail for sloping or level handrail If it is sloping it can be detailed sloped in either direction 195 Rails Chapter 13 AutoSD Steel Detailing Include Dims Check Yes to include horizontal dimensions Pickets Select to show only the first and last or all of the pickets Break for Grab rail Select Yes if you have a grab rail and the pickets are far side No post on left side No post on right side Picket Insert Input is in FT ISS Check these options if the rail is open ended r include Dims for a splice Only one end can be open BOUNDRY LINES ARE Le Yes SHOWN IN YELLOW g rPickets P1 picket width tu Show first and last P post width Show all pickets S clear space between pickets 2 p Break for Grab rail eee oO es o A horizontal center to center limits of pickets gt ET 5 Enter a value and press the tab key The J No post on right side p number of spaces is calculated and a default is p poos p for entered for the left space P s pom Ja 000 Left space Th
86. EMM Utilities gt Setup Select SDS 2 fv 3 Architect rawing scale 1 v SteelCAD CVSpro or Xsteel option at the fr EE i Decimal rawing size D 24x 36 v bottom of the setup dialog box i O Engineering Change settings Fractional r Paper orientation SETTING U P Metric Horizontal O Vertical Pulldown AutoSD gt Format gt Setup e rew Sorcer ne around NNE Color L__ 7white Ribbon AutoSD I 2 Utilities AutoSD C Spro O SDS 2 O SteelCAD O xsteel Fonts Fontname asdros96 When you start a new drawing the first ETA i OK Cancel thing you have to do is set the scale units and paper size dialog box is used for 11 Introduction Chapter 1 AutoSD Steel Detailing this purpose Pick AutoSD gt Format or AutoSD I gt Utilities gt Setup Your next selection will be for the units You may pick ARCHITECTURAL DECIMAL ENGINEERING FRACTIONAL or METRIC Dimensions in architectural and fractional units will be rounded to the nearest 1 16th decimal units will be rounded to 2 decimal places and metric units to the nearest millimeter After selecting units you must pick the scale and the paper size All detailing should be to 1 1 scale or 1 12 for metric If you need a scale not listed select Type it After picking the OK button you will be prompted to Enter scale in inches per foot
87. G are for the actual outside dimensions not nominal Putting a check in the box for Mid rails are wire will add a vertical member where the rail bends Select OK when finished 187 Rails Chapter 13 AutoSD Steel Detailing Select Top Rai Condition Cancel x stair Rai Top Input isin FT IISS TO SLOPE ALL RAILS a L i ALL THE WAY ENTER gt B pasoo 11 CREATER THAN n fics X ONLY NEGATIVE Defaulford10 H H m pos al fs X SLT o eee Grab Rail RETURN 13 Return Hoflines lt Treas pi X Include pickets pr ti addoral Posiattoor i 8 frede hes mm p OK Cancel An icon menu appears Pick the top condition A dialog box of the top condition is shown for input Type 6 lower right corner in the icon menus above is where the stair rail turns at the landing Input for 10 and 14 follow the same rules as Spacing in the first dialog box If you have a multiple line rail and want a single line at the end beyond the post you need to select an end that has a return
88. HAPS ics are eden 155 Sub mark tyPpessicecs sscceseeecccaeisetiactsdeeccavandevs 154 Text height amp colotes 155 Test PE see 154 Unit quantity doneres 155 Weigh one assembly only eenrrnornrnnernnnr 154 DAE i E E aper 155 Converting other drawings to AutoSD 10 COWLEY EEE EE Aa RSs 17 Crane r llus amgaacummmnginnnnined 52 Creamrpasaure vs 176 Creating the shop bill 152 Custom fontusuvsigmessannenmkind id 91 Customer configuration program M 14 CUtS ess cated ERE ED ERE ER ESSEN SEEGER SEE ER open 99 CVS PrO GT ii 8 10 11 25 Data GE EE 9 Database editor ujsmsemmninnmisivsanudgnmssde 75 DDP 75 Decimal to Feet raie a n adios 84 Deck edge VieW wicvesdssssszesassasziea seconde een rr erne 31 Detail labeli udatert 42 Detail pane Lisin totean E EE ER 195 Dimensions AFO eioi tt aan E 95 re continue nnii iesnas 95 Arrowheads neea naiai 94 Benn be SLN 95 COMMS ssenarisini 95 GE EE 96 Dim Levens E ER SS 95 Dim tekte seter 93 256 AutoSD Steel Detailing Index Dimensioninguuuvundstsinstesietntatsitd 93 Extend dimension line 17 Single IDEA ka 95 Printems a a RN 17 drecUuonaToNSaseee rene 43 T lalholesuusaarses rstsseaels 16 BEE RE EE 52 Fal Symbolene tinenti 17 Ditton n a a e iNet 52 When dimension contains fraction only 17 Door Tang 19 Aa esse ie eai E 52 Editing a customer s configuration DSTV Lee 9 Save CNC data in drawing 16 Dwg to SDS Da veces sastncssieejeees iss
89. Input is in FT IISS x r Wall Rail is r Wall Rail is ona r Wall Bracket r File name Level amp Sloping Stair O Ramp C Omit all brackets Slope UP Dimensions are Drew sector a 00300 ar oa tothe Right O torail Description O tothe Lett to work points Wagner 1765 z Add Chi Delet Dimension3isto r Brackets are Skad n Browse amp Top O Near Side Pipe bends O Center amp Far Side Miter Longradius amp Shortradius pas M Retum Bottom end to wall Return Top end to wall Draw wall at Bottom end Draw wall at Top end r Tol A P n ae 10108 n PR 873 2 10 0 0600 B po eio O P ga wi am FLOORS BEVT FA a f Bal r Bottom i as m 1 0108 88 Pa S ml s po 1 fioo Va T 012 2810 0 0600 10 0600 r TYPE BB 1 TE r TYPE R bild OR 02 4 TREADS OG 02 AT BEVB ok Cancel Insertion point A box is displayed around the required for the rail de Piece mark for wall rail Enter mark or use lt ma gt dimension Enter dimension tail support Enter Pick location for section a a Main mark 1WR1 FT IISS Enter end lt 2 1 4 gt 06 FT IISS end lt 6 gt Enter Are marks RIGHT Enter and LEFT Y N Quantity 1 Shop bill information on 1WR1 Description Place shop bill text on LINE Enter mark or use lt mb gt lt 4 gt Piece mark for rail Enter Shop bill information on mark mb 1 8 O PIPE Section mark for wall rail support A
90. Joist Angle u u u u u senerve rene rsensenresene 147 RAIL ELEVATION sang ender 192 6 Seat An Nr 147 LEVEL HANDRAIL GGW ssscceeeeeerrerereererreneee 192 Sed Plate ai la aks renee eN 147 Detail Papel eren eetrist iaaa 195 8 Split Tanks added 148 Insert Pickets secs sanserne kend 195 9 Wins Plate eanna r an 148 MeSH Mseti 196 OSU Platen atau 149 Chapter 14 Ladders W u u sseneerrrrrrrnrernree 199 CLT HOl S nenasitna 149 LADDERS WITH CAGE 199 12 Flange Plate u u dseeeeeererere renere 149 LADDERS WITHOUT CAGE G seere 200 13 Gusset Paper 150 TOP HOOP SECT Bjarni 201 VS 150 MID HOOP SECT Curt 201 AS STUDS ua she SEEDEDE Beet caceats 150 BOT HOOP SECT D GG screen renere 201 Chapter 10 Shop Bill soesnorroorvnroenvenverner 151 SECTIONS sisters negre 201 CREATING THE SHOP BILL user 152 SECURITY GUARD uppe 201 CONFIGURING SHOP BILL 1 seere 153 ERECTION ELEVATION eerorronrnnrsorenrveree 202 Title block configuration rrrorerrvrrrrrvennnnne 156 Chapter 15 Hip amp Valley rrrrrornrrvrorrrveennr 203 ATTRIBUTES vs TEXT aiee 157 Chapter 16 CNC Data u unrmsmmesessisve 207 EDIT SUB MARK LIST ooann 158 MAIN MARK vegvesen 208 EXTRACT SHOP BILL senere 159 HOLES vea 208 EXTRACT PROGRAM ossee 159 ASSOCIATE HOLES with TAIL 208 EXTRACT for EJE using Attributes 161 CHANGE PACE susende 208 EXTRACT for EJE using Text 162 CHANGE G
91. Pick quadrant wing plate is in Pick another point Number of columns 2 Select to input Angle Bevel Controls lt A gt C FT IISS Horiz control dimension 6 0804 FT IISS Vert control dimension 4 1008 Framing into channel Y N lt N gt Enter FT FTSIISS FT FT IISS IISS Half web thickness of support beam 0003 Offset of plate from work line lt 3 16 gt Enter May be positive or negative TESS Plate thickness are ns twas een wee lt 3 8 gt Enter Slope distance from W P to first hole Min lt 3 7 8 gt 04 117 Beams Chapter 7 AutoSD Steel Detailing FT IISS Distance from first hole to second hole lt 3 gt Enter Placing bevel Select line Pick a point on the slope Select side for symbol FT IISS Bevel lt 8 3 4 gt Enter FT IISS Angle lt 36 0910 gt Enter Location of slope dimensions Pick a point The plate is drawn Location of horiz dimensions Pick a point Dimensions are drawn Location of vert dimensions Pick a point Dimensions are drawn Dimensions are drawn Command Finished 7 The horizontal and vertical control dimensions may be the actual control dimensions or they can be the bevel If you select to input the angle or bevel you will be asked if the angle or bevel is in reference to a horizontal or a vertical line The picture above is how the plate will be drawn if the offset is positive If the offset is nega
92. Place shop bill text on LINE lt 4 gt Select Upper End Support Condition Enter An icon menu is used when you click on Select under Connection at bottom After entering all of the required dimensions in the box above and picking OK a dialog box is displayed to select the stringer sizes Select the shape depth and weight and then select OK A box is displayed around the cross hairs outlining the area required for the stair detail An icon menu is displayed to select whether to apply blocks or not to the upper end The left selection is for an end with no blocks in the top or bottom flange You still get to enter the minus dimension The right icon is selected to enter blocks A dialog box is used to enter the blocks If you select Auto block you select a beam size and enter dimension A for the offset from the floor elevation to the TOS of the support beam The blocks required are calculated for you If you select Block top or Block bot you enter the width and depth of the blocks from end of material 172 UPPER FLOOR 2 Auto block Select size wr 449 1 rn I Block top 1 3 2 CJ Block 3 4 AutoSD Steel Detailing Stairs Chapter 12 FT IISS Horiz Minus dimension at upper end
93. QUICK START spre iv Main dialog box reenrnrnrrnvronrrvrrrvrnrnrnrnnenvren 32 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 Left side and Right side sections 32 Chapter 1 Introduction cc 7 Top center Secu ON i ae eases 33 MENUS 2 sr Deer i Bottom center section nsossrrrronrororrnrnrnr 33 FT IISS or ILSS rrrroronnrrvrrrnnrrnrrrnrrrnsessernrsessennnn I Beans Lunnan A 33 POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE sooornvennvnvevnvvnnnn 8 Briseis 34 FE SS un 8 CMU read 34 ENTER eee 8 En VACWS Saeed GAL SRG 35 FRE NAMES suse SG 8 Ea RE s a a a aana saia 35 ROTATION see 10 JOIST uuduknin nnna a an aaa 35 SCALE rn 10 Faddere prege aR SEER 36 Dwg to SDS 2 Dxf Gu u ssseseserererererererer ener er ene 11 SALES NS 36 STARTING A NEW DRAWING suser 11 Landing Setupuuuaussdnsindbrymeirsen 37 SETTING UP ess 11 Detail landing skue laur ie 38 TEXT HEIGHT and PLOT SCALES 13 Draw Pinus PESTEN 38 FOLDER Skare 14 Export sarnjsageetesmeseetesdt 38 CUSTOMER CONFIGURATION PROGRAM Column file configuration 38 EEE uradel age dd he ai 14 Girt configuration u smiseninsitserver 39 EDITING A CONFIGURATION user 15 Joist configuration sreronvvnrrrrvervrrvrrrrrveennn 39 COUNTRY see 17 Be REE EEE SE 39 BOLTS uer anal 18 GRID LINES w DIM G G scenerne 40 FLAT BARS amp PLATES errnnevrnnernnnvvrnneer 18 JOIS TEINE Seen Baa ite e 40 STANDARD SHEAR BARS ooien 19 JOIST SIDE or END VIEW roronnrrrrrnvrrrnnvrennn 40 STANDARD CLIPS eerervvnnrrrn
94. SLOPE 25 5 5 8 E 33 1638 You may enter a different angle at the Angle prompt or use the default angle by pressing Enter The BASE RISE and SLOPE prompts will continue to toggle as long as you press Enter without entering a number Pr ROLLED PLATE LENGTH Pulldown AutoSD gt Calculator gt Rolled Plate Length gt Decimal Pulldown AutoSD gt Calculator gt Rolled Plate Length gt FT IISS Pulldown AutoSD gt Calculator gt Rolled Plate Length gt FT II SS Toolbar Calculator Ribbon AutoSD I gt Miscellaneous ROLLED PLATE LENGTH ee We Enter the inside radius thickness and included angle and the program will return the length of plate required SECTIONAL PROPERTIES Pulldown AutoSD gt Sectional Properties Ribbon AutoSD I gt Utilities 87 Calculator Chapter 5 AutoSD Steel Detailing This is a data table program that is used for reference It will list the dimensional properties of the following shapes US C MC MT ST WT TS PS HSS HP M S W CF L Turnbuckles Clevis Sleeve Nuts
95. Select the file you want to change and pick Edit Picking Set Current will save the name of the selected file in the drawing and that file will be used until another one is set Shop bill text configuration The first time you open the configuration box you will have one file in it Detail variables called None one called Unnamed 11x17 and one called Unnamed Meierie liet 24x36 You can edit and use the last two You can rename them or copy _ them and make more files You can delete all files except for 2 None is Sa one that cannot be deleted If you have an older version that used the File name sbtext cfg file you can import those files and use them Older versions had None Unnamed 11x17 separate sbtext cfg files saved in each job folder This version has all of the configurations stored in one file called custbom cfg located in your autosd folder The metric version is called custbomm cfg You can also import individual configurations from other custBOM cfg files Unnamed 24x36 Copy Delete Edit Import vn After you pick Edit another dialog box will pop up You will need to select the options you want and edit the location of each column You can use the PICK button to select the location of each column or you can enter the location in each edit box All values are entered at a scale of 1 1 0 for ARCH
96. Steel Detailing nn BEAM ON PLATE w AB Pulldown AutoSD gt Erection Tools gt Beam on Plate w AB Toolbar Erection Tools Ribbon AutoSD I gt Erection Tools ni R 2x12x1 0 ma Drawing command T BEARING PLATE EDGE VIEW This program will detail the end view and web view of a beam sitting on a bearing plate with anchor bolts showing the projection grout bolt length hook length bolt diameter hole pattern and plate size This detail is used on anchor bolt setting plans You can use any of the six anchor types shown in Anchor Bolt Side View on page 27 plus an expansion anchor and an epoxy anchor The scale is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Pulldown AutoSD gt Erection Tools gt Bearing Plate Edge View Toolbar Erection Tools Ribbon AutoSD I gt Erection Tools This program draws the sectional end view of a typical bearing plate used for joists or beams when bearing on a masonry wall You enter the plate width and stud length You can have one or two studs No dimensions will be shown The scale is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command rA BRACE LINES w DESC Pulldown AutoSD gt Ere
97. The default folder for the template file is AUTOSD BONUS If you decide to modify the template file or create your own copy it to your customer job folder before you modify it and access it there You should include the line BL Y N005000 in the template file so the extract program will sort the lines so that the file will be in the same order as they appear in the drawing After converting the file name extension is changed to SBL for shop bills and BLT for field bolts You can choose to print the shop bill file when it is extracted or print it later You have to have the BOLT LIST program that is sold with the CALCULATOR programs in order to print the field bolt files To print the converted file to the screen or to your Mae avs printer select the template file folder and the cn Is spidd template file used to extract the file and then pick ae OK Pick the Select File button and change to the Ba SHORBILLECE OK folder where your file is that you want to print and Fete then pick OK After you have selected the template ve CANCEL file and the shop bill file pick the OK button at the bottom of the screen new screen pops up that displays the sbl file Pick the print button to send eyatsasonus the file to your system printer e Atsd omer Dra QTY MARK SHP DESC FT IN ID SEQ SPEC REMARK WEIGHT SEQ 1 SEQ 2 SEQ 3 SEQ 4 SEQ 5 SEQ 6
98. Title block configuration 156 Top view skewed connection eee 118 Total Wel Pil sd arrene 90 Tread bulderusnmnnnanermnnninivsanni 176 Tread Riser c leulatorsu usvansvunuedsest 179 Turnbuckle niee a a 68 U Block section view users 45 Uninstall AutoSD ugvesuminrats vesstiinesereiaen e v Valley Joist essani nnn 70 Vertical plates eene 113 View Base Cap fleece cscs eaten 142 Wall rail sorted vaere arne 190 Web hole 68 Weld symbolsk karse 68 BIOCKS ma 69 Go REE EN 69 Leader Only sornione nienie 69 DAVE RESON vass a ete 69 SE EE lanl aetna eae 70 Symbol only scsssds cescsnsvcosereseseaddeasnvecveneaeeas 69 Wing plate Side VieW rrrrrrrrrrnrrrrrvrrrrrvrennr 114 Plate amp End View of Shape 114 115 Plate on column flange errrrrrrrrvnrnrrrnr 115 PRE Lee 114 Plate only skewed nrnnronrvnrrnrvnrrrrvnrnrrvne 115 Wood end view ua EGS 45 Wes 65 D C TS BEER SEE SE DE SES ni ii 10 11 13 25 260
99. Toolbar Modify Distance 2 0800 Ribbon AutoSD I gt Modify ob 1 0000 1 0600 This command works the same as the offset command shown above except a it uses a dialog box that allows you to select from the last 10 offset distances used or enter a new offset The distance is controlled by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command Through By changing the scale of the drawing with the SCALE OF DRAWING or al command you can use OFFSET to draw to different scales This offset command uses the FT IISS format of input OFFSET amp CHANGE LINE TYPE Pulldown AutoSD gt Modify gt Offset amp Change Linetype Toolbar Modify Ribbon AutoSD I gt Modify This command works the same as the offset command shown above except you are prompted on the first pick to select a linetype that the offset line will be changed to This is useful in creating the hidden lines on pipe or tubes OSNAP Menu Ctrl gt Right click or Shift gt Right click Toolbar Object Snap These are AutoCAD s commands for object snap and pick options In order to draw a line from one line to another line you must use object snaps If you don t your lines will not be exactly where you want them to be Some programs use object snaps and if you cancel the program in the middle of it you may find yourself locked into an object snap If this happens pick NONE to get rid of it 62
100. Using Text Ribbon AutoSD I gt Shop bill Use this command from the AutoSD pulldown menu to extract the shop bill using text or attributes and run the program extractw exe automatically to convert the extracted file using the template file ASD SBL TXT located in your AUTOSD BONUS folder SHOPBILL TXT is used with shop bills created with version 4 0 and earlier Warning Attributes must not be used if you are drawing in Paper space You can use text and the text in the shop bill for each sheet will be extracted as long as the layout name does not begin with Layout Shopbill and Fieldbolt Extract File Utility EXTRACT PROGRAM Convert File Merge Files Print Shop Bill r TEMPLATE FILE Pulldown AutoSD gt Extract gt Extract Program File Name Select Template Ribbon AutoSD I gt Shop bill ALTE EE r SHOP BILL FILE seeren Use this command to run the extract program manually ae hanno to convert an extracted bolt list or shop bill txt file merge imp kss csv or sbl files or print sbl files When extracting attributes manually you should choose Space Delimited Use the template file ASD_SBL TXT for shop bills and ASD_BLT TXT for 159 Shop Bill Chapter 10 AutoSD Steel Detailing field bolts These are located in your AUTOSD BONUS folder Or use a template file that you have created from these files
101. View Put a check in Show seat if you want the seat drawn Insertion point can be at the top of the joist or bottom of the seat You can select to put holes in the seat with a dimension to them reference elevation can be put on both side view and end view The scale is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command LADDERS Pulldown AutoSD gt Erection Tools gt Ladders Gate alala Toolbar Erection Tools Ribbon AutoSD I gt Erection Tools CI C e _ DIE Lay This will display an icon menu for the selection of plan views of ladders with and without cages for use in creating erection drawings The insertion point is the middle of the rung The scale is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing xd os meos NT command MARKS SECT TAGS Pulldown AutoSD gt Erection Tools gt Marks Sect Tags Toolbar Miscellaneous Ribbon AutoSD I gt Miscellaneous SELECT DETAIL x SELECT DETAIL MARK SECT DETAIL p C QTY DIE ae mn a gt COL GRID ans Cy lt gt Co CY VIEW VIEW O omur COL GRID ID LCOL GRID COL GRID Nas r ap a ale COL GRID dr COLUMN D Ek NORTH REV OK Cancel Pre
102. Work point location Pick the work point Pick quadrant gusset plate is in Upper right upper left lower right lower left Are you inserting gusset plate on brace lt N gt Enter If you are the holes and dimensions on the slope will not be drawn they will be on the brace Piece mark for vertical clip Enter angle mark or use lt aa gt Enter Add piece to shop bill Y N lt Y gt Enter Shop bill information on aa quantity lt 2 gt Enter Place shop bill text on LINE lt 4 gt Description L3x3 8x 5 FT IISS Gage of clip 0109 Horiz amp vert dimensions go to 1 first or 2 last hole lt 1 gt Enter Location of horiz dimensions for brace holes Pick location above or below the plate 130 AutoSD Steel Detailing Bracing Chapter 8 Select line Location of vertical dimensions for brace holes Pick location to the right or left the plate Location of dimensions for vertical holes Pick location to the right or left the plate Location of dimensions on slope Pick location above or below the work line Location of arrow for plate size Pick one side of the plate Location of plate description Pick location FT IISS Plate thickness lt 3 8 gt Enter Enter plate mark or use lt pa gt Enter quantity 1 Place shop bill text on LINE lt 5 gt Enter Placing bevel Select a point on the work line Select side for symbol FT IISS Angle lt 39 8056 gt Command Bevel lt 10 gt Enter
103. a simple weld block quickly or add an 546 ser Ila all around field weld or tail note to an existing weld symbol His You can add one of these blocks to an existing symbol by ER s i Og picking the SYMBOL ONLY icon from the second page of 5 blocks and then select the block This prevents the leader from NN being drawn again and will insert only the block The insertion ox cancer Previous ver point is the left end of the block ENDPOINT snap is automatically selected SYMBOL ONLY This draws the symbol shown in the dialog box without adding a leader LEADER ONLY Pulldown AutoSD gt Draw gt Weld Leader Toolbar Miscellaneous Ribbon AutoSD I gt Weld This draws only the leader It is useful for adding more leaders to an existing weld symbol Pick the location for the arrow The NEAR snap is automatically activated for this selection Pick the next point for the leader line and continue picking points as needed The last point should be one end of the weld symbol Press enter and you are then prompted for additional leader lines Press enter for none If you select to put additional leaders the near snap is activated and you pick where the leader arrow starts Press enter and a line is drawn from the last pick point to the weld symbol Press enter again to exit drawing leader lines CLEAR Selecti
104. advantage of this connection matching you should start detailing the beams with the least number of internal connections first If the support is a column you will be asked if you want to add the connection to a column file If the connection is a one sided clip or bent plate and the offset is not 0 a slide will be displayed showing the options available for a one sided connection as below to the left If the dimension from the work point to the first hole is negative the clip will be wrapped The connection is welded on the near side FT IISS Horiz WP to hole for web connection lt 2 7 8 gt Enter FT IISS Horiz space to 2nd column of holes lt 0 gt Enter FT IISS Minimum edge distance to sides of bent clip lt 1 1 4 gt Enter GOL 2 13 16 The angle size is selected from a dialog box for nonstandard clips NOTE Leg on web is 6 Outstanding Leg is 4 Do you want to reverse legs Y N lt N gt Enter 104 AutoSD Steel Detailing Beams Chapter 7 W14x34 1 a0 NS GOL 2 315 1 ab FS FR G0L 21 45 69 0 S46 716 15 7 16 5 749 A325x1 1W the connection to be to the column flange instead of the web as shown in the sketch to the left you need to select Column flange for the support member This will give you the correct minus dimension and the plate will be bent to fit the flange MIN LENGTH NOT WRAPED WRAPED ENTER POSITIVE OR NE
105. and select the seat type and enter values for all options available Pick OK to save the settings Picking cancel will cause you to lose all changes made to the configuration Draw This will save all changes to the file and open up the Select Scale dialog box Pick the scale you want the elevation drawn to and pick OK You will be prompted for the insertion point while a Pick the Girt config image button and select the proper girt to column connection from the image icons on the left side Enter the dimensions for the connection and select the angle and WT Pick OK to save the settings Picking cancel will cause you to lose all changes made to the configuration Joist Seat Input is in FTJIISS lt H SEAT ANGLE GAGE 1L sye 1 Gace a JOIST PL THICK TI L4x4x1 4 Long leg is vericel Angle is toed down 1 0600 20200 0 0108 Ti 0 0008 GAGE 00208 20600 0 2600 T 0006 HLG CT 0022 20300 2 0400 DO o gt Io mm 20108 0 2600 GAGET oze Hee pozaz Sest angle size Joistto column L4x4x3 8 Length 00600 CJ Long leg is vertical Cx box is drawn around the cross hair location The box is the extents 39 Erection Tools Chapter 2 AutoSD Steel Detailing OG c
106. and ticks BEAMS COLUMNS pr Create BOM files for Save CNC data in drawing Marking style for main marks O MARK QTY QTY BEAM MARK 1B1 ONE BEAM 1B1 Separator for QTY BEAM MARK So ONE UseOty REOD rextforREQD PEOD FLAT BARS PLATES Use separate marks for Right and Left STANDARD CUPS Mark Qty Qty Ad Beam Er Mark You can enter the character that you want to use as a separator between quantity and descriptor and between the descriptor and mark The default separator Se EN 7 When dimension contains fraction only ea ees Putting a check in the box for Use QTY REQD ere mensen will put the text shown in the Text for REQD box espen elec Man ad after the dquantity separated by the Tail symbol character 4 TAILS dri Putting a check in the box for Use separate marks hr Noe TUB for Right and Left will cause the program to put one CJ cn main mark under the piece for the right mark and one for the left mark Check this box to save CNC data for holes and burns Additional questions for holes will be asked when detailing if this box is checked If this box is checked tail dimensions must be from end of material not from the clip Enter the file name extension you want to use for DSTV CNC files Do not include a ce here Tail all holes Check this
107. bar with slots to use the mark for the bar with short slots Extension and tails at left end This controls where tail or running dimensions and the extension line for the overall length are referenced from at the left end You can have both to beam both to clip or extension to clip and tails to beam Minus dimensions framing into beams This determines if you want to give an extra 1 16 clearance at the end of a beam with clips when framing into a beam web Beams sloping up to the right For this condition you select whether tail dimensions come from the left end of the beam along the top flange or the bottom flange If you are saving CNC the default is bottom flange Use max rows in end connection Check this if you want to use maximum rows in all beam end connections Dimension clip edge distance Check this if you want to put a dimension to the bottom edge of end connection angles Show beam properties wl 153414 Check this if you want to put this symbol showing the depth and web thickness W Fl 512 38 and the flange width and thickness F under the main mark Show support member size Check this if you want to put the support member size at the end of the beam detail Show loads on end of beam Check this if you want to put the loads at the end of the beam detail on a layer called LOADS 23 Introduction Chapter 1 AutoSD Steel Detailing CFG Grade of steel Select the grade of steel that
108. be one polyline and the size and location must be to scale The change is made on the drawing that was created by drawing the data from the file See Replace all holes above for selecting all objects Replace perimeter cuts This is for adding removing or changing external cuts blocks or copes in a face The entire perimeter of the face must be one polyline and must be to scale The change is made on the drawing that was created by drawing the data from the file See Replace all holes above for selecting all objects 218 AutoSD Steel Detailing CNC Chapter 16 Gather marks Folder C ATSD Customer Mark Do not Draw Ipc TE 3 3 4 1pa Use this program to draw a piece from its 3 ee is PI i ale DSTV file The DSTV files will be read from 028P4 PLATE lca 1818 8 fei 3 2002P1 PLATE 3 4x1 3 1 8x1 8 5 8 aa the folder of the current open drawing The EN holes 2002P4 PLATE 3 8x11 3 8x1 7 7716 dialog box shown to the left will be refreshed 200278 PLATE 3 8x1 8 1 8x1 8 5 8 2 2004MK1 HSS12x2X 1875 each time the program is launched but will ite PLATE ee ETI tE 31145 x3x 5 remember if a file has been drawn or put in the meauenotes 153 202 Do not Draw column Any new files will be EST HUSER added Any files deleted will be removed If you do not want to draw a piece select it and pick the Do no
109. below it Once deleted they cannot be restored Now we can put the right end on the beam This uses the same dialog box as the left end but the selections for Detail Beam have been disabled Choose the appropriate box in each section Choose OK when finished Cut flanges square Yes No lt N gt Enter Extend skewed flange cut beyond end of web Yes No N Insertion point The Insertion point is the face of the clip End reaction used is 23 44 kips Enter number of rows in web lt 3 gt Enter FT IISS Elevation of support beam at connection s vertical work line lt 3 0 gt Enter FT IISS Horiz Minus dimension lt 1 4 gt Enter FT IISS Vert Distance down to first hole in outstanding leg from W P lt 3 gt Enter Stagger gages of clips Y N lt N gt Enter FT IISS Hole C C for web connection lt 6 gt 0508 Near Side clip 111 Beams Chapter 7 AutoSD Steel Detailing Do ti Do Do NOT NOT E Leg on web is 4 Outstanding Leg is 3 you want to reverse legs Y N lt N gt Enter Enter angle mark or use lt ac gt Enter Far Side clip HE Leg on web is 4 Outstanding Leg is 3 you want to reverse legs Y N lt N gt Enter nter angle mark or use lt ad gt Enter Number of field bolts in Web Line 1 of 2 lt 6 gt Enter FT IISS Total grip less washers lt 5 8 gt Enter Number of field bol
110. bill The shop bill program will make it easy to fill out the shop bill using text or attributes Text is easier to work with but attributes will allow you to extract the data to an ASCII file where it can be used by other programs The shop bill program can be easily configured for each customer that you detail for and you can have as many configurations as you need Start a new drawing using the AutoSD dwt template and run setup selecting Architect 1 1 and D 24x36 Now select AutoSD gt Shop bill from the pulldown menu and then Insert Shop Bill Change folders to AUTOSD CUSTOMER and select 24x36BOM dwg A typical shop bill appears For METRIC select a scale of 1 12 and paper size of D 24x36 select the 24x36BOM dwg file located in AUTOSD BONUS METRIC folder You can copy these files to your own job folder and edit them or create your own from scratch Command Pick AutoSD or AutoSD I gt Shop bill gt Shop Bill Text Attributes Place shop bill text on Line lt 1 gt 5 Main mark 1B3 Are marks RIGHT and LEFT Y N lt N gt Enter Quantity 6 A dialog box pops up Select Unnamed 24x36 under Shop bill and pick OK Select Configurations r Detail Variables Shop bill Material list Color list Unnamed Import Import Import Import Quantity for sequence 1 2 Z Set selections as defaults Quantity
111. box to put tail dimensions to every hole Uncheck it to put tail dimension to the first hole only in a group 16 AutoSD Steel Detailing Introduction Chapter 1 Dimensions Select either Ticks Only or Arrows and ticks If Arrows and ticks is selected ticks will be used for dimensions that are smaller than 2 5 times the arrow size Arrows will be used for dimensions that are 2 5 times the arrow size and larger Place dimensions outside extension lines When dimensions are less than If this box is checked dimensions smaller than the length given will be placed outside of the extension lines When dimension contains fraction only Put a check in this box if you want 1 and 2 dimensions to be centered Extend dimension line Put a check in this box if you want these dimensions to have the dimension line extended under them when they are offset outside of the extension line Put Main member metric size on detail and in shop bill If you have the drawing set up as architectural units put a check in this box if you need the metric size of the main members shown in addition to the imperial size If you have the drawing set up as metric units put a check in this box if you need the imperial size of the main members shown in addition to the metric size Tail Symbol Select the target or TAIL symbol to be placed at the left end of the detail or check the box Use Custom Tail note to change the word TAILS in the tail symbol to t
112. by pressing the letter S upper or lower case After getting your information it will switch back to where you left off in the calculator A CAMBER Pulldown AutoSD gt Camber Ribbon AutoSD I gt Utilities The CAMBER program is used to find the camber in a beam or truss at any given point and for drawing a camber diagram After picking CAMBER you are prompted to enter the truss span or beam length A slide drawing is displayed for your reference After entering the truss span you are prompted to enter the amount of camber at mid span Next the program asks for the Number of panel points from end to center including end and then the Distance from end to first panel point Enter the number of panel points and then the distance from the end to the first point where you want the camber given The answer will be given in the FT IISS format and you will be prompted for the distance to the next panel point This distance should be input as the distance from the previous point to the new point length of panel of truss Continue entering the panel spaces until all points are given Command FT IISS Truss span 100 83 Calculator Chapter 5 AutoSD Steel Detailing FT IISS Camber at mid span 0204 Number of panel points from end to center including end 6 FT IISS Distance from end to first panel point 10 Length 100 0000 A 0 0013 FT IISS Distance to next panel point lt 10 0 gt Enter B 0
113. can be changed using the Add Chg and Del buttons If you delete a designation you will be deleting a description If you add a designation you will be adding a description The description for the new designation will be copied from the current description Different descriptions can have the same designation The number to the right of the designation Bolt dia 3 4 v Use Actual Gage Shop Weld Shop Bolt Staggered C Cin OSL 0 0400 Min Web 0 0002 Max Web 0 0007 Gage 0 0114 Prefix 0 Min Web 0 0008 Max Web 0 0012 Gage 0 0111 Suffix s Min Web 0 0013 Max Web 0 0102 Gage 0 0108 For beam web r Default C C for beam end connection Framing to Beam and column web For 10 and less column web For 12 and greater column web r Framing to Column flange 0 0508 0 0400 0 0508 Use Standard Gage For column flange less than 8 For 8 but less than 10 column flange For 10 and greater column flange 0 0400 0 0508 0 0600 Cancel 20 AutoSD Steel Detailing Introduction Chapter 1 indicates which description in the designation list you are editi
114. change more than one string of text at a time For example if you are using the sheet number as part of the piece marks you can change as many as you can pick by typing in the old number and then the new number Change Text also works on attributes like the main piece mark and bolt description but must be used with caution It will change ALL attributes in a block where a match is found EI CHANGE TO PLINE Pulldown AutoSD gt Modify gt Change To Pline Toolbar Change Ribbon AutoSD I gt Change This command will change lines to polylines It will also join lines and polylines together to form one continuous polyline Polylines are used in hatching and for calculating area C COLOR Pulldown AutoSD gt Modify gt Color Toolbar Change Ribbon AutoSD I gt Change This will change the color of the objects selected to the color selected and change the line weight to that of the new color if Line weights are enabled for the customer colors COLOR w filter Pulldown AutoSD gt Modify gt Color gt Color w filter Toolbar Change Ribbon AutoSD I gt Change di 74 AutoSD Steel Detailing Edit Chapter 4 belg This will change the color of lines or text of one color to the color selected DDCOPY Pulldown AutoSD gt Modify gt DDcopy Ribbon AutoSD I gt Modify Copies objects from other layers to the current layer It will not copy objects on the current layer DATABASE EDITOR Pulldown AutoSD gt
115. comma when you see this prompt Separate spacing of holes with a comma FT USS Gage of clip 02 0112 If you check the box Use Linear FT for Closure plates one mark will be used for all closure plates and the total length will be rounded up to the nearest foot Files Selecting Files opens a dialog box that allows you to save to delete or load a stringer from the stair Ist file that is in your customer s job folder This is where you load the values for stringers that were exported from the Elevation Generator program Some values such as the location of holes are not carried over from the Elevation Generator so they need to be checked Once a stringer 174 AutoSD Steel Detailing Stairs Chapter 12 is detailed all values become the default for the next stringer Saving a stringer here allows you to recall the input when detailing the rail or Erection elevation view or another similar stringer Note See appendix E for forms that can be filled out by your more experienced detailer and given to a less experienced person for entering information into the stair program 7 12 75a F 17 6718 C12x20 7 x 2 5 1d pl 12 3 13x3x14x1 878 15 a 13 Bg i DETAIL OF STANDARD PAN R10G4x78 118 x 1 14516 BENT ha 19 REQ D 7 0 2 10 R amp 75a 6 4 2 28 A325x2 1W EL 5 6 7a 11118 1 48 EXPx3 1W Live DETAIL OF BOTTOM PAN
116. correct end is shown pick the OK button The plate connections shown below are available from Internal Connections Main Internal Connections Aux and from Beams Plates Vertical Plate on flange They can also be used on top of a column cap plate 109 Beams Chapter 7 AutoSD Steel Detailing Examples showing the result of entering dimensions as positive and negative for vertical plates located on top and bottom flange or column cap plate Left Lett Right Right Left amp Right Center gt 0 Center 0 I i Bl fale SEE ENE 4 HU HEJ 4 7 m Ei 4 an EJ EI FE EIE H H Wing Plate Square j ta I Ming De J N N Not Available Not Available il fl H ji 2 Sik T T T Spit T 1 1 1 LU LL El iH Not Available Welded 1 Be H _ tr Stiff Plate i i Left List Left List Right List Right List Plate extended to Flanges i Holes Notch Wing Extend Beam SPI Plate Block LE yd PT HI es Stiff Plate Wing PL Block Option 110 AutoSD Steel Detailing Beams Chapter 7 Vertical hole spacing The defaults are from the customer configuration but may be changed here on a per detail basis Add Symbol for Channel Selecting Toed left or Toed right w
117. detailer used If you prefer using a specific clearance rather than the rule of thumb clearance method simply enter 0 zero for A The rule of thumb clearance method gt A is based on B 1 1 2 to nearest interference lt Remember positive dimensions will be in the direction of the picture and negative dimensions will be in the opposite direction At the end of the program you will be able to get a print of the input and the output save the output in a file on the hard drive or draw the gusset plate If you select Draw the program for drawing the gusset plate will begin If you select Save the information will be written to the hard drive in a folder and file name of your choice A dialog box is used to select the folder The file name will generally be the connection number Do not give an extension for the file name An extension of gus will be added automatically After saving the gusset plate you can use the GUSSET PLATE DRAW program at any time to draw it If you do not save it you only have one chance to draw it It is better to save and then draw These files are small in size and several hundred can be saved without using very much room on the hard drive However if you want to save the files to a floppy disk you may have to use more than one folder if you have over a hundred files because of the limits of the floppy in being able to store the names of the files 126 AutoSD Steel Detailing
118. file for one column SAVE it for that column and then SAVE AS a different file name for the other column The program will switch to the new copy and you can make the changes needed MERGE FILE This is used to merge two column files together This is useful when you have more than one person working on beams that frame into common columns or when you create column files from the Elevation Generator Column size Select the column size being detailed The depth width flange gage and web gage are displayed for W amp C shapes Elevations box ADD will add a new elevation with one connection called NONE CHG will change the elevation of all connections at the selected elevation if the elevation you change to does not already exist CHG will change only the elevation of the connection selected if you change to an existing elevation DEL will delete all connections and the elevation of the selected elevation Connections box MOVE UP amp MOVE DOWN will change the order if there is more than one connection at the selected elevation Use to arrange wing plates and stiffener plates ADD will add a new connection to the selected elevation COPY will copy a connection from one elevation to another or to the same elevation DELETE will delete only the connection selected if there is more than one at the selected elevation 144 AutoSD Steel Detailing Columns Chapter 9 HINT If you have connections differing in e
119. first hole in brace The brace program will draw the brace to scale and to the actual bevel It will calculate tail dimensions work lengths cut lengths the intersection point for X braces and number of fillers for double angle braces DRAW will be taken out of simple single angle braces For simple braces the brace will be drawn in the same direction as the one you pick from the icon menu for orientation For X braces the braces will be drawn in the same direction as shown in the slide view that is used to get the input data Command Pick AutoSD or AutoSD II gt Bracing gt Draw gt Brace Select Bracing Type x 4 Ko oh pe D Kr x we V gs er l s AD ee AS Z Pa Z Set An icon menu appears Pick the material shape Customer folder lt SSS 95 01 gt Enter Is brace double angles Y N Y Are fillers bolted Y N Y Is brace in compression Y N N Select Brace Size FT IISS Separation of angles 0006 SELECT OPTION SELECT BRACING TYPE IN LI Another icon appears Pick the type of brace Select a L3 1 2 x 3 x 5 16 Read connection file for 4Al Y If you answer N you must input the information manually Read connection file for A2 Y Read connection file for A3 Y Read connection file for A4 Y FT IISS Bolt spacing lt 3 gt Enter 132 AutoSD Steel Detailing Bracing Chapter 8 Connection file Draw length
120. for sequence 2 2 Coa Cancel Quantity for sequence 3 2 Description W14x22 Size of beam FT IISS Length 13 0508 13 5 2 Remarks Text is put in shop bill Command Enter To start program again Line lt 6 gt Enter To accept line 6 Main mark Enter Toggles past main mark Sub assembly mark pa Sub mark Quantity 6 Description P 3x3 4 PL 316x3 4 FT IISS Length 1 0208 195 Remarks Enter Command Enter To start program again Line lt 7 gt Enter To accept line 7 Main mark Enter Toggles past main mark Sub assembly mark aa Sub mark Quantity 12 Description L3 8x3 2x 5 L3 2x3 2x 16 151 Shop Bill Chapter 10 AutoSD Steel Detailing FT IISS Length 0808 0 8 2 Remarks Enter Finished Zoom in to the top of the shop bill and see what happened The text is there e e feens feen ean fan a fonem Mame escrpnon frr from a FR at KE ES EEE ES EEE et EE ee ee eee edle ee es et ee 2 2 2 6 183 w4x22 afse _ 776 5 Command 3 fer wa Tforlaaf m25 Sy aT Se eee e rr 6 ehea 0000 6120 re me GEN DE PE EE dd EE ee RE ee ME EN ee GE RER ee I III TI TT as f 12 hes E ee ES ee aOo O wN DOO fF UN The shop bill is placed on a layer called shopbill The portion of the shop bill for sequences is on a layer called sequence This layer can be frozen if sequences are not being used CREATING THE SHOP BILL Quit the drawing you
121. given distance below the top flange above and below the bottom flange The remainder of the plate will be filled with holes at a given spacing Type 2 Holes will be spaced a given distance above and below the top flange above and below the bottom flange The remainder of the plate will be filled with holes at a given spacing Type 3 Holes will be spaced a given distance below the top flange and below the bottom flange The remainder of the plate will be filled with holes at a given spacing or you can enter the number of rows to use Type 4 Holes will be spaced a given distance above and below the top flange and below the bottom flange The remainder of the plate will be filled with holes at a given spacing or you can enter the number of rows to use 119 Beams Chapter 7 AutoSD Steel Detailing Command Pick AutoSD gt Beams gt Plates or AutoSD II gt Beams gt Moment End Plate FT IISS Flange to outside hole A 0108 FT IISS Flange to inside hole B 0204 FT IISS Spacing of remaining holes C lt 3 gt Enter FT IISS Thickness of end plate 01 FT IISS Edge distance at end of plate 0108 Enter selection Save Quit S Customer folder lt C SSS 95 01 gt Enter End plate number 1 Writing output to file Done GIRTS Pulldown AutoSD gt Beams gt Girts Toolbars AutoSD gt Beams gt Girts Ribbon AutoSD II gt Beams This program is for d
122. is placed under the word slot as shown in the example to the left To leave the note blank press the space bar After the symbol is completed you are prompted for lt Rotation angle gt Reference for the symbol You may pick a point or enter an angle If this is a round hole and you are saving CNC data you are prompted to Select objects You should select all the holes that this symbol references The hole size will be associated with the holes so if you change the hole size the CNC data will be automatically updated 56 AutoSD Steel Detailing Draw Chapter 3 LIB MNU LIB LIBRARY MENUS Pulldown AutoSD gt Insert gt Library Menus Ribbon AutoSD I gt Utilities Library menu is an icon menu that will display your blocks using icons allowing you to insert your block from the library by selecting the icon of the block This gives you a visual reference to select from The category SCALED will insert the block at the scale set by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command If the block was saved in a drawing set up to a scale of 3 4 1 0 and you are inserting it into a drawing set up to a scale of 1 8 1 0 set the scale to 3 4 1 0 to have it inserted the same Select the icon picture and select OK Enter T to insert or D to delete the block from the menu The menu can contain an unlimited number of blocks There is a Next button for advancing one menu at a time and a P
123. loads on a member You input the member shape size un braced length percent of uniform load and grade of steel and you will be given the load in compression the load in tension maximum web shear and end reaction in kips and area of member If you are looking for the end reaction you must give the length from center of support to center of support as the un braced length If you put a check in the box for Conventional single plate connection it will develop a connection using the tables from the AISC 13 edition manual The shear bolt value has no affect in determining the number of bolts in this case Pulldown AutoSD gt Calculator gt Oblique Triangles Ribbon AutoSD I gt Miscellaneous The oblique triangle program will solve any triangle given one side and A OBLIQUE TRIANGLES Toolbar Calculator Obie Tries x FTulss O FSS O DECIMAL O MLSS l SE 2 Angles Vg Ni A gt 2Sides 1 Angle O 3Sides 2 10 02 Side 1 Side 2 Side 3 r Results 30 0000 50 0000 100 0000 two angles two sides and one angle or three sides It uses icon menus and slides for user information Select the Units Changing the units will change the format of the input and results Select the Option either 1 Side 2 Angles 2 Sides 1 Angle or 3 Sides Under Sides select which
124. o mme to the right If not you will get the smaller one gt shown below right More information is ER 5 required for CNC data If you have configured AT all fey tee your customer to save CNC data but do not aster er TEN JAN Mula need it for this group of holes uncheck the CR GN box Save CNC data ee sl Edge view of web holes will not have CNC data attached to them 55 Draw Chapter 3 AutoSD Steel Detailing GEN Solid filed holes with CNC data attached will be created from a single polyline Holes without CNC data attached will be made using several lines close together so you can tell if you are saving CNC data with a hole just by looking at it ee tee E OtoTalsm Teidm Select whether the holes are for a beam or column If the detail is a beam brace loose angle or anything other than a column then you would select Dat Beam It must be a column for you to select the Column option The HOLES command can draw a round hole a 1 2 x 3 4 rectangular 3 4 x 3 4 square slots of the size you input and a hex or square head bolt The 1 2 x 3 4 hole is used in edge view of clip angle legs or webs and the 3 4 x 3 4 hole is used in edge view of flanges The Var Size hole will draw a rectangular hole of the size entered and the thickness is set by
125. or CLEVIS 428 EXP 4 04 EXP METAL EXPANDED 4 04 EXPANDED METAL FB FB 4x 2 FLAT BAR FLAT BAR 4x 2 GRAT GRAT 3 x 1 4 x 36 HP HP13 x 87 HSS HSS 6 625 x 5 round pipe HSS HSS 6 625 x 8 round pipe HSS HSS 6x2x 3 rectangular tube L L4x3 8x 5 M M8 x 6 5 MC MC12 x 20 7 MT MT3 x 10 P P6x 134 or P 14 GA x 134 PIPE 180 STD or 18 O PIPE or 1 8 O STD PIPE PLATE PLATE 6 x 13 4 or PLATE 14 GA x 134 PS PS1 8 0 This will give the weight for std pipe RAIL 604 RAIL Do not use this key word for handrail pipe REBAR 8 REBAR or REBAR 8 ROD WOROD S S12 x 50 ST ST6 x 15 9 STD PIPE 1 8 O STD PIPE SCH 40 180 SCH 40 or 1780 SCH 40 PIPE Same as STD PIPE SCH 80 180 SCH 80 or 1780 SCH 80 PIPE Same as X STRG PIPE 165 Shop Bill Chapter 10 AutoSD Steel Detailing SCH 120 1780 SCH 120 or 1 8 O SCH 120 PIPE Same as XX STRG PIPE TS TUBE TS3x2x 4 or TUBE 3 8x3 8x4 TURNBUCKLE TURNBUCKLE W x 6 UM P UM P 6x 134 UM PLATE UM PLATE 6 x 134 W W14 x 22 WT WT12 x 27 5 X STRG 180 X STRG or 180 X STRG PIPE XX STRG 180 XX STRG or 180 XX STRG PIPE Key Words By Country USA CANADA UK EUROPE AUSTRALIA C C BT DIL BT CF CF C HD CT HP DN CT HE CHS HSS HP CHS HL EA HSS ERW HP PFC M L J HSS RHS MC M L HX TFB MT MC UB IPE TFC PS S UC IPEA UA S W UBP IPEV UB ST MT RHS IPN UC TS ST SHS L WB W WT U WC WT TS UAP UA UPN WWF WWT WRF In the above examples the KEY WORD may be placed at the beginning or the end of t
126. put a sub mark for the tread when drawing a Tread End View Draw tread Putting a check in this box will cause the tread to be drawn Draw blowup Putting a check in this box will cause a larger end view detail to be drawn of the tread Pick OK to draw tread Notes If you need a pan riser to be vertical from nose to bottom use Nose 4 Rise 2 bottom 7 and set dimension C to 0 Nose type NONE SUPPORT ONLY is for easy placement of support angles or bars when the tread may be a concrete insert Input G can be 0 for nose 9 if Ref from nose is unchecked This will 73 10 eliminate the upward turn at the inside edge of the tread PG Z OG DIM PAN SUPPORTS a AC This command is used to add dimensions to existing pan supports If the 2 BA pans are drawn you will need to zoom in real close so you can pick the 177 Stairs Chapter 12 AutoSD Steel Detailing supports and not the pan Your first selection is the top line of the horizontal support Your second selection is line on the front side of the vertical support that is immediately below the horizontal support After picking the vertical support the command pauses to let you zoom out You must zoom out far enough so that all dimensions will be in the viewing area BOLTED TREAD END DETAIL This draws the end view of a bolted or welded grating tread or a bolted bent plate tread other The scale of the detail is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify o
127. scaled If you change the drawing scale before starting the connection you can have the side view drawn larger This is very 106 AutoSD Steel Detailing Beams Chapter 7 helpful on small beams Holes placed using Web NS will be in both NS and FS web of tubes Holes placed using Web FS will be in FS web only of tubes Left Center Right After selecting the connection type you should enter a dimension in one or possibly two of these boxes You can enter a dimension in the Right and Left boxes or in the Center box You cannot have a dimension in the Center box and the Right or Left box The program will check for this when you pick the OK button and will display an error message advising you of the problem Entering a Left dimension will draw the connection on the left side of the work line Entering a Right dimension will draw the connection on the right side of the work line Entering a Center dimension will draw the connection on the left and right side of the work line Some connections allow you to enter the Left and Right dimension as a list Lists are dimensions separated by commas Example 0708 03 03 Connections which allow lists are holes in flanges holes in web and stiffener plates Lists allow you to space holes or stiffeners horizontally If the dimension is not entered as a list it must be entered using the FT IISS format if the drawing was setup for architectural units The example to the left was created using a single C
128. side you want to enter by putting a check in the box and uncheck the others Do the same for Angles Enter values for the options selected and pick Calc If you want to save the results in your drawing pick Print results to screen and pick an insertion point for the text Press Enter to run the program again RIGHT TRIANGLES Pulldown AutoSD gt Calculator gt Right Triangles gt Decimal Pulldown AutoSD gt Calculator gt Right Triangles gt FT IISS Pulldown AutoSD gt Calculator gt Right Triangles gt FT II SS Toolbar Calculator Ribbon AutoSD I gt Miscellaneous This program is used to solve right triangles The input can be either one side and the acute angle or two sides To input two sides you must input the angle as 0 To activate the program you may either pick RIGHT TRIANGLES or type the letter S at the keyboard and press Enter 86 AutoSD Steel Detailing Calculator Chapter 5 Command Pick AutoSD gt Calculator or AutoSD I gt Miscellaneous gt FT IISS gt Right Triangles Input numbers as FT IISS Angle lt 33 1604 gt Base Rise Slope 25 0510 BASE 21 3 7 8 BEVEL 7 13 16 Command Input numbers as FT IISS Angle lt 33 1604 gt 0 Base Rise 13 1103 Slope 25 0510 BASE 21 3 7 8 BEVEL 7 13 16 Command RISE ANG nm From previous run RISES 13 11 3 16 SLOPE 25 5 5 8 ANGLE 33 1604 13 11 3 16
129. text in a row must line up within 1 of each other Justification The justification of all of the text in a single column must be the same but may be different from column to column Mark amp Quantity 1 If the main mark and sub mark are in the same column their quantities must be in different columns 2 If the main quantity and sub quantity are in the same column their marks must be in different columns 163 Shop Bill Chapter 10 AutoSD Steel Detailing QTY ATT QTY After the customer is selected the text is processed Any text that does not line up with the column and row requirements will be omitted from the kss file and written to a file with the same name as the kss file but with an err extension This could be weight values or text in columns not requested In most cases these files may be deleted If you used the tag names ASD NA for Project Name ASD NO for Job Number ASD GR for material grade and ASD RE for the revision mark in your title block attributes this information will be included in file kss Order of priority for grade The grade for each piece is retrieved from the customer s Detail variables found under Beams Entering a grade in the title block for ASD GR will override the customer s Detail variables setting for all grades If the grade is listed in the BOM for a piece that grade will override all other settings The text in the shop bill for Model space and each Paper space layout will be e
130. the distance from the center line of the column to the end of the beam 33 Erection Tools Chapter 2 AutoSD Steel Detailing You can add a note to the left and or right ends of a beam This can be an end reaction piece mark or other note Separate the text lines with the character to put multiple lines of text at one end Example 23k 48B3 23k 48B3 with the 23K above the beam line and all other text below the beam line will be printed as Below this is the Orientation The selections available will depend on the shape of the beam W shapes will either be Web or Flange view Channels can be toed Up Down NS or FS The image above and at the right end of Orientation will show an icon of what has been selected Braces Pick Add to add a brace to the current bay The top and bottom elevation for the brace are normally the top elevation of the beam it frames to Select the Type of brace by picking an icon image Next select the Orientation The icons available will depend on the shape of the brace If the brace is an angle select whether it is 1 Member or 2 Members and if you want a designation for the Long Side Vertical added to the detail put a check in that box If you need to add additional text under the center of the brace put it in the Note edit box Separate the text lines with the character to put multiple lines of text Prev Bay
131. the distance from column centerline to one GAGE 0 FOR NO FOLES side of the saddle FROM EL DOWN IS ENTERED AS A LIST OF DIMENSIONS SEPARATED BY COMMAS EX 03 03 0208 IF GAGE 0 FROM EL DOWN IS FROM THE ELEVATION DOWN TO THE BOTTOM OF R T3 STIFF DIM is the out to out distance if the two stiffener SET T2 TO O TO OMIT PLATE SET T4 TO O FOR NO STIFFENER PLATES STIFFENER PLATES ARE CENTERED ON COLUMN option is selected PL THK T1 T2 T3 amp T4 are the thickness of the plates FROM ELEV DOWN is the location of holes below the given elevation If GAGE is 0 FROM ELEV DOWN is the location of the bottom of the saddle from the elevation 15 Stub GAGE is the gage of the flange This can be 0 if no holes are required OFFSET is from the elevation line down to the top of the stub beam LENGTH is the length of the from the column center line HOLE SPACING is the spacing of holes from the center of the column ELEVATION HL SPACING STUB IS CENTERED N FLANGE AND ELEVATION GAGE CAN BE O FOR NO HOLES SPACING IS ENTERED AS A LIST OF DIMENSIONS SEPARATED BY COMMAS EX 10 03 150 AutoSD Steel Detailing Shop Bill Chapter 10 BOM Chapter 10 Shop Bill Pulldown AutoSD gt Shop Bill gt Shop Bill Text Attributes Ribbon AutoSD I gt Shop
132. the spacing of connections will be to scale Pressing the key will decrease the height of the box making the column shorter but it will not be made shorter than the originally calculated height Increasing the height will give you more space between elevations This box will enable you to position the picture on your sheet If part of the box goes off the screen you should cancel the program Zoom out and try again until the entire box is visible When you have holes you will be asked for the GAGE and MAIN GAGE The GAGE is for the individual connection The MAIN GAGE runs the length of the column and will be dimensioned above the top If the GAGE and MAIN GAGE are different the connection will be dimensioned with the GAGE Before detailing columns you should configure your customer See page 14 for CUSTOMER CONFIGURATION Configuration options include location of piece mark overall length to top or bottom of base plate overall length to top or bottom of cap plate and overall length placed above or below description Extend wing plates through tube or Above description amp Below description Totop of base plate To bottom of base plate amp To top of cap plate To bottom of cap plate Column Detail Configuration Input is in FT IISS r Overall length is r Tail dimensions go to Top of base plate Bottom of base plate Put Mark at end of descrip
133. the style used for the text the colors used for za the lines and text the size of the text the scale factor for the Jenas ED PP Sizer 0088 symbol whether to use multiple leaders or not and whether tines cyen Text HE gt bite to rotate the symbol or not The settings are saved to the file saersr Rotation weld cfg located in your autosd folder Seler Ee kast Resetto Defaults OK Cancel HATCH AutoCAD command Pulldown Draw gt Hatch There are three custom hatch patterns installed with AutoSD They are located in your autosd Support folder The names of the pattern files are checkpl pat mesh pat and wire pat A sample of each is shown below Checkpl pat Mesh pat Wire pat You can use these with the bhatch command Type Bhatch Change the Type to Custom and click on the Swatch box select the pattern from the Custom pattern box JOIST FORMS Forms for Valley Joist can be downloaded from this web site http www valleyjoist com downloads valleyjoisteast The following form drawings are located in your C autosd bonus folder The drawings are 8 1 2
134. the tags in the shop bill block The second field contains the format for the data for that tag All format fields start with a C denoting it as a character field except for the field BL Y It starts with a N denoting numeric The next three digits are the field width characters The last three are number of decimal places All character fields have 000 for the 157 Shop Bill Chapter 10 AutoSD Steel Detailing last three digits Be sure to use a field width that is at least one character longer than actually needed This will put a space between each field in the extracted file If the field width is too small AutoCAD will truncate the output and the output may run together as one string making processing of the output difficult CAUTION The first fields in the attribute extract template file MUST be spelled as shown above They may be in any order and some may be left out but the names MUST NOT be changed BL Y N005000 must be left in the file and must be the last line NOTE Do not use tab characters when constructing the template file If you want to align the columns for readability do so with ordinary spaces Each line of the extract file will contain information for each tag listed in the template file in the order they are listed If all values are not used those tags may be omitted from the template file The order each line is written to the output file is the order that it was created in the drawing file As long as th
135. tube column the weight selection is disabled For non square tube columns choose the depth that you are framing into This selection is for determining the minus dimension Support is a Hip or Valley rafter If you are detailing a beam that slopes and is framing into a hip or valley beam you need to check this box Doing so will adjust the block depths and lengths based on the assumption that the hip or valley rafter and the beam you are detailing are in the same plane Slee If you are framing into a hip beam the program will also S amp recommend the amount to lower the support so the edge of the flange is in the plane of the beam being detailed The offset cannot be 0 and the angle cannot be 90 SUPPORT IS HIP OR VALLEY RAFTER Slope in degrees from horizontal Normally the support beam is assumed to be level If it is sloping weer you can enter the degrees of slope in order for the program to calculate the block depths correctly This is different from the Hip or Valley rafter condition above The support will not be lowered If the support is higher far side of the beam enter the angle as positive If it is higher near side enter the angle as negative This pe hest is important only if the beam being detailed is skewed SLOPE IN DEGREES FROM HORIZONTAL FRAMING MEMBER FRAMING MEMBER MAY BE LEVEL OR SLOPING SLOPING SUPPORT L IF SUPPORT IS HIGHER NEAR SIDE ENTER ANGLE AS NEGATIVE
136. want the hole spacing dimensioned as shown to the left Use the Bolt diameter list on the left side of the box to set the standard bolt size to use for connections Use the Bolt diameter list on the right side of the box under Edge distance to change the edge distance for each bolt size To edit an edge distance select the bolt size and pick the edit box for the edge distance you want to change Make the change in the box The change is saved when you pick OK If you pick Cancel your changes will not be saved FLAT BARS amp PLATES This dialog box is for configuring how the length of bent plates are calculated and for configuring the size of material you want to designate as Flat Bars Calculate Bent Plate Length Options are to inside of bend regardless of thickness to centerline using a radius based on the thickness and to inside of bend for thin plates and to centerline for thicker plates 18 AutoSD Steel Detailing Introduction Chapter 1 poese Plates This is for specifying the prefix used for plates The default is P To inside of bends J i To Cenerin using radius This will be shown as PL in the drawing Inside radius thickness X 2 00 To inside of bends for S re UGA cig le ev Gare Bars If you want all bars to use the prefix for plates put a check in the box oe ese at the top of the Bars section or change the prefix for bars to the
137. x 11 The dash marks in each field can be changed using the Replace Text command to automatically position the text when filling out the form 70 AutoSD Steel Detailing Draw Chapter 3 SAS ia PD Bor VSSE 200 200 237 28 71801 60n727 8717 000 843 1877 frp re ES SSJ amp LSJ BILL of MATERIALS SN TS SOR NG serer TEE ES BILL OF MATERIAL Ter PAN TS FANT SMI JOIST DWG SOCAR JOIST DWG steel oorp 2000 W MAN canam xx samer ORNL LENGTH DAL WASHINGTON NO 63000 FAX 318 739 4135 TR vor TPES TE S UNO TAGGED END LEFT END EN TYPE S TARE LENGTHS SK SLOPE LENGTHS DINED END 15 LOW UNO NOTES FOR SLOPING JOIST OW ACTUAL Meso mo TEXARK JOIST COMPANY PO BOX WHO 501 777 4654 i PE ARKANSAS 800 649 1577 71801 BILL of MATERIALS BOTTOM CHORD LEGEND i MN
138. you are saving CNC burn data for blocks will be saved with the horizontal dimension The burn length will be the same as the horizontal dimension of the block Wing PL block option Extending beam block will cause wing plates to be cut square and the length of the block on the beam will be increased to clear the plate Notching the wing plate will cause the wing plate to be cut to clear the beam flanges Horizontal dimension are Work length is at Overall length is at These three settings establish the location of control dimensions The setting of the location of horizontal dimensions has no effect if the beam is slopping In that case the location is 22 AutoSD Steel Detailing Introduction Chapter I determined by the direction of the slope Horizontal dimensions will be above beams slopping down to the right and below beams slopping up to the right Conn for end of beam w holes in web Clearance for non standard shear bar This clearance will be used if you do not have a standard shear bar configuration for the bolt size in use The clearance can be 1 from centerline of supporting web or the face of a column flange or 2 from the face of support If a standard shear bar configuration can be used the end clearance is the gage of the shear bar minus the end of beam edge distance Shear bar configurations you can have standard marks for bars with round holes or bars with short slots Put a check in the box Use standard shear
139. you have the Stairs and Rails package they may be detailed by picking this button It will close the Elevation generator program and open the Landing Frame program The input for the landing frame will be exported for the elevation selected and imported into the Landing Frame program Draw plan Pick this button to draw a plan view of each landing A list will be displayed as shown to the right for you to select an individual plan elevation or put a check in the box Select all to draw all plans ete ea Left Elevation Right Elevation Selectall Export stairs CJ If you have the Stairs and Rails package pick this button to export all stringers in the current bay They can be detailed by the Stringer program The file name for each stringer will begin with the file name of the current open Elevation Generator file plus the bay number plus the bottom and top elevations of the stringer Cancel Column file configuration If you have the Beam and Column package you can create column files from the elevation views Pick the Bay that you want and then pick the Write to column file button under the right side or left side column If the column is spliced you will need to select the tier as well and make a separate file for each tier After selecting an existing column file to append to or replace or creating a new column file a configuration dialog box pops up You can also open this box by picking
140. 0107 FT IISS Distance to next panel point lt 10 O gt Enter C 0 0114 FT IISS Distance to next panel point lt 10 O gt Enter D 0 0203 FT IISS Distance to next panel point lt 10 O gt Enter E 0 0204 Do you want a camber diagram Y N lt Y gt Enter Pick point for left end Enter Shipping Mark associated with this camber diagram 1B1 1718 1315 ae 100 0 CAMBER DIAGRAM FOR 1B1 DEG DECIMAL to FEET FEET to DECIMAL FT DEC Pulldown AutoSD gt Calculator gt Dec to Ft Pulldown AutoSD gt Calculator gt Ft to Dec gt FT IISS Pulldown AutoSD gt Calculator gt Ft to Dec gt FT II SS Toolbar Calculator Ribbon AutoSD I gt Miscellaneous These two programs are conversion programs The first one converts decimals of a foot to the FT IISS format while the second one converts FT IISS to decimals of a foot EXTEND WEIGHT HE Pulldown AutoSD gt Calculator gt Extend Weight All 14 Pulldown AutoSD gt Calculator gt Extend Weight One line Toolbar Calculator Ribbon AutoSD I gt Miscellaneous This command will calculate the weight of an item in the shop bill just by picking the text or attribute for the quantity description feet and inches If you have the shop bill configured with the location of inches as 0 where the length is written as a single text item you will be asked to select the length instead of feet and inches 84 AutoSD St
141. 1 for 1 16 4 for 1 4 etc Listed below are the symbols and tilde character VER a SES otis fare nam 34 ort pory gore BR thor iL Jor cns oor c oor O AS SHN jor J OPP HND k ar K AND NTD AND NTD 169 would be entered as E O Superscripts and subscripts are made by preceding the word or letters with a S for superscript or s for subscript SSUPERSCRIPT will look like SYPERSCRIPT sSUBSCRIPT will look like SUBSCRPT To type 30 you would enter it as 30 So o O A card is provided for your use showing the location of each symbol on the keyboard Some of the symbols are for use with the calculator The locations of these symbols are shown to the left 91 Dimensioning Chapter 6 AutoSD Steel Detailing There are two different text styles and seven different fonts supplied with AutoSD The style names are ASD FONT and ASD BKAP The fonts used with ASD FONT are asdroam asdromns asdromn asdsimpx asdtxt and cvspro The fonts used with ASD BKAP are asdfrc96 asdram96 asdros96 asdrom96 asdsim96 asdtxt96 asdfrc96 and cvspro These are called BIGFONTS The default style is ASD BKAP and the default font is asdros96 These bigfonts are used in association with fonts supplied with AutoCAD The bigfonts asdroam asdram96 asdromns asdros96 asdromn and asdrom96 are used with the AutoCAD font romans The bigfonts asdsimpx and asdsim96 are used with the AutoCAD font s
142. 3 Holl sizene ha sete tie ae Rae iets 56 HOles tet GGA ek 55 MSS sca teett EE dca 7 Insert Picketsunuavesraummsantjainlesvened 195 Installing AutoSD Steel Detailing AutoCAD LT configuration 228 Bricscad Pro configuration 226 Release 14 configuration 224 Release 2000 and later configuration 225 Installing AutoSD Steel Detailing 223 Installing the Hardware lock iv Installing the Hardware Lock eee 228 Installing the program cece eee esteeeeeeeeeee iv mere AD see 229 Internal Connections ennrnvvrnnvnrvenvvnnnrnvvverrnn 106 Add symbol for channel 111 Import connection 0 0 eee eeseeeeeeereeeneeees 108 Lett Center Righton ionieni 107 Vertical hole spacing orrrororrnnrrrrnnrrrrvnnr 111 Joist forms sis enisinia unii 70 CANAM mea a a a REER 71 NUCORTOH nesie aa a 72 SE SBS RSESEESSEREESE SEES 71 NUECRAET also a a A 71 J ist less ee ete gd d 40 Joist side or end View eesse 40 Laddet Senee aen Pen Ae Re ee ae 41 199 bottom hoop uannsnstnsrdntsdisrsrt 201 erection Clevallon ai 4 4 nee 202 TIC MOOD iia cee eee ies 201 Teo icai gedde 201 Security guard vi 201 top HOOP RE ER 201 ve 199 258 AutoSD Steel Detailing Index bottom clip size unejnidiintnsteisvs 199 PACK CUS missa 199 HOOP SPAIN eis sneen a 200 PUNE ae 199 SP ACTING meet 199 SUNBEDS EE NN Ear 199 without cage bokform savne 201 brackets nrnna 201 Horse 200 Up 200
143. 36 Prompts r Prompt Location Project Detail of Contractor Add Apply Delete Architect Holes Move up Move down Paint 1 of 2 Paint 2 of 2 PEN Default value THIS JOB Checked Sheet number Tagname ASD NA Job number r Text Material grade r Location from bottom left x 127 1102 y 2 0708 Pick Style ASD BKAP F Justification Left Height 0 0108 Rotation 0 Color ByLayer Layer Title block OK Cancel Print Pick AutoSD gt Insert gt Title block You get the dialog box shown to the left Pick one of the prompts and then pick the Value box at the bottom to change the value of the prompt The value will be put in the title block and all changes will be saved when you pick the OK button All values saved will become the defaults for the next time the title block program is opened Pick Save as to make a copy of the selected Job Name You can rename or Once the title block is inserted you can edit it with AutoCAD s Attribute Editor by double clicking on one of the attributes typing eattedit or pick Modify gt Object gt Attribute gt Global AutoSD Steel Detailing Shop Bill Chapter 10 ATTRIBUTES vs TEXT Even though AutoSD gives you the ability of extracting the bill of material using text attributes allows you to extract the data to an ASCII file in a format that you control where it can be used by other programs not supplied by AutoSD In order to extract information you mu
144. 4 Outstanding Leg is 3 Do you want to reverse legs Y N lt N gt Enter Enter angle mark or use lt aa gt Enter Far Side clip NOTE Leg on web is 4 Outstanding Leg is 3 Do you want to reverse legs Y N lt N gt Enter Enter angle mark or use lt ab gt Enter Bent clips default to nonstandard marks 103 Beams Chapter 7 AutoSD Steel Detailing Start shop bill text on LINE lt 4 gt Enter Field Bolt Washers El Number of field bolts in Web Line 1 of 2 lt 6 gt Enter le gle FT IISS Total grip less washers lt 5 8 gt Enter pr Sri Number of field bolts Line 2 of 2 lt 0 gt Enter Mr n Shop bill information on mark aa Bre ee Sr Total sub quantity 1 teed ee Shop bill information on mark ab 5 Total sub quantity 1 A dialog box is used to select Add connection to beam file Y N lt Y gt Y the bolt type and washers The left end is drawn A top view of the connection and top flange is automatically drawn if the beam is skewed offset is not 0 A section showing the bottom flange looking down from the top is automatically drawn if the beam is skewed If the support is a beam you will be asked if you want to add the connection to beam file The default answer is Y Saving the connection will allow you to import the connection as an internal connection when you detail the support member To take
145. 42172 x 3 0 15 189 5 ONE CHK D R NOSING 0 3 mb ONE 163 GRAT Tatl x 10 15 632 ONE GRAT 1G1 ONE GRAT 1G2 ONE GRAT 163 184 AutoSD Steel Detailing Stairs Chapter 12 the other but not both This allows you to use a Gage material or a heavier plate The layout is drawn to scale Landing Pan Input is in FT IISS x BEND A Ey a pe 6 POSITIVE m PG I BEND B fal G NEGATIVE 13 BEND C m Pan Material SelectGage Offset 6 01 Gege Optional 10 Include Stiftner angles Decimal Thickness 0 1345 C Run Angles Lengthwise Number of Angles 2 F at Overall Length 8 04 Sinan 7 Overall Width 4 0208 2 Dimension 8 06 Left Stair 3 83 Notch Width 04 Ea E Als Notch Depth 0308 5 Mark for angles aa m Bends O Bend A O BendB O BendC OK Cancel 4 22 1 7 17 BFA aa TYP n m m ut Ui Ww Ut ul mi Ul Ul mi Ul ul mi N Ui wi Wt 7 Ui wi Wi ig ut Ui wt ut Wi Ww ut Wi Ww ut Ui Ww ut vi Ww u u Wu 7 3 0 La 3 0 6 4 ONE Kr ARS 185 Stairs Chapter 12 AutoSD Steel Detailing 186 AutoSD Steel Detailing Rails Ch
146. 7 C tong iegvericai i i i i I BAR ANCHOR Anchors p Section ma mos Hee Tye p Bent Ber Cut Section a v N gt 2 4 H lo B O H le O None o Toe s CHANNEL OR par hae Draw Section h a g BENT 1 F I i N E Es a A Moa Le I I i bo CTRD ength A N E Mark Aa j I SE a 2 bf H wan BE Spacing Shipping spicing z i Thick 0004 Gage _ or SECT MA l LL Knocked down 1 CUP O Put bars on head BarMark ba Hole size hi I i LIcace gt i h Reference note h OK Cancel oa 610 ao CRD He Pall He EL BER D ONE EL Pulldown AutoSD gt EL vert Pulldown AutoSD gt EL horiz Ribbon AutoSD I gt Miscellaneous This command makes it easy to put an elevation dimension or text After picking the insertion point for the arrow placement enter the elevation in the FT IISS format or type T and press enter to enter a text string One command is for placing it vertically the other is for placing it horizontally EMBED FRAME Pulldown AutoSD gt Detail gt Embed Frame Toolbar Detail Ribbon AutoSD II gt Detail This program will detail a single member or a frame consisting of two three or four members The members may be angles or channels The member lengths for a frame will be drawn to ETE scale Insertion is aided with the help of an Nm FE outline box If the selection is for a si
147. 8 Chapter 8 Bracing All programs in this chapter are under the AutoSD gt BRACING pulldown menu Bracing toolbar and AutoSD II gt Bracing ribbon menu vec Mc HC D ZD BD GE alculate Gusset PL Brace alculate Gusset PL Truss alculate Gusset PL Weight raw Brace raw HSS in Frame raw Gusset Plate dit Gusset Plate List GUS Files AV AP iew GUS File arallel Brace Tower The bracing portion of AutoSD consists of a program to calculate and save gusset plates a program to edit gusset plate files a program to view existing gusset plate files a program to draw gusset plates and a program to draw braces These programs are supported by icon menus and dialog boxes to select the type of gusset plate and the type and orientation of the brace A view of the gusset plate type or brace type in the orientation selected is provided for your reference in entering the necessary data for calculations to be made Gusset plates should be calculated first This gives you the information needed to detail the gusset plate and brace You can calculate all of the gusset plates first on a job and save the information to be used later or you can calculate them as needed CALCULATION OF GUSSET PLATES Determining the number of bolts There are four different ways to determine the number of bolts They are as follows 1 Load gt 0 Area 0 The number of bolts will be determined by the load 2 Load 0 Area gt 0
148. AGE 4 5 6 ad 209 EXTRACT for Fabtrol using Attributes 162 CHANGE OPTION 34 coieseee PAs 209 EXTRACT for Fabtrol using Text 0 0 163 CHANGE SIZE susan regerede 209 FabSuite Ks file gunst 164 CHANGE SIDE 5 granske 209 COMPILE QUANTITIES From ALL CHANGE SLOT ANGLE 0 eee 209 DRAWINGS slettes 164 CHANGE SLOT LENGTH Mur 209 AutoSD Steel Detailing Contents CHANGE SLOT WIDTH seerne 209 CHANGE TAL engene ts 210 CHANGE HOLE TO SLOT ee 210 CHANGE SLOT TO HOLE 1 ee 210 NOTE HOLES NS FS or BS eee eens 210 REPLACE TAIL DIMENSION eee 210 BURNS uses cca rr aner 210 CHANGE ANGLE sesers 211 CHANGE BEAM END secese 211 CHANGE DEPTH Y Quist 211 CHANGE LENGTH X eccess 211 CHANGE NOTCH D 211 CHANGE SETBACK 211 CHANGE SIDE Gj res 211 CHANGE SURFACE 212 CHANGE TYPE hetende 212 CHANGE LAYER Gduvsscssessesserssrsseseessensseee 212 CHECK DATA eee 212 EDIT D 213 EDIT DSTV file catigeikuenndueiie 217 Gather marks nsnur ies 219 Write DSTV for scire in 219 Write DSTV file for Clips Tees Angles 219 Write DSTV file for Plates srnrnrrronvnrrnrne 220 Graphically Check DSTV file rerrrrrornnne 221 SUB MARK ed 221 Tips see 207 Appendix A Installation 223 SentinelPro Drivers for Hardware Lock 223 INSTALLING AutoSD STEEL DETAILING EE EEE 223 AutoCAD Release 14 configuration 224 AutoCAD Release 2000 2013 configuration EN EE EE DE
149. Appendix C eo go ty AS DEVA G i x ow a ao INT TIONIS Y H04 G 39 isn PS ONY S H109 9 JdA INN FIINIS Y HOJ 0 38 ISMN PG ONY GS HLOd Le AE SI YO 38 ISMN OG ONY S H109 Ay 244 AutoSD Steel Detailing Truss Panel Details Appendix D Appendix D Truss Panel Details This appendix provides you with a copy of the slides that are used with the GUSSET PLATE TRUSS program 245 Truss Panel Details Appendix D AutoSD Steel Detailing I M3BMYD 247 ZL T MIND Truss Panel Details Appendix D AutoSD Steel Detailing GANBER 2 248 AutoSD Steel Detailing Stair Forms Appendix E Appendix E Stair Input Forms The following forms in this appendix can be used for entering data into the stair program The forms can be filled out by someone that does not have access to AutoSD Steel Detailing and later entered by someone who does You may make copies of the forms for your use For the picture forms on page 250 and 252 put an X in the boxes provided to select the top and bottom condition type and other options available Fill in the boxes for the dimensions Some boxes will be used based on which end conditions were selected Answer the questions on the form on page 250 249 Stair Forms Appendix E AutoSD Steel Detailing
150. AutoSD I gt Change gt Mt 37 Scale of Drawing command Arge between items 00M EST Preview The PREVIEW button allows you to see the result before you make it final ARROWHEADS TO TICKS Pulldown AutoSD gt Modify Ribbon AutoSD I gt Change This command will change all selected arrowheads to ticks BREAK LINE TYPE Pulldown AutoSD gt Modify gt Break gt Break Line Type Toolbar Modify Ribbon AutoSD I gt Modify This will break a line at two selected points and then change the segment that was picked first to the line type selected from a dialog box It is normally used to break a continuous line to make part of it hidden Select the line where the hidden segment will be then picked a point on each side of the selection point Select HID or HIDDEN from the dialog box 73 Edit Chapter 4 AutoSD Steel Detailing CHG CHANGE TEXT BR Pulldown AutoSD gt Modify gt Change Text Toolbar Change Ribbon AutoSD I gt Change Change text is used to change part of a word or number by typing in the old string the part you want to change and then typing in the new string what you want to change it to For example To change THIS BROWN COW to THIS BLACK COW pick change text from tablet Command Select objects 1 selected 1 found Select objects Enter Old string ROWN New string LACK Changed 1 text lines Command Change Text command will
151. AutoSD Steel Detailing AutoSD STEEL DETAILING Reference Manual Version 2015 AutoSD Steel Detailing Copyright 1990 2015 by AutoSD Inc This publication or parts thereof may not be reproduced in any form by any means for any purpose AutoSD Inc makes no warranty expressed or implied including but not limited to any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose regarding these materials and makes such materials available solely on an as is basis In no event shall AutoSD Inc be liable to anyone for special collateral incidental or consequential damages in connection with or arising out of the use of these materials It is the user s sole responsibility to check and verify the validity of the information obtained from these materials AutoSD Inc reserves the right to revise and improve their products as they see fit This publication describes the state of this product at the time of its publication and may not reflect the product at all times in the future This manual was published in December 2014 based on AutoCAD release 14 2015 and Bricscad PRO 10 15 Trademarks AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk Inc BricsCAD is a registered trademark of Bricsys NV WINDOWS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation SDS 2 is a registered trademark of Design Data CVSpro is a registered trademark of CadVantage Inc Xsteel is a registered trademark of Tekl
152. BASE LENGTH TOR COND F oa 7 RELEASED TO A DRAWN BY CHECKED BY fre PRODUCTION VULCRAFT SHORT SPAN DWG NUCOR DISTANCE BETWEEN HOLES VULCRAFT GROUP 9169 His 314 GA K SERIES JOB NUMBER 13169 His 4 GA LH SERIES JOB NAME minn D FS LEFT 4 END H a NS OVERALL LENGTH OF GIRDER J 5 GA GIRDERS TOP CHORD HOLE GAGE Top Chord Holes Top Chord Holes MARK NF LOCATION DBH TCH HLS MARK NF LOCATION DBH TCH HLS 0 0 l o o 0 0 o o o o 0 0 l vo J vo l o o I II o o FT 00 FEET 0 0 1 He vo T T ETT co T T 7 o o o o 0 0 l 0 0 o o o o i co FET eao T T J 0 0 m r 0 9 Eu Tee l v o J o o ET vo T T FEET 0 0 T T T o o o o l 0 0 o o INSTRUCTIONS Locate centeriine of joist or single hole location for each side of girder beginning at left end one side at a time Enter all near side then all for sida Locations are cumulative dimension ia from previous location Location
153. C 4 kss Customer Sss AutoSD supports the KISS file format for material management software When you select Extract for KISS using attributes shop bill attributes will be extracted from the drawing and automatically uggsu a rE converted to an ASCII file format that can be imported by the FabTrol program If you used the tag OK Exit 162 AutoSD Steel Detailing Shop Bill Chapter 10 FAB TXT names ASD_NA for Project Name ASD_NO for Job Number ASD_GR for material grade and ASD_RE for the revision mark in your title block attributes this information will be included in the kss file If you prefix or suffix the description with MI and the length is 0 MI will be used as the shape designation for miscellaneous material Example MI FRAME or FRAME MI Order of priority for grade The grade for each piece is retrieved from the customer s Detail variables found under Beams Entering a grade in the title block for ASD_GR will override the customer s Detail variables setting for all grades If the grade is listed in the BOM for a piece that grade will override all other settings The file name will be the same as the drawing name but will have an kss extension and will be located in the same folder as the drawing After extracting for KISS you will have a separate kss file for each drawing You can merge these files together by using the ex
154. Cancel 88 AutoSD Steel Detailing Calculator Chapter 5 SELECT DIM TO ADD Pulldown AutoSD gt Calculator gt Select Dim to Add gt Decimal Pulldown AutoSD gt Calculator gt Select Dim to Add gt FT IISS Pulldown AutoSD gt Calculator gt Select Dim to Add gt FT II SS Toolbar Calculator Ribbon AutoSD I gt Miscellaneous This command will calculate the sum of all numbers picked You may select the numbers one at a time or use crossing or window or a combination of each If you select a non legal text string or any non text entity it will be given a value of 0 and not affect the total Using the DECIMAL format of this program is a quick way to get a total of the weight for a completed assembly You can use window or crossing to make selections Non text items selected will be filtered out Text strings that contain letters will evaluate to 0 The total is also the default number the next time the CALCULATOR is used Valid text strings are listed below All numbers may be positive or negative and may be enclosed in parenthesis 1 3 1 4 1 0 3 1 4 1 4 1 314 1 0 374 l4 15 25 12 3 25 25 There is one command under DECIMAL and one under FT IISS After selecting and adding dimensions the total is shown on the command line in the format for the one selected The FT IISS will give the answer in architectural units If architectural dime
155. D or AutoSD II gt Bracing gt Parallel Brace Tower Select 2 or 4 sides If 4 sides are selected H will be the vertical height and a new height will calculated for the true length Enter values for B H T and select the number of panels Pick Calc to get the results The results may be viewed one panel at a time Pick Draw to draw the tower with all dimensions Picking OK will close the dialog box Calculate Gusset Plate Truss Pick AutoSD or AutoSD II gt Bracing gt Calculate Gusset PL Truss Select the plate type and orientation Select a diagonal and vertical member and whether there is 1 or 2 required If the member is a pipe or tube the program defaults to only one member required Enter the load on each member or enter 0 zero to use the area for calculating the load in tension and select a grade of steel Enter dimension A to check an existing plate detail or leave it blank to let the program calculate the minimum for A with the clearance given for 4 Enter all dimensions required and pick Calculate to get the answers Pick Print to print the answers on the drawing using a leader The loads on the output and used to calculate the welds is the greater of the load entered and the load calculated based on the area of the members in tension Output A is the greater of A from the input column and the dimension calculated to achieve the given clearance WS length of weld on diagonal member WV l
156. DBOLT C040000 Description 40 characters max ASD_BLTMARK C016000 Main mark 16 characters max ASD BLTLOCATE C006000 Location which end 6 characters max ASD_BLTFINISH C006000 finish i e black galv S S 6 characters max The comments must not actually be part of the template file Each line has two fields The first field is the tag name The tag name is the name of one of the tags in the ASD_FLDBOLT block The second field contains the format for the data for that tag All format fields start with a C denoting it as a character field The next three digits are the field width characters The last three are number of decimal places All character fields have 000 for the last three digits CAUTION The first fields in the attribute extract template file MUST be spelled as shown above NOTE Do not use tab characters when constructing the template file If you want to align the columns for readability do so with ordinary spaces BOLT EXPANSION Pulldown AutoSD gt Detail gt Bolt Expansion Toolbar Detail Bae Ribbon AutoSD II gt Detail 50 AutoSD Steel Detailing Draw Chapter 3 This program will draw a detailed side view of any size bolt The head will be solid lines the shaft will be hidden lines and tapered The scale is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command BOLLARD Pulldown AutoSD gt Detail gt Bollard Toolbar Detail Ribbon Au
157. Disk C Expand AutoSD Select Support Pick OK Pick OK again Expand Templates Select Template Pick the button at the right end of the line with the three dots Change folders to C autosd support and select Autosd dwt 226 AutoSD Steel Detailing Installation Appendix A Pick Open Select Template path Pick the button at the right end of the line with the three dots Change folders to C autosd support Pick OK Loading the menu AutoCAD If you are updating AutoSD 2011 or older version you will need to load the original AutoCAD menu before loading the AutoSD menu Pick Tools gt Options gt Files tab Expand Color book Locations The second path the long one is the path for the ACAD menu Copy this line and paste it in place of the path for Customization Files gt Main Customization File Change the word color at the end of the line to acad ACLT for AutoCAD LT Press the enter key after changing the path Pick the Apply button Loading the AutoSD menu At the command prompt type MENULOAD and press enter Pick Browse In the Select Menu File box pick the arrow at the right end of the Look in box and select the drive where AutoSD is installed In the large box double click on AUTOSD double click on MENUS AutoCAD 14 2000 2009 and Bricscad select autosd mnu AutoCAD 2010 2014 select autosd cuix AutoCAD 2015 and later select autosd15 cuix Select Open Pick Load
158. Do you have another internal connection Y N N Place shop bill text on LINE lt 9 gt Enter FT IISS Thickness of connection material at left end lt 5 16 gt Enter FT IISS Thickness of connection material at right end lt 5 16 gt Enter Command 6 8 6 734 N 11 0 S 2 1 3 6 dr 6 5 4 1 2 C8x11 5 x 21 1 ei 20 0 ONE GRT 18 p SAG ROD The SAG ROD program is located in the AutoSD gt BEAMS SECT Sonn pulldown menu The sag rod can be straight or bent Sag rods are put in a schedule the straight ones in one schedule and the bent ones in another For this reason when you are detailing sag rods you should do all of the same type at one time If you quit the program and come back to detail sag rods later the program will let you add new sag rods to an existing schedule FT IISS Diameter of sag rod 121 Beams Chapter 7 AutoSD Steel Detailing Number of nuts at each end lt 1 gt Enter Number of washers at each end lt 1 gt Enter FT IISS Enter dimension A 5 FT IISS Enter dimension B 1 02 FT IISS Enter dimension C 04 FT IISS Enter dimension D 0112 Insertion point Move cursor to screen area Enter Quantity Enter Main Place shop bill text on LINE lt 11 gt Do you want another sag rod Y N 1R1 Enter lt Y gt N
159. E 225 AutoCAD Release 2014 and later configuration EEE EE ET EE 225 Bricscad 10 and later Pro Platinum Configuration oeeie e e 226 Loading the menu suapsadi sont stes 227 AutoCAD LT configuration 228 INSTALLING the HARDWARE LOCK 228 Starting a NEW drawing 229 MAE AD ur 229 Appendix B Support Files ernrorrrornrvrnrvrrrrnn 233 ASD CEG ESP une ene a a 233 SHAPE DATABASE ennrrervrnvnennvsnvvenrevneee 233 Appendix C Gusset Plate Details 237 GUSSET PLATE INPUT FORM 238 Appendix D Truss Panel Details 245 Appendix E Stair Input Forms 249 ERROR HANDLING AND REPORTING 253 AutoSD 2015 Report Form 1 254 INDEX seres kid AE Ge 255 Contents AutoSD Steel Detailing AutoSD Steel Detailing Introduction Chapter 1 Chapter 1 Introduction Welcome to AutoSD Steel Detailing AutoSD Steel Detailing AutoSD is a steel detailing program that is designed to increase the production of the draftsperson and act as an aid for the checker It is assumed that you have a working knowledge of steel detailing and AutoCAD or BricsCAD It is not designed to replace the draftsperson but is an enhancement The draftsperson is in control of the detailing at all times AutoSD will do most of the calculations and all of the drawing normally done by the draftsperson in detailing beams columns bracing gusset plates stairs handrails ladders erection plans sections details and mor
160. EW WITHOUT GAGE Cancel 202 AutoSD Steel Detailing Hip amp Valley Chapter 15 H Y NYld IV ILXJA 40 NOILVAJ TI Chapter 15 Hip amp Valley All programs in this chapter are under the AutoSD gt Hip and Valley pulldown menu and AutoSD II gt Hip amp Valley ribbon menu The HIP and VALLEY programs will design connections where the purlin is horizontal parallel to the ground and the web is tilted 90 to the roof plane They will draw a complete layout of the purlin and rafter with section views showing detail dimensions of the connection This layout will take up the entire drawing therefore your drawing should be blank before you start Start a new drawing and run setup first setting the drawing size to 24 x 36 and the scale to 1 1 0 Purlins can be sitting on top of the rafter or framing into the side All views are drawn to scale for easy placement of the purlin connections Easy selection of member sizes is made from dialog boxes perigee Ei HP Ti i ren BENT FAR SDE pE CUP ANGLE NEAR SIDE W OR TS we END PLATE yp ie FURUN 3 E EG 1007 can I gere men TOC W OR ZENT k PURE W OR TS BENT amp TS Cx Cancel Cx Cancel ve WP we KE DES NES 5 TA NOE YRD W OR TS BENT R FAR SIO CUP ANGLE NEAR SIDE et men
161. Enter Finished The plate size is rounded up to the nearest 1 8 The detail of the gusset plate is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command The plate below on the left used the option for horizontal and vertical dimensions to go to the first hole The plate on the right used the option for horizontal and vertical dimensions to go to the last hole If you want to calculate the weight of the plate use the CALCULATE GUSSET PL WEIGHT command and simply pick one edge of the plate and enter the thickness The weight will be the finished weight with corners clipped and blocked The scale is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command DRAWING BRACES The brace program will draw several types of braces X braces and simple braces You should be able to detail a sheet of braces in about an hour This includes calculating the gussets and filling out the shop bill 131 Bracing Chapter 8 AutoSD Steel Detailing The different types are listed below Pipe Simple or X Tube Simple or X Angles Single or double simple or X WT Flange view simple or X Wide flange Web view simple only Flange view simple or X Channel Web view single or double simple or X The gusset plate calculation program should be run first to get the necessary input such as number of rows and distance from work point to
162. GATIVE DIMENSIONS AS SHOWN WRAPED we Av P NOT x x WRAPED pg N NOT WRAPED DIM BETWEEN HOLES R NS R NS If the angle size selected has unequal legs the long leg by default will be shop attached to the beam web You can reverse this by answering Y when prompted to do so If you have a skewed beam framing into a column and you want Clipping the lower end of a sloping beam is accomplished by selecting a column tube beam or user type for the support Enter Y when asked to block the bottom flange Enter a block length eee i that is greater than the Min Length shown in the picture to the left The program will then ask the following question FT IISS DEPTH of web cut from top of beam lt 1 1 8 gt 0805 This will produce the result shown T con nection WT or Plate connection input Input is in FT ISS This connection is for tube shapes The connection can Fre E pe dn M be made from plates or a split T It can have two clips aw oe ie UT or one column or holes _ eae rT ae Ve el The tube must be level and square with the supports gere 9 Skewed and sloping are not options with this i m Fa connection pee pl ne THK A AL 2 OPTION WT OPTION HM
163. H on top of an existing beam just the end view on top of an existing section or draw the section too or draw both side view and end view You can also have horizontal studs on the pour stop and kickers supporting the pour stop Under Material select either Bent Plate or Angle If you select Bent plate you will need to enter the size of the vertical and horizontal legs and thickness in the edit boxes under the drop down list for angles If you select Angle these edit boxes will be filled in automatically from the angle size selected If you use the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command to set the scale to a larger scale the side view will be drawn to the scale of the drawing but the end view will be drawn to the larger scale Pour Stop shipped loose Inputis in FT 11S5 POUR STOP Loose fs Pulldown AutoSD gt Detail gt Pour Stop loose esa i le ioe Toolbar Detail Je er Ribbon AutoSD II gt Detail perata O Nore Deformecanchor Headedsud Hookediod Holes This draws a pour stop as a main member The pour stop can be a bent plate or angle toed near side or far side You can draw just the side view or draw both side view and end view 63 Draw Chapter 3 AutoSD Steel Detailing No
164. IN TEXT 5 or TAIL 5 g8 FLANGE NOTCH BEVEL peep TED LINE y ZV CNC Chapter 16 AutoSD Steel Detailing The drawing to the right shows the entity that each burn is saved in ae A rectangular slot is shown to the left The Hole Diameter is used for the radius of the corners A 1 hole diameter equals 1 2 corner radius m om ange The drawing below and on the next page shows all of the burn types and TAIL conditions Note notch can have an angle other than 0 making it skewed Any corner of a beam web can have only one of the following Block Flange Thin Rat Hole or Beveled Flange There should be only one contour per end per web and flange but can be used with other burns Because CNC data for Contours and Cutouts is described graphically by the line with a base angle of 0 degrees you must enter an angle of 90 when the burn is on a column that is detailed standing up If the burn is on a sloping beam or brace detailed in position the angle is the angle measured from a horizontal line The X and Y values that locate a cutout go to the left most point for X and top most point for Y This is either a line or the intersection of two lines If it is an intersection and the intersection is rounded then it would be to the apparent intersection of the two lines All angle shapes must be detailed with the outstanding leg on top or on the left side when using contour
165. ISS Elevation of beam at CL of RIGHT end support lt 0 gt Enter Number of dimension to input 1 3 1 A slide is displayed to show for user reference FT IISS Input dimension fl 11 FT IISS Angle Dimension of Offset of right end in plan is far side lt 0 gt 4 FT IISS Thickness bent plate 0005 FT IISS Horiz Minus dimension lt 3 16 gt Enter FT IISS Elevation of support beam lt 0 gt Enter Insertion point Pick a point Stagger gages of clips Y N N FT IISS Hole C C for web connection lt 6 gt Enter FT IISS Edge distance to sides of plate lt 1 1 4 gt Enter E MOMENT END PLATE SELECT OPTION This program is for drawing an end plate for a SELECT END PLATE TYPE moment connection There are four types to choose from The moment end plate can be vp spaced I TYP SPACING designed and saved in your customer job folder bed od DRE before you detail a beam or it can be designed and saved as it is needed while you detail a beam The plate can be added to an existing beam detail One END PLATE TYPE 1 END PLATE TYPE 2 moment end plate design will fit any size beam TP sene TYP sne I The moment end plate will NOT be drawn to the END PLATE TYPE 3 END PLATE TYPE 4 scale set by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command Type 1 Holes will be spaced a
166. ISS SETBACK IS CORNER OF PLATE CLIPPED Y N FT IISS MINIMUM CLEARANCE If dimension A is given FT USS 3 FT IISS 6a FT IISS 10 FT IISS 4 FT IISS 7 FT IISS 411 FT IISS 5 FT IISS 7a FT IISS 12 FT IISS 452 FT IISS 8 FT IISS 413 FT IISS 6 FT IISS 9 FT IISS 13a 238 AutoSD Steel Detailing Gusset Plate Details Appendix C o S 4 Ox R ia TIZ KE Ax BOTH 5 AND 5a MUST BE O FOR SINGLE LINE BOTH 5 AND Sa MUST BE 0 FOR A SINGLE LINE ee gt TUZE J I iz 1 TYPE a pa ii Exh aes is Sri TES ON BOTH 5 AND Sa MUST BE 0 FOR A SINGLE LINE HORIZ CUP 239 AutoSD Steel Detailing Gusset Plate Details Appendix C INN JIINIS Y 404 Q 38 SAW OS ONY S H108 INN JINIS Y 904 0 38 ISNM OG ANY S HLOB 5 N v 3 H104 Gusset Plate Details Appendix C AutoSD Steel Detailing 241 Gusset Plate Details Appendix C AutoSD Steel Detailing BOTH 5 AND Sa MUST BE 0 FOR A SINGLE LINE BOTH 5 AND Sa MUST BE D FOR A SINGLE UNE BOTH 5 AND 5a MUST BE 0 FOR A SINGLE LINE W aa mu 232 o ol pen VG oz 2 ma un a TO EL D mo TYPE 4 242 Gusset Plate Details Appendix C AutoSD Steel Detailing 243 AutoSD Steel Detailing Gusset Plate Details
167. If you want a scale of 7 32 1 0 then divide 7 by 32 You would enter 2188 as the scale The Plot scale would be the reciprocal x 12 54 8571 For a list of the scales and Plot scales provided see page 13 When you pick OK the drawing is set up One border is drawn around the sheet if the border option is checked Save the drawing and then you may begin drawing Three layers are created for drawing ASD DRAW which is used for object lines dimensions and text and ASD SECT which is used for section symbols and ASD MARK which is used for main marks The color of layer ASD DRAW determines the color of text You can change the colors that are used by default by editing the colors with the Customer Configuration command See page 14 for more information PAPER g r LIMITS BORDER LINE OFFSET ORIGIN 0 0 OFFSET MARGIN OFFSET MARGI MARGIN OFFSET To change the drawing area and limits of a selected paper size pick the Change settings button Enter the margin sizes in real world distances The offset of the border inside the margins should be greater than 0 If 0 is used the border may not plot if the drawing is plotted using limits The lower left corner of the border will be placed at the origin of 0 0 and the border will be inside the limits by the amount of the offset The border and drawing limits are smaller than the paper size The chart below lists the paper sizes and the def
168. M D MASS D WE AR tw Bf Tf T k r Ix Sx Rx Iy Sy Ry zx Zy GAGE 4 13 100 19 4 16 13 3 83 0 280 4 060 0 345 2 625 0 750 0 405 11 300 5 460 1 720 3 860 1 900 1 000 6 280 2 920 2 250 5 16 130 24 5 010 16 4 68 0 240 5 000 0 360 3 500 0 750 0 390 21 300 8 510 2 130 7 510 3 000 1 270 9 590 4 570 2 750 5 19 130 28 5 150 19 5 54 0 270 5 030 0 430 3 500 0 813 0 383 26 200 10 20 2 170 9 130 3 630 1 280 11 60 5 530 2 750 The first line is the designation for the dimension in the column below it This line must be the first line of the file and the order of numbers must be maintained The remaining lines describe each shape The entire description for a shape must be on a single line enclosed in parentheses The numbers are divided into columns to make the file easy to read but in reality there only needs to be one space between each number Below is the designation and definition of each column D Nominal depth in inches enclosed in quotes Wt Nominal weight in pounds enclosed in quotes MM D Nominal depth in millimeters enclosed in quotes MASS Nominal mass in kg enclosed in quotes D Actual depth in inches WT Actual weight in pounds AR Area in square inches tw Web thickness in inches Bf Flange width in inches Tf Flange thickness in inches T Clear distance on web between fillets in inches k Flange thickness plus fillet radius in inches r Fillet radius in inches Ix Moment of iner
169. ND VIEW This uses the Tread Builder to select the pan and options It draws the end view of a pan If a blowup is drawn only the pan will be drawn otherwise you can elect to show or not show supports and dimensions If you choose to show dimensions you will be asked to pick the location of each ETAIL OF STANDARD PAN D Rl8x23 116 x 3 0 BENT ha 1 REQD 178 AutoSD Steel Detailing Stairs Chapter 12 dimension Rubber band lines for the extension lines will show you which dimension you are working with Ge STAIR TREAD RISER CALCULATOR Stair Calculator Input is in FT IISS Code to use This is a design program used to Max Rise Min Tread O Total Run calculate a tread riser combination for a 0 0708 0 1000 BOCA Assem and Inst Total Rise 2 0612 given total rise or total run Four BOCA One and two family 9 0804 0 0900 different codes are given to choose from BOCA Others 0 0800 0 0900 el Min Riser Te Each has their own standard maximum O NFIPA 0 0700 0 1100 7 Max Tread 0 1100 riser and minimum tread which can be Precision Calculate using changed by the user Additionally you Change Code i Z le 4 1 2 v lo Rise Run Rise x Run can enter a minimum rise
170. ONE 32 Wins plate senere 148 SS sed 36 El valonssusasssssJoasadesea ke 144 ENG KYSSER AESSRE SEE ST SDS A antee sarees 36 Import gussehunnnsdnkndbsmtniie 145 Enter any two uurnsuduaaisrydeidteeie 36 ME SEN rn reagerede 144 NS Or FS gade 37 Neva RNET 144 Rasta egret ieee ae ee SEE 37 OPen A N a t 144 Treads ne tenn pee a aa 37 SAVE e a S 144 VTM 32 SAVE AS ude SES RE SS ESS SSESEESE RE iia 144 Write column to file seeen 38 Edit DSTV Me 217 Embed Frame nons Susu ae Rae 53 Edit sub mark list 1 158 Embed plate use 54 Editing a color configuration srrrornroroorrrnnr 24 End Connections muistmnsenisinvsssessidite 100 Editing a configuration eerorrvororrvnrvrrvernrrnnrr 15 Bevel Hanse senere nn ag 101 Editing a customer s configuration BOUS tx ERE SE SERENE BEER egene 102 Dimensions aa 17 Clip fometudnus usa 101 Index AutoSD Steel Detailing Connection type Lulianssendsdedasldsen de 101 Deres DR 102 Detail Bean raserede 100 El is from bottom of beam cee 100 Import column file ooonnnrnnnnrrononnnvrnvvrnnvnn 101 iG dC KEE REE SEERE he eda 102 Seat Connection ccna inni 106 Skewed angle vases wesc siti dcsecdeanyettedeneeesties 101 Slope in degrees ic 5 ccssi edsacdeavackesaseevennaaes 100 Support is hip or valley rafter 100 Support Member v svsreneisnddeseddenvenddgden der 100 T Connection sussie 105 Fe 8 Error Handling and Reporting 1 253 Extend weight Loisji spessiel 84 165 Extrat EE EN ER 159
171. Pick suffix to the sub piece marks Bottom of line 1 from bottom border line 71101 Pick k Fa Center Y 31 0100 Pick Distance often line spaces 2 0600 Pick E Center w 31 0700 Pick e inches Weigh ONE Assembly Only r Limits of shop bill for extracting text Center FE 0 0000 Pick Shape 1 1 Upperlet ara EE ER Se es Select this if you want the I D Number 7 p Lower right er e me Sense H weight to be for one unit only rade Right 33 1100 Pick Text Height Weight 00108 Text Color white Roundweightto p x decimal places Describe Repeated Marks Set the location of Unit Quantity Shape D Grade and Weight to 0 to disable it Select this if you want the Set the location of Inches to 0 ta combine Feet and Inches as one entity in the Feet column E A description filled out for all pieces with the same mark Not selecting this will not put the description with a mark that has already been used in the shop bill 154 AutoSD Steel Detailing Shop Bill Chapter 10 Carry sub marks through Selecting this will save new sub marks and description in the file submark tbl in your customer job folder When you use the same mark on following drawings the description from the file will be used Descriptions Put a space after the shape Put a check in this box if you want to have a space between the shape designation and the rest of the description When using Shop Bill Text Attributes
172. R Decimal Thickness ri rq g I Nil Mark MK pa T ae amp 5 Vet Sl 0600 Frame wiat v 75 IE Eg 2 60500 Frame Length Meld t 1 Sa 0208 Top hole Is Ea te OP lag 00300 Second hole gt ia Bolles 00204 Tai 2 BS 5 I les fea Tai a7 oo Teil g l MKI ag 10204 LastHole 9 00008 Pan edge 10 00100 Panedge i am 0300 Lowerlet i z HH az 0000 Loweright MK3 LI LH 0305 upperiet SE Ne 3 SIDES po aL W Ap z2 E ENTER 0 FOR 4 00400 Upperright z5 45 6 7 OR 8 St 0 0500 Drop header C Omit mks Select L3x3x1 4 pe Mork 896 Short leg vertical OK Cancel This program is for detailing shop welded frames out of channels with a pan shop attached or with grating field applied Channels can be toed in or out One channel can run past the corner either vertically or horizontally or can stop even with the other If channels are toed out and 15 is 0 then 9 may be negative to extend the pan over the flanges You can omit MK6 for this condition MK6 can run the full length as one piece or separate pieces between MKS The thickness description for the Pan material that goes on top of the frame can be by Gage Leaving the gage box blank will use the actual thickness in the description If channels are toed out you can omit MK3 and or MK4 from th
173. R10GAX7 116 x 8196 BENT hb 2 ASI 1 REQ D ONE 175 Stairs Chapter 12 AutoSD Steel Detailing ie a aS 10 11 12 CREATING PAN TREADS with the Tread Builder Stair Tread Builder Input is in FT IISS rNose r Rise r Bottom r Supports r File names 1 7 1 rType 1 4 9 2 3 1 Angle Varies a L Fi Ss 10GA 1 1 1 Angle 1 1 2 Angles 10GA 1 1 2 Angle 1 1 2 g i OB 10GA 2 2 6 Angle 1 1 2 5 ars 10GA 3 e1 r L 0GA 3 1 7 Angle 1 1 None 10GA 3 gle 1 1 2 9 O pein 10GA 4 2 1 Angle 1 1 2 3 Tr i 10GA 4 2 1 Angle 1 1 2 J3 4 gt ig i r Location 10GA 4 2 7 Angle 1 1 2 H m Tread 10GA 4 2 7 Angle 1 1 2 J3 4 i pe Je 7 e ee 10GA 5 0 4 Angle 1 1 2 v de ar MD Rise f h Delete Import mMm Size all treads Rename Save as 5 Angle L2x2x 4 2 m Bar paR A 0 0100 Mein mark 6 PET M Calc horiz Length B aooo NONE ics SUPPORT amp Sub mark SINE ONLY Horiz Length C 0 0100 Show dimensions r Cast Nosing D nd Draw tread C Drop pel C
174. RAWING command 93 Dimensioning Chapter 6 AutoSD Steel Detailing Command DIMENSIONS Pick from pulldown toolbar or ribbon menu First point or RETURN to select Pick a point Next point Pick another point Enter Dimension line location Pick a point Select orientation A dialog box pops up to select Select Horizontal Cancel FT IISS Spacing Text Dimension lt 4 6 11 16 gt Enter If only two points were picked Command If only two points were picked you get the prompt Spacing Text Dimension Typing a T allows you to enter text instead of a dimension Typing an S allows you to dimension spaces If you picked Aligned you would get the prompt Reference Enter to use points selected Press the enter key and the dimension line will be parallel to the two points picked Press R and enter and you are prompted to select a reference line The dimension line will be parallel to the line you pick If you picked Rotated you would get the prompt Decimal ROTATED dimension line angle lt 0 0000 gt Enter the angle for the dimension line and press enter Changes to arrowhead type and size leader arrowhead Extension line start and end location and text height are controlled through the Dimension Style dialog box Colors are controlled through the Customer configuration dialog box The dimension program uses a custom dimension style The style name is AUTOSD For ch
175. RE a lates 76 Scale of Blocks Solids Text ernrrnnrnrnvrrnnr 78 Scale of drawing eernrrvrnrrrvnnrrrvnrrrrvsrnrrveennn TI seder bee 78 Multiline ea 59 Nailer angle chanel snonoronnvnrrnrvnrvrrvrrvnrvne 60 Nailer holes uinie tinsi 61 Niels 4 61 NT 8 North Arrow uussnnsdaresvtsvndstet bei 42 Number of risers varsleren 90 ODJECtINTO sonarer 61 Oblique triangles va 86 GI EE 62 amp Change line type mussevssisnssessersasessdetvane 62 MST 62 GI EE SEE SKS A SES 62 Pan tread end view sunnsjidaveryrsedrsssee 178 Pipe ceea e tees a re E Aa aS 63 Plan view of Stall vass 181 Positiven ss 8 Pour stop 19086 E E ar er error sak 63 SHOP attached 25 SSG 63 QTY REOD ig havaianas TS alen 16 Rail elevation neuian 192 Rampage saa 187 Rectan Oise eet a Ma a tala ess 64 RGCate TER ua TI Index AutoSD Steel Detailing Replace dime nsion inissesssissssreresanegsbssnsensetse 76 Reparere 77 Reset dwe sele Lapeer eatin dian 76 Revision eloudsaupaunessemmnemnn 43 TEVISION SYMDOI 95 05 i eserita ius 43 Right MIAN EES aS 86 Rolled plate length L2pngesdkennennegn 87 Roof frame Sesat ankret 64 Rotate crosshalrsvnan mvninssnssritaninesnee 64 Road be 10 Safety KES 44 Sag TO seddelen K aS 121 SE 10 Seles ea 65 Schedule maker ua 66 Add TOWS 5 essere rer 66 Add tektona nsn ni 66 COOS E TE 66 CS 66 DGC te cass vesitiseaceciavencistisaeesdeathacetateerentereens 66 IDE n na ea a 66 Editie r E ene EN 66 Nera EN 66 SDS
176. RSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 Style ASD_FONT font ROMANS ASDROAM 16 B16 416 8 16 216 B 16 4 16 8 16 64 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ Style ASD BKAP font ROMANS ASDRAM96 1234567890 Style ASD FONT font CVSPRO CVSPRO lo 6 io Ate Bb 2 Bile ab ka y SE gt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ Style ASD_BKAP font CVSPRO CVSPRO 1234567890 DIMENSIONS DIM TEXT Pulldown AutoSD gt Dimension gt Dim Text Toolbar Dimension I Ribbon AutoSD I gt Dimension DIM TEXT is a text command that puts dimensions on without any dimension lines It operates the same as the TEXT command but uses the FT IISS format and is for dimensions only DIMENSIONING Pulldown AutoSD gt Dimension Toolbars Dimension I Dimension II Ribbon AutoSD I gt Dimension AutoSD uses a custom dimension program The dimensions will be placed centered between the extension lines and above the dimension line If the dimension is less than 2 1 2 ata 1 1 scale it will put tick marks and the dimension text will be placed outside of the extension lines on the side that was picked first otherwise it will put arrowheads or ticks per your customer configuration and the text will be centered The dimension height will be the same height as the text and will be plotted 1 8 in height no matter what scale you are drawing to These are pre set when you run SETUP and are saved with the drawing in a dimension style called AUTOSD All dimensions are affected by the MODIFY gt SCALE OF D
177. S The data information saved with each burn depends on the type of burn and can be viewed and edited 210 AutoSD Steel Detailing CNC Chapter 16 Ed H Fe io Xdata for burns is stored with a line or a text entity If you erase that entity you erase the xdata for that burn Most burn xdata is stored with the horizontal length text for that burn Skewed flange skewed web burns contours and cutouts are stored with the line for the edge of the burn The following commands are shortcuts for changing one value of burn data but multiple burns can be changed at one time For a complete look at the burn data use the Edit Data command CHANGE ANGLE If this is for beveling the flange for a groove weld the choices are 30 and 45 If this is for a skewed cut across the flange or web it is the angle normal to that surface For skewed cuts if X or Y is 0 the cut will be full width using the angle If X and Y are not zero the skewed cut will be based on X and Y and the angle will be used only to determine if it is positive or negative In this case the angle could be 1 or 1 For Blocks it is the angle of the beam slope The angle can be positive or negative CHANGE BEAM END This changes which end of the beam the burn is on Available choices are 1 LEFT and 2 RIGHT CHANGE DEPTH Y This will change the vertical depth of the burn CHANGE LENGTH X This will change the horizontal length of the burn This w
178. S 9501 for job 9501 for Superior Steel Services on drive C This keeps your hard drive well organized and enables you to have more than one drawing with the same name by keeping them in separate sub folders for each job When AutoSD is installed a folder called CUSTOMER is created as a sub folder of your AutoSD and has a shop bill drawing file in it called 24x36BOM dwg and 11x17BOM dwg You can edit and use these drawings to get started This is intended as a temporary customer folder that you can use to save drawings in until you create your own Select Configurations The first time you select to detail something a r Detail Variables Shop bill Material list Color list dialog box will pop up for you to select the detail variables configuration shop bill configuration material list and colors The None Unnamed 11x17 nnamed 24x36 default file name for the detail configuration is Import Import Import Import Unnamed The one for shop bill and material V Set selections as defaults list is None The file None is not a CFG configuration but is a selection you can make if you do not want the program to fill out a bill of materials or use a materials list for standard marks The default name for Colors is AutoSD This dialog box allows you to select any combination of detail variables shop bill
179. SD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command 30 AutoSD Steel Detailing Erection Tools Chapter 2 COLUMN w BOLT PATTERN Pulldown AutoSD gt Erection Tools gt Column w Bolt Pattern Toolbar Erection Tools Ribbon AutoSD I gt Erection Tools This program will draw the end view of a column to scale and pa P Include Column size place a line at 45 degrees in the quadrant you select and place the aw shape member size on the top side of the line and up to two reference E neseser 7 Read plate from file ow hole pattern notes on the bottom side of the line The size of this text is Bree controlled by the Text scale factor All of this is on a layer er S called Column It will draw and dimension a bolt pattern with s or without base plate and put this on a layer called Anchors You have the option of drawing just the column just the description line or just the bolt pattern The scale is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command and can be scaled up by entering a magnification factor greater than 1 nn DECK EDGE VIEW Pulldown AutoSD gt Erection Tools gt Deck Edge View Toolbar Erection Tools Ribbon AutoSD I gt Erection Tools
180. SD I gt Utilities bit Bd fore This is for creating drawing and adding text to a schedule Select the File name from the list and then pick the operation MATERIAL LIST Welded X Bridging STEEL DECK FABRICATION LIST New Copy Delete Edit Border Lines Vertical Lines Horizontal lines Header text Schedule text Title text 7 white 6 magenta 6 magenta 2 yellow 7 white 2 yellow Draw Add Rows Add Text Cancel New This will add a new schedule file to the list and open it for editing Copy This will copy an existing schedule file and Schedule Configuration Input is in FT IISS open it for editing Filename Delete This will delete the selected schedule file Te Edit This will open the selected schedule file for unne Heading EE Ap Oi QUAN 0 0600 Cener F O editing o2 DESCRIPTION 20600 center gt O Colors Pick the color swath to change the color O3 MARK paren Genter O Draw This will draw the selected schedule and ie pee a Fr So i es OPENING 10200 Center O O prompt for text to be placed on the first line Os m Heo Add Rows This is for adding rows to an existing o7 et Feo schedule os Lett Hero Ne i ae Os et Mero Add Text This is for adding text to an existing ow w Meo schedule
181. SD used a block called Dimarrow This has been changed You will need to open the Dimension Style dialog box pick the Lines and Arrows tab and set the Ist 2nd and Leader arrowhead to Closed filled You may select any of the arrowhead types from the list but Closed filled will look the same as the old Dimarrow block If you do not change this setting your arrowheads my not be the correct color 26 AutoSD Steel Detailing Erection Tools Chapter 2 W10x22 Chapter 2 Erection Tools ANCHOR BOLT SIDE VIEW Pulldown AutoSD gt Erection Tools gt Anchor Bolt Side View Toolbar Erection Tools EN Ribbon AutoSD I gt Erection Tools This program will draw the side view of any of the six different anchor bolts The insertion point is the underside of the washer and the bolt can be rotated to any angle The scale is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change Er gt Scale of Drawing command uk keel BEAM LINES w DESC Pulldown AutoSD gt Erection Tools gt Beam Lines w Desc Toolbar Erection Tools Ribbon AutoSD I gt Erection Tools This program draws a line with several options You can put a moment symbol a solid filed triangle at the ends You can include the camber with a custom prefix You can include shea
182. SEE SCHEDULE BELOW FOR NUMBER OF NUTS AND WASHERS AT EA END BENT SAG ROD SCHEDULE 1 NUT S AND 1 WASHER S REQ D EACH END DIM C BEVEL MARK MATERIAL x LENGTH DIM DIM B 1R1 196 ROD x 5 3 8 5 0 Bly 4 78 1 1345 SPLICE PLATE Loose TE This program is for drawing a splice plate with a main rear a TG mark to be shipped loose or you can write a DSTV file of coms rer eG the plate You can have any number of rows and columns HT 3 Gs of holes from 1 to 13 It will put the horizontal dimensions z _ and vertical dimensions Pick OK to draw the plate and sj ie end the program Pick Save as DSTV file to create the sorger mal a file and come back to the input dialog box The splice plate will be drawn to the scale set by the AutoSD gt Modify or Fr Me AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command Insertion point at top left corner of plate Main mark 1P1 Are marks RIGHT and LEFT Y N lt N gt Enter Quantity 1 Shop bill information on brace 1P1 Place shop bill text on LINE lt 9 gt Enter SPLICE PLATE Attached Pulldown AutoSD gt Beams gt Plates This program is for drawing a shop welded or shop bolted splice plate at either end of a beam You can have from 1 to 13 rows and columns of holes It will put the horizontal
183. SS A dialog box is used for input showing the top seveckoclp ie Sera and bottom conditions and all of the input from ee ee ee VP ET mi the previous stringer The end conditions are THICKNESS BE ae s E p changed by picking the options under gt x Connection at bottom and Connection at SETBACK nm e2 top Under Select tread style Butterfly is 2 de Lam FE aes for pre cast treads that sit on top of the stringer a MINUS DIM i ER NG EE sm These treads will be supported by flat bars Setback to clip Select e Up tothe Clipfecingout gt Ciptacingou v Header C Support 1 4 TREADS Use the tab key to move from one box to the sacra fons ON Ow Siem werden Next Use shift tab to move up to the Use Linear FT for Closure plate C Include Handrail holes Include Elevation text Include Tail Dims d b This detail vil have a recedin OX p Select read style Standard O Butterfly A B Jc o e le Main mari k O Section mark p Dimension to E em Sloping stringer go to ee Botofpan OK Cance
184. Shop bill Color list o material list set for this drawing r File name None Copy Delete Edit Import Rename Set Current Note Marks and descriptions for standard end connection angles for beams are saved in the customer configuration and do not need to be added to this file If you had an older version that used the material tbl file you can import it with the Import button You can also import individual configurations from other custMAT cfg files 167 Shop Bill Chapter 10 AutoSD Steel Detailing 168 AutoSD Steel Detailing Trusses Chapter 1 I Chapter 11 Trusses Pulldown AutoSD gt Bracing gt Calculate gt Gusset PL Truss NM Toolbar Bracing Ribbon AutoSD II gt Bracing The TRUSS portion of the BRACE program is for calculating the size of the gusset plate the length of weld and clearance dimensions at a panel of a welded truss The top and bottom chords can be either wide flange shapes angles or split tees The truss program is supported by icon menus to select the type of truss top or bottom chord and orientation A full screen view of the type selected is provided for your reference in entering the necessary data Command Pick AutoSD or AutoSD II gt Bracing gt Calculate Gusset PL Truss SELECT OPTION SELECT BRACE ORIENTATION Select Connection Plate Type Fx Cance
185. TE This command allows you to edit an existing gusset plate file L DRAWING GUSSET PLATES In order to draw a gusset plate you must first calculate one and save the output in a file See CALCULATION OF GUSSET PLATES When you select DRAW GUSSET PLATE from the pulldown menu under AutoSD gt Bracing you will be asked for the folder and file name of the gusset plate you wish to draw After giving a valid name you are prompted for the work point location and the quadrant the gusset plate is in There are 4 quadrants Upper right upper left lower left and lower right The quadrant you pick does not have to be the same as the one chosen in the calculation program unless the connection is not symmetrical about the work line Once a name is accepted the program starts drawing the plate After the outline of the plate is drawn and the holes are put in the plate you are prompted for the location of the horizontal dimensions of the plate These dimensions are from the work point to the first hole for the brace If the plate has any holes on the horizontal side for a connection of the plate to a beam you are then prompted for the location of the dimensions for these holes This same procedure is repeated for the dimensions on the vertical side and for the dimensions on the slope Command Pick AutoSD or AutoSD II gt Bracing gt Draw gt Gusset Plate Customer folder lt D ACAD gt C SSS 95 01 Connection number 1 Reading file Done
186. TRIC SCALE HEIGHT PLOT SCALE 1 5000 15875 5000 0 1 4000 12700 4000 0 ARCHITECT HEIGHT PLOT SCALE 24 192 0 16 128 0 DECIMAL SCALE HEIGHT PLOT SCALE 1 2000 3000 24000 0 1 1000 1500 12000 0 13 Introduction Chapter 1 AutoSD Steel Detailing 1 8 1 5 32 1 3 16 1 1 4 1 5 16 1 3 8 1 1 2 1 5 8 1 3 4 1 1 1 SCALE 1 1 4 1 1 1 2 1 SEE FULL 12 96 0 1 500 750 6000 0 1 2500 7938 2500 0 9 6 76 8 1 250 375 3000 0 1 1250 3969 1250 0 8 64 0 1 200 300 2400 0 1 500 1588 500 0 6 48 0 1 100 150 1200 0 1 300 952 300 0 4 8 38 4 1 80 120 960 0 1 200 635 200 0 4 32 0 1 60 90 720 0 1 100 318 100 0 3 24 0 1 40 60 480 0 1 75 238 75 0 2 4 19 2 1 30 45 360 0 1 50 159 50 0 2 16 0 1 20 30 240 0 1 20 64 20 0 1 5 12 0 1 10 15 120 0 1 12 38 12 0 ARCHITECT DECIMAL METRIC HEIGHT PLOT SCALE SCALE HEIGHT PLOT SCALE SCALE HEIGHT PLOT SCALE 1 9 6 1 1 15 12 0 1 10 32 10 0 1 8 0 FULL 0 125 1 0 1 5 16 5 0 BS 4 0 FULL 3 1 0 0 125 1 0 You can also change the height of the text and dimensions by selecting AutoSD gt Format or AutoSD I gt Utilities gt Text size and the size you want to use 5 is normal 1 8 1 is half size and 10 is double size FOLDERS Folders must exist before you can put something in them It is a good idea that you use separate folders for each job to store your drawings This will keep your hard drive well organized When you start a new drawing at
187. The plate length may be drawn to scale Insertion is aided with the help of an outline box Press the minus key on the numeric keypad while the outline box is displayed to reduce the length the picture Fszere ns will be drawn The program will automatically calculate the number of ed holes that will fit a given length The default for the first space is the same as the last space OBJECT INFO Pulldown AutoSD gt Tools gt Object Info Ribbon AutoSD I gt Utilities This is similar to AutoCAD s LIST command If you pick a line you will be given the length bevel angle of the bevel horizontal vector vertical vector and layer The AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command will affect the lengths returned by this command 61 Draw Chapter 3 AutoSD Steel Detailing amp OFFSET Pulldown AutoSD gt Modify gt Offset Toolbar Modify Ribbon AutoSD I gt Modify This command works the same as AutoCAD s except that the distance is controlled by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command By changing the scale of the drawing with the SCALE OF DRAWING command you can use OFFSET to draw to different scales This offset command uses the FT IISS format of input OFFSET w Select Icon has yellow background Pulldown AutoSD gt Modify gt Offset w select
188. The second line list the shape designations and their aliases Example shape aliases The third line list the shapes and their corresponding data file Example shape data file The following list the aliases for each shape type C Channels with sloped and parallel flanges S Wide flange with sloped flanges 233 Support Files Appendix B AutoSD Steel Detailing W Wide flange with parallel flanges ST Split Wide flange with sloped flanges WT Split Wide flange with parallel flanges TS Hollow square or rectangular sections PS Hollow round sections Lo Angles equal and unequal legs CF Cold formed light gage Z and C shapes TB Turnbuckle CL Clevis SN Sleeve nut The last section of the asd_data cfg file labeled SHAPES as shown below is a list of aliases and corresponding shapes for each country In each list the first item is the alias and the second item is a list of all shapes associated with that alias Example for US W HP M S W CB where W is the alias and HP M S W CB is the list of shapes that will be displayed in pop down boxes CB is for castellated beams SHAPES ses on ET STEN SE FT JE CT GSE PENE ITST WTS NESS Fy PS HSS PS L L listcan W HP M S W WWE WRE CE CE WT WWT MT ST WT C hernet FS FTSE TPST CSS PP CE EI Listuk W J UB UC UBP 501 BT CT GE C TS
189. Toolbar Erection Tools Ribbon AutoSD I gt Erection Tools This program is similar to Block Wall Section above but combines brick and block into one program to draw a cross section of the wall You input the total thickness of the wall The scale is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command BRICK WALL SECTION Pulldown AutoSD gt Erection Tools gt Brick Wall Section Toolbar Erection Tools Ribbon AutoSD I gt Erection Tools This program draws the cross section of a brick wall The first point you pick will be a corner point of the first whole brick The second point may be above or below the first point The third point picked determines if the face location picked was the right or left side The brick are drawn 3 3 4 95 25mm wide with a 3 8 9 5mm mortar joint 3 brick equals one block in height The scale is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command BLOCK WALL PLAN VIEW Pulldown AutoSD gt Erection Tools gt Block Wall Plan View Toolbar Erection Tools Ribbon AutoSD I gt Erection Tools This program draws the plan view of a 4 6 8 or 12 100mm 150mm 200m and 310mm block block wall The first point you pick will be a corner point of the first whole block at one end of the wall The second point will be the corner point at the other end of the block wall The third point determines which side of the line bet
190. Width the type of splice required Splices are for C HP M MC S W shapes only You can splice any size column from 4 to 44 This is the icon menu for splices Column connection Input is in FT 1ISS Column file C ATSD Customer 85 008 ew p Elevations Connections ani alee N vn DAGE com Holes To Open 25 0000 2 Merge file 20 0000 Select member Save 15 0000 Add 10 000 r Face Ref mark 1681 Chg Move down A B 0 c Oo D O Column size W 18x35 Del Flange gage 0 0400 Add Copy Delete Web gage 0 0508 E 2 HOLES HOLES ARE CENTERED ON FLANGE AND WEB MORE THAN ONE GAGE CAN BE USED FOR WEB ELEVATION oe FROM DOWN ii EL UP o fFE FTP FROM EL UP MORE THAN ONE GAGE CAN BE USED FOR FLG HOLES WHEN DETAILING BEAMS CONN TO NS SHOULD BE INPUT AS FACE B AND FROM EL DOWN CONN TO FS SHOULD BE INPUT AS FACE D FROM EL DOWN AND FROM EL UP ARE ENTERED r UST OF DIMENSIONS SEPARATED BY COMMAS EX 03 03 03 03 OK Cancel Import Gusset Gage Bolt Dia 0 0504 0 0012 Calculate load Top of Cap PLEL Bottom of Base PLEL From Elev Down 0 0408 0 03 0 03 0 03 From Elev
191. a Inc SteelCAD is a registered service mark of Steelcad Consulting ii AutoSD Steel Detailing There are some drawings in the C autosd Bonus folder that you may find useful The drawing sizes are 24 x 36 and the scale is 1 1 0 CHARTS DWG This drawing has bolt length and bolt values minimum edge distance usual gages for angles minimum weld sizes pipe dimensions and C and MC dimensions FRACTION DWG This drawing is used to convert decimals of an inch or of a foot to fractions KEYBOARD CARD DWG This is a drawing of a keyboard layout showing the location of the custom characters WSHAPES DWG This is a drawing that shows the dimensions for W4 W44 and minimum and maximum rows 13TH EDITION BOLT VALUES DWG This drawing list ASD and LRFD bolt values from AISC 13th edition These drawings are in the C autosd menus folder The drawing sizes are 24 x 36 and the scale is 1 1 0 PULLDOWN MENU DIAGRAM DWG This drawing shows the layout of all commands in the AutoSD pulldown menu RIBBON MENU DIAGRAM DWG This drawing shows the layout of all commands in the AutoSD ribbon menu Minimum screen resolution for displaying dialog boxes is 1280 x 960 iii AutoSD Steel Detailing QUICK START Read this first STEP 1 Installing the program If you are installing AutoSD for AutoCAD LT you will need to install one of the Lisp Enablers Go to www autosd com support htm for a link to find where to purc
192. a sub piece with a mark attached to a leader This command does everything that the command Change CNC Layer does After the mark is placed you are asked for the quantity member size cut length and grade Once these items are entered you select all entities that are associated with this mark A layer is created with the same name as the sub mark prefixed with CNC and all entities selected are moved to this layer The only entities that must be on the new layer are the holes text and lines with the CNC data In the example shown to the left the sub mark aa contains the CNC data for the quantities length size and grade The detail is on layer CNC aa The holes in aa do not have any CNC data stored in them Tips Use AutoSD gt CNC gt Graphically Check DSTV file to redraw the piece from the DSTV file to see if it looks right This is the file the piece will be fabricated from so it has to be right and you will need to give the file to the fabricator The file name is usually the same as the piece mark and will be in the same folder as the drawing file If the piece does not look right after drawing it with Graphically Check DSTV it may be easier to fix the file using AutoSD gt CNC gt Edit DSTV file 221 CNC Chapter 16 AutoSD Steel Detailing To fix the detail that was drawn using Graphically Check DSTV all changes must be to scale The X and Y values noting the location of holes is for visu
193. ackets May be bolted of welded for parapet ladders only 6 Bracket Spacing There are four ways to enter the spacing 1 Enter 0 to have only the one bracket at the top 2 Enter a single dimension greater than 0 example 6 06 to add equally spaced brackets between the bottom and top brackets where the spacing is less than or equal to your input 3 Enter multiple dimensions separated by a comma example 4 5 4 06 to add brackets spaced at 4 0 5 0 and the remaining space divided equally where the spacing is less than or equal to the last dimension of your input 4 Enter multiple dimensions separated by a comma with the last dimension 0 example 4 5 4 06 0 to add brackets spaced at 4 0 5 0 and 4 6 with no additional brackets except for the one at the top After picking OK and entering the main mark and quantity the ladder is drawn and billed out TOP HOOP SECT B Pulldown AutoSD gt Ladders gt Top Hoop Sect B gt Side Step Pulldown AutoSD gt Ladders gt Top Hoop Sect B gt Step Through Top hoops can be drawn separately if needed MID HOOP SECT C Pulldown AutoSD gt Ladders gt Mid Hoop Sect C Mid hoops can be drawn separately if needed BOT HOOP SECT D Pulldown AutoSD gt Ladders gt Bot Hoop Sect D Bottom hoops can be drawn separately if needed SECTIONS Pulldown AutoSD gt Ladders gt Sections Various sections can be added if needed SECURITY GUARD Pulldown Au
194. ae enedes ERE ii 9 10 11 13 25 Section ALTOWS scsi seseaetessaeasdisdecededaveracdesnceeeenseees 42 Section label ae sta Ge 42 Sectional properties 87 Select dim to add sosesccsscccdacsseasadeveestcccesseeaenaeess 89 SentinelPro Drivers for Hardware Lock 223 Separate spacing of holes with commas 174 Setting Up ee e AS A A AA 11 Shaft op niN giare snena sys 44 Shape Database is sccssaisecsccetsseaciasvinsdccteanseea ness 233 Shape ss 65 Skewed pl top view see 142 SIOU Sze SEE an SENE SES AEE ETa 56 SPICE plates ie iie n ra ss 122 attached ned E E 122 loosen nna aa E a N DEERE 122 SPS us 143 Stair Input Forms eesnrrorrrrverrrrnnrrrrnsenrrnsennre 249 Stair Pisa 44 Stair lues 187 Standard Clips ending 20 Standard MteXxt iisisti senesini 67 Standard shear bars eernrnrorrrvrrvrrvrrrrrvernrreeer 19 Starting a NEW drawing erenvrrrnrnrvrnrvrerenvnrnrner 11 Starting a New drawing rererrrrnrrrrrvrrnrrnsrnnre 229 StECICAD phavsaseiscabvashestianbesnsenes ii 10 11 13 25 Stiffener Plate attached rrrnrrnrrronnrrrrrnnn 116 Stiffener Plate loose rrrrrrrrorronrnnrrrrerrrernnnr 117 Stringer bracing uugpeat ape nlesasadaces ated ewes 181 SUBMARKTBL gangisdareseitseiyrajenet 10 Support file search path ssrorornrrrornrrrernrnvernr iv Fags EEE EE ER 45 Tail EE 67 Tal iT ss 67 Text descriptions a E 45 Text height and plot scales rrrrrornrnnrrrnrrnr 13 TELE SUINES mane ide 67
195. al reference only The text is not used by the DSTV editor to locate the holes so changing the X or Y value will have no effect The size and location of each hole must be to scale There is no CNC data associated with plates The DSTV file information for plates is based on the scale of the plate It must be to the scale of the drawing not enlarged and must be made with a closed polyline All holes in the plate must be to scale Round holes may be made with circles or donuts Slots and other cutouts must be made with a closed polyline The Member size quantity length and grade are stored in the main mark If you make a change to one of these on the detail you will also need to make the same change in the main mark If you have two columns where the only difference is the orientation requiring two different marks an easy way of creating the second DSTV file is to copy the first one rename it the mark of the second column and use the AutoSD gt CNC gt Edit DSTV file to change the mark in the file 222 AutoSD Steel Detailing Installation Appendix A Appendix A Installation This section provides the information required to install AutoSD Steel Detailing on your computer system Your AutoSD software comes to you with the following items I AutoSD Steel Detailing User Manual I Keyboard text location card 1 CD 1 Hardware lock SentinelPro Drivers for Hardware Lock The drivers for the hardware lock ar
196. allel Brace Tower ssec 137 Bevel Fl ngesu stekt 101 Calculate Gusset Plate Truss eee 137 Contents AutoSD Steel Detailing Chapter 9 Columns saunnuvneasdanguetim 139 EXTENDING WEIGHT 165 BASE PL EDGE VIEW 141 MATERIAL LIST Linnssanjam steds 167 CAP PEL EDGE VIEW raslede 141 Chapter 11 TrissesLanssantsspedeetk 169 BASE CAP PLAN ygsrsnnsepaetsgketvitnemet 141 Chapter 12 Stairs susssnnsesmtversseter 171 VIEW BASE CAP FILE 142 CREATING PAN TREADS with the Tread SKEWED PL TOP VIEW eces 142 Bildet ae 176 SPEICBS un salen eee 143 DIM PAN SUPPORTS ossee 177 EDIT COLUMN FILE 143 BOLTED TREAD END DETAIL 178 NEW RES ERE SESE RES E ES 144 PAN TREAD END VIEW oee 178 OPED eek ede eee eee eda 144 STAIR TREAD RISER CALCULATOR 179 NE 144 STAIR ELEVATION o oo 179 SAVE AS iris snyd pons senderen 144 PLAN VIEW OF STAIR 181 MERGE FILE ss sale iis 144 STRINGER BRACING 181 COMMA SIZE ae 144 Header Bean avsa 182 Elevations bor ss aa 144 Landing Deekmesuussteddjasfalkietd 183 Connections boxX rrrennrnrenvvnrerrvererrvnerrsseer 144 Landing Prame cacieche ssscaytees see ttesashesoandegieass 184 IMPORT GUSSET MG seeren renerne 145 Landing Grating iisscssecsiesccees secdeass cesccceenteae 184 CONNECTIONS Geer 146 Landing Pabussesse ee 184 CUP Angle nianna 146 Chapter 13 Rails sansene 187 2 GIT ANP enneint 146 RAMP or STAIR RAIL 187 SE T konptssi noone tisis 146 WALT RAM Dn iege tress eits 190 4
197. alues d bf tf tw k and T If the beam is sloped enter the angle from horizontal The length of the plate value B will be affected by value 6 under x Shop bolted Clips and Stiff in your Beam Detail configuration The width of the plate value A will be affected by the value for Round Stiffener Plate width to nearest in your Beam configuration Pick OK to draw the plate and end the program Pick Save as DSTV file to create the file and come back to the input dialog box 0 0105 14 ge t I 1 0305 1 0308 Le BESES rIronmoo m gt om G F The stiffener plate will be drawn to the scale set by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command SKEWED PLATE top internal The skewed plate program is for drawing the top view of a skewed plate on the web of a beam The beam must be placed horizontally on the sheet The plate can be on either side in any direction including 90 to beam input angle as 0 and you can have any number of holes Also you get to locate where the horizontal vertical and slope dimensions are to be placed The skewed plate will be drawn to the scale set by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command Command Pick AutoSD gt Beams gt Plates or AutoSD II gt Beams gt SKEWED PL TOP INTERNAL Work point location Pick a point
198. am is for creating and placing Root r Supplements weld symbols This command uses a ase Al Around dialog box to select the weld symbols i AR The weld types include Fillet Bevel ek Ne Bevel Fillet Bevel Flare J J Fillet hst ae 1D Join w Backing groove Square Square Fillet U V V Butt voe2 Staggered OYes No w Insert V Flare V T w Insert Plug or C ee Blocks Symbol Only Leader Only Clear Save Restore Settings Slot Seam Spot or Projection Stud and Surfacing Select a weld type by clicking eh ee on the down arrow next to Type then click on the weld type desired The weld symbol displayed in the window will be updated automatically The properties available for each weld type vary For example Back Consumable Insert and Joint w Backing are only available when one of the grove welds is selected Staggered is only available when Fillet is selected for arrow side and other side You can place a complete weld symbol or add a leader all around symbol field weld symbol or tail note to an existing weld symbol 68 AutoSD Steel Detailing Draw Chapter 3 BLOCKS Pulldown AutoSD gt Draw gt Weld Blocks EEE Toolbar Miscellaneous z Is Gr Ribbon AutoSD I gt Weld i sg This allows you to place
199. and then use the offset command to lay out the purlin spacing in this view and project those spaces to the plan view and elevation of hip rafter view The example above shows a spacing of 5 0 starting at the eave This will allow you to develop the locations of the connections on the rafter 206 AutoSD Steel Detailing CNC Chapter 16 Chapter 16 CNC Data Pulldown AutoSD gt CNC Toolbar CNC Ribbon AutoSD II gt CNC Change Burn Data Change Hole Data 2 Change Layer Check Data 2 Edit Data Edit DSTV file 27 Gather marks amp write DSTV file for All drawings amp write DSTV file for Current drawing B gt write DSTV file for Selected Object Write DSTV file for Clps Tees in All drawings EH write DSTV file for Clips Tees in Current drawing f write DSTV file for Clips Tees for Selected marks E write DSTV file for Base Cap Plates RR write DSTV file for Plates drawn dir Write DXF file for Base Cap Plate IF Write DXF file for Gusset Plate Graphically Check DSTV file SB Sub mark CNC data will be attached as extended data xdata to holes when you detail a beam girt column brace or stair stringer and burn information will be attached to blocks and skewed ends when you detail a beam girt or stair stringer if you have configured your customer to save CNC data Xdata for one member is separated from another member by using different layers layer w
200. anges to any variables to take affect the changes must be saved to this dimension style Command dimstyle dimension style AUTOSD Dimension Style Edit Save Restore STatus Variables Apply lt Restore gt S Name for new dimension style AUTOSD That name is already in use redefine it lt N gt Y Arrowheads AutoSD uses arrowheads that match AutoCAD s but you can also use your own custom arrowhead When creating the arrowhead draw it pointing to the right with the insertion point at the right end The color for dimension arrowheads must be 5 blue If you want to use it for leaders you will need to save it with a different file name and make the color 10 The actual color used is set in the Customer configuration dialog box for colors 94 AutoSD Steel Detailing Dimensioning Chapter 6 ARC ARC CONT KY DIMENSION LINE or SINGLE LINEAR DIMENSION Pulldown AutoSD gt Dimension gt Dim Line Toolbars Dimension II Ribbon AutoSD I gt Dimension This is for dimensions at any angle horizontal and vertical with no extension lines CONTINUE DIMENSION Pulldown AutoSD gt Dimension gt Continuous Toolbars Dimension I Ribbon AutoSD I gt Dimension This command is for continuing dimensions in a straight line The dimensions will continue from the last point of the previous dimension in the same direction Once picked simply press the enter key to keep continuing ARC DIMENSION Pulldown AutoSD
201. apter 13 F Command Chapter 13 Rails All programs in this chapter are under the AutoSD gt Rails pulldown menu Stairs Rails Toolbar and AutoSD II gt Rails ribbon menu RAMP or STAIR RAIL With the Ramp Stair Rail program you can draw single or multiple line ramp or stair rails with or without pickets with or without grab rail using angle pipe or tube for the rail For metal stringers the post can be bolted or welded For ramps or concrete steps the post can be embedded or welded to an embed plate in the step or bolted using a base plate for ramp rails Enter 0 for dimension A for the welded or bolted option These rails are drawn to scale to the actual bevel and sloping in either direction The program is supported by icon menus and dialog boxes that guide you through the input Pick AutoSD or AutoSD II gt Rails gt Ramp or Stair Rail Walkway Type Concrete steps amp Metal stinger O Ramp A dialog box is used to get your input Select the options you want and enter the dimensions that are Rail Slopes UP Rail materialis Dimension Bisio amp tothe Right Angle G Top Load O tothe Left required Some dimensions can be entered is 1718 Use pickets 2 T In 2 id gt mal BPACINI automatically from stair stringer input that has been saved
202. ar Erection Tools Ribbon AutoSD I gt Erection Tools Column Base PL WAB x FIN FL EL Anchor diameter 0012 This program will detail the plan view and section view of a column base plate with anchor bolts showing the projection grout bolt length hook length bolt diameter hole pattern and plate size This detail is used on anchor bolt setting plans You can use any of the six anchor types shown in Anchor Bolt Side View on page 27 plus an expansion anchor and an epoxy anchor Hook length 04 Read plate from file Vertical Length as Length O Embedment amp Actual Number of nuts attop OR 02 i OK Cancel pe o fon H 712 1 i 72 P c pm pt Rix15x1 3 por n pos 6l 6 fr one TOC EL 4 6 The dimensions for the plate are entered in the dialog box to the left where they can be read from the file for other details The scale is affected by the Auto
203. are in and begin a new drawing The name of the drawing will be 24x36BOM and is saved in the folder for this customer 24x36BOM is for a 24 x 36 size shop bill drawing A different drawing will need to be created for each paper size but one paper size can be used for any scale as long as the original drawing is created at a scale of 1 1 0 You can use any legal drawing name allowing you to have more than one shop bill drawing in a single folder You can also create an erection sheet and insert it the same as you would a shop bill sheet Once inside the drawing editor select SETUP then Archtect 1 1 and D 24x36 Use 1 12 scale for metric units Create a new layer called SHOPBILL and set it as current LAYER Pick New Change layer name to SHOPBILL Pick Current Pick OK Command Now it is up to you to draw the shop bill using AutoCAD s drawing commands The only restriction is the drawing must be setup to a scale of 1 1 or 1 12 for metric Put the headings at the top of the shop bill and numbers to the left of each line for easy reference If you do not want the line numbers to plot put them outside the right border line Create a new layer called SEQUENCE and set it as current LAYER Pick New 152 AutoSD Steel Detailing Shop Bill Chapter 10 Change layer name to SEQUENCE Pick Current Pick OK Now draw the sequence portion of the shop bill You can have as many as six columns See page 152 for an exa
204. as 48 3 1 2 would be entered as 0308 1 2 would be entered as 08 This manual uses the FT IISS format in the examples Introduction Chapter 1 AutoSD Steel Detailing POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE Many programs provide you with slide drawings or images in dialog boxes for user input Positive input will go in the direction shown in the slide negative input will go in the opposite direction from that shown in the slide FT II SS You will see this in most of the input prompts when you set up a drawing for CVSpro Itis the standard method of entering dimensions for CV Spro If the current dimensional unit format is set to architectural the FT II SS format will be used Where FT feet II inches SS sixteenths Using the FT II SS format 1 3 1 2 would be entered as 1 3 12 6 10 15 16 would be entered as 6 10 15 4 0 would be entered as 4 5 1 2 would be entered as 5 12 3 would be entered as 3 1 2 would be entered as 12 Feet are entered followed by a minus sign 2 0 2 Inches are entered as a whole number 3 3 Fractions are entered preceded by an asterisk 127 22 Fractions are as follows 1 16 5 16 5 9 16 9 13 16 13 1 8 18 3 8 38 5 8 58 7 8 78 3 16 3 7 16 7 11 16 11 15 16 15 1 4 14 1 2 12 3 4 34 ENTER Most AutoCAD commands will repeat themselves when you press the ENTER key This saves time by not having to go back to the menu to pick the command each time when yo
205. ation DOOR FRAME Pulldown AutoSD gt Detail gt Door Frame Toolbar Detail Ribbon AutoSD II gt Detail This program will detail door frames made out of tubes channels or bent plate Anchor types are flat bar holes in flanges for channel or bent plate or none If you use a bar anchor it can be straight or bent Section of jamb showing anchor can be cut and drawn or cut and not drawn This is useful if you have other door frames on the same sheet with the same section detail The clip at the bottom of the jamb is optional Frames can be detailed as one piece or knocked down as two separate pieces A reference not can be added that will be placed under the main mark 52 AutoSD Steel Detailing Draw Chapter 3 Door Frame Input is in FT ISS 7 5 Pa 3 0 24 r Frame type Jamb mark ma Height 6 09 ANCHOR Channel Plate O Tube S 3 Select member Head mark mb Width g q 1 rer oe Gr j Select poe i ig i SECT Clip required 3 lt Bent Pian eem Length apn B 0208 Je 0005 Mark fea Gage GA T it SPACING c 0208 cmu 08 Gosa Landa 4 h Tr Nominal AA D 7
206. attached 0 0 ee 116 BENE Mi EN 95 STIFFENER PLATE loose M1 W G seerne 117 CROSSING 2 96 SKEWED PLATE top internal 0 0 117 WORD WRAP tissestshcctisichesistesedans easatavesets 96 TOP VIEW skewed connection 118 QUICK lerende 97 MOMENT END PLATE M G secure 119 MUETE LINE ae 97 GRIS Ja 120 WIBUDDIG ve 97 SAG ROD PA 121 Dyna Gecen e a nt 98 SPLICE PLATE Loose rernrovorvrrvevvrnvervnee 122 W REVISION cnin nna n a RSh 98 SPLICE PLATE Attached c cccccccceeee 122 Chapter 7 Bensin 99 Chapter 8 Bracing ku Gsekaovrdadksete 125 Cuts Copes and Blocks W W W G seveeseereerrrereerenne 99 CALCULATION OF GUSSET PLATES 125 Flange Gage Leader Note enrnnrrrrnnrrrennrrrrene 99 Dimension HA vunandinviadhamssisryeskedsser 126 Property symbol uanenj rassssgolnte 99 PRINTING FILE une 128 END CONNECTIONS Quang 100 VIEWING FILE danes nen 129 Detail Beam vaere 100 HSTGUS FILES Lee 130 Support Member esornnororonnrnnnennnvenvnsnsernee 100 EDIT GUSSET PLATE Asian Samiske 130 Support is a Hip or Valley rafter 100 DRAWING GUSSET PLATES seeen 130 Slope in degrees from horizontal 100 DRAWING BRACES 131 Input skewed angle of end connection 101 Welded Br ten EAS 135 Connection Type c ciscccssisustacevesicceeasscsansedes 101 HSS mn Fr neskarbeststaaaksetset 136 Import column file data eee 101 Rod Brae Jeep 136 Clip Connections cronni 101 Par
207. ault drawing area ARCHITECTURAL and DECIMAL PAPER SIZE A 8 5x11 B 11x17 C 22x34 LIMITS 7 5 x10 9 8 x16 20 8 x32 Paper size D 24x 36 Enter dimensions in real world sizes Margins Top 0 600 Left Right Bottom Offset border inside margins ol 5 ol e alle oo ro od Arrow size oS nm eal Dimension text height p as N n Dimension line increment o oa D r on Extension line extension oS oa oO oO oo Extension line offset Size of center mark lines 0 0625 Dimension line gap 0 0625 Default text height 0 1250 12 0000 Global linetype scale Cancel METRIC PAPER SIZE LIMITS A 8 5x11 190x253 B 11x17 253x402 C 18x24 427x560 12 AutoSD Steel Detailing Introduction Chapter 1 C 18x24 16 8 x22 C 22x34 529x814 D 24x36 22 8 x34 D 24x36 580x864 D 30x42 28 8 x40 D 30x42 732x1016 E 36x48 34 8 x46 E 36x48 884x1169 A4 210x297 190x247 A3 297x420 267x370 A2 420x594 390x544 A1 594x841 594x791 A0 841x1189 801x1139 A4 240x330 210x300 A3 330x450 300x420 A2 450x625 410x595 A1 625x880 585x850 A0 880x1230 440x1200 OTHER You enter the paper size and margins Some dimension variables are stored in the Setup dialog box If you want to change the arrow size dimension text height dimension line increment extension line extension extension line offset size of center marks
208. ault is to continue Pressing Enter moves the X to the insertion point of the text in the first column and you are prompted for the text If you choose to Skip the X will move down one line and the options to Continue Skip or eXit will be repeated Entering X at this prompt will exit the program STANDARD MTEXT Pulldown AutoSD gt Draw gt Standard Mtext Toolbars Miscellaneous Ribbon AutoSD I gt Miscellaneous This program will open a dialog box and give you three text sizes to choose from 1 8 3 16 and 1 4 Pick the button for the size you want and pick OK Select two corners and a dialog box for the mtext opens You enter your text here as well as set the color TAIL Pulldown AutoSD gt Draw gt Tail to Here Ribbon AutoSD I gt Miscellaneous This places a block to indicate where dimensions are referenced from You set which block you want to use in the customer configuration and the text that you want to use if you select the block with text The block can be a target that looks like the picture to the left or text on an arrow TAIL or TAIL DIM Pulldown AutoSD gt Dimension gt Tail Dim Toolbars Dimension I Ribbon AutoSD I gt Dimension This Places a tail or stub dimension with a line under it If you use Select Dim to Add under AutoSD gt Calculator the default dimension will be the result Input is in the FT IISS format TEXT STRINGS Pulldown AutoSD gt Draw gt Text Str
209. b pieces is for one assembly only or not You have the option of extending the total weight of all assemblies or for just one Entering a 0 zero for UNIT QUANTITY SHAPE I D Number of SEQUENCES GRADE or WEIGHT will cause those prompts to be deactivated and those categories will not be used Entering a number other than zero will make them active Entering a 0 zero for the location of inches will cause the feet and inches to be written as one number thus 2 8 2 155 Shop Bill Chapter 10 AutoSD Steel Detailing Sequence Properties If you are going to use sequences you can have up to 6 Select the number of sequences under Total Number Under Number or Letter fill in the sequence designation you want to use in the prompt when asked for the quantity Give the dimensions for the location for each sequence in place of the defaults shown or use the PICK feature to select the location of each column The configuration can be made at any scale but the shop bill must be drawn to a scale of 1 1 for ARCH or 1 12 for METRIC Title block configuration This will configure a block made of attributes for filling out the title block quickly and easily The Title Block Configuration program allows you to add an attribute for each item that you want to include in the title block information The Move up and Move down buttons will move the prompt in the prompt list but has no effect on where it is placed in the drawin
210. bers will be exaggerated Flanges will be drawn a minimum of 3 4 and webs a minimum of 1 2 CONVERTING OTHER DRAWINGS TO AutoSD If you have a drawing that was created by software other than AutoSD and want to edit the drawing with AutoSD certain variables need to be set in the drawing for AutoSD to work correctly Set up a new drawing using AutoSD and insert your old drawing as a block into it and explode the inserted block If you have a DWG file created by SDS 2 Steel CAD CVSpro or Xsteel that was imported into AutoCAD from a dxf file you can convert it to AutoSD by opening the drawing and running AutoSD gt Format or AutoSD I gt Utilities gt Setup Select the drawing scale and paper size you want to use and select CVSpro SDS 2 SteelCAD or Xsteel and pick OK If you have a DXF file created by SDS 2 CVSpro or Xsteel you can import it into AutoSD If you have an older version of SDS 2 that drew holes with an open circle in the AutoCAD DXF 10 AutoSD Steel Detailing Introduction Chapter 1 SDS OUT i file then you must select the color used for the holes and it must be a different color from all other lines otherwise select Ignore for the color choices Start AutoCAD and start a new drawing using the autosd dwt template Do NOT run setup From the AutoSD gt Tools or AutoSD I gt Utilities menu select DXF into AutoSD and then select Single or Multiple SDS 2 DXF file CVSpro DXF file or Xsteel DXF file Mul
211. bolt to extend past the face of the nut Round up or down Rounds the length of the bolt to the nearest 1 4 increment but may make the actual stick through 1 16 less Variance for actual stick through is 1 16 1 8 Round UP only Rounds the length of the bolt UP to the nearest 1 4 increment Variance for actual stick through is 0 3 16 Bolts Input is in FT IISS Short slots Putting a check in any of these boxes SE lesen will draw a short slot in the connection material E Xdata for cnc will be saved in the piece mark aden ropese p Show short slots in internal clips on beam web ves Siae otshearpts PE Show short slots in wing plates on beam web oh ae og ee Show short slots in split Tee on beam web EE Brace GussetPL s Show short slots in clips angle on columns IZI Sar ian ain rl Toe of bee vat ee Show short slots in wing plates on columns rss Ser lt gt Show short slots in split Tee on columns NET EJ em Shop bolted clips w slots Putting a check in Slot in beam will draw a slot in addition to the bolt head The slot will contain the xdata for cnc if cnc data is being saved The default for X in number of rows to start using X SPA Y Z is 8 Set this value to a very large number if you do not
212. break line at one end The complete plan will look just like the partial except both ends will be square and will not have a break line at one end The insertion point is one end of one stringer The stair plan can be drawn in any direction and the scale is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command Location of end point of one stringer Pick first point 44 AutoSD Steel Detailing Erection Tools Chapter 2 Stair direction Pick second point or enter an angle Side for other stringer Pick a point FT IISS Width of stair 3 FT IISS Width of tread 1 Number of treads 12 Direction of Stair Down Up D Insertion point Insertion point for direction indicator Rotation 1 found Rotate indicator p Text TAGS Toolbar Miscellaneous OD a 1 1 Ribbon AutoSD I gt Miscellaneous This program is for inserting a circle diamond hexagon square or triangle with an attribute in the center These 4 symbols are tags and are provided for your use They are similar to the revision symbol The attribute name for each is listed below Symbol Attribute Name Symbol Attribute Name CIRCLE ASD CIR DIAMOND ASD DMND SQUARE ASD SQR HEXAGON ASD HEX TEXT DESCRIPTION Pulldown AutoSD gt Erection Tools gt Text Description Ribbon AutoSD I gt Erection Tools This program is for placing a t
213. c material list CUSTVAR CFG C autosd Detail variable configuration CUSTVARM CFG C autosd Metric detail variable configuration DATLIST CFG C autosd Stores values for dialog boxes DATLISTM CFG C autosd Stores metric values for dialog boxes SCHMAKER CFG C autosd Schedule maker SDS2CLR CFG C autosd SDS 2 colors SETUP12 CFG C autosd Custom setup settings WELD CFG C autosd welds Weld symbol configuration Column files for the column program Shop bill extracted for E J E material manager Data files for shapes and to store defaults for some programs AutoCAD drawing Omissions from the imp or kss file when extracting bill of material Gusset plate files for the bracing program Shop bill extracted for E J E material manager Shop bill extracted to the kiss format for Fabtrol BMCONN LST Used to store beam end connections used in beam to beam connection matching Moment end plate files for a beam connection DSTV format cnc file Extension can be changed in customer configurations List of cap and base plates File name is BASECAP PL Shop bill extracted for viewing and printing using the Extract program Introduction Chapter 1 AutoSD Steel Detailing sld Slides in the SLIDES folder of the drawings stored in the BLOCKS folder tbl SUBMARK TBL For sub marks that carry through If a problem occurs after editing a customer configuration file you can delete the associated cfg file and rename the bak for that configu
214. ccsteles ts aeesstenecdiisreeste de 49 SCHEDULE MAKER ererronrnorrrrnrverrevresveesse 66 BOLD CIRCE passende 49 STANDARD MTEXT uussgssogasvstetrihe 67 BOLT EXPANSION rornrorennvenreerervrnsvenvnennvrenn 50 TAM arts 67 BOLEARD Queenie fade 51 TAIL or TAIL DIM 3 go cfiedatacesdisyhessaetesssqweatos te 67 BOLT Y NEW use ENE 51 TEXLSTRINGS se 67 CLEVIS Luse 51 TURNBUCKEB satse 68 CUP se 51 WEB HOLE sr ese renees ji 68 CRANE RAI ggeinareesseteseisridenenrennsntgetneedetn 52 WELD SYMBOLS isis seere renerne renen 68 DISTANCES SG 52 BLOCKS ua ene eee eee 69 ION 52 SYMBOL ONLY ae 69 DOOR FRAME js cscs jsceitisstsestelesseatisucoaseoedeaetis 52 LEADER ONLY sussie gen 69 EEE EE DERS A 53 CEEAR se 69 EMBED FRAME une 53 SAVERESTORE r 69 EMBED PLATE Gs saks 54 SETTINGS LEG 70 EXTRACT BOLTS All Drawings 54 HATCH judas e 70 EXTRACT BOLTS Current Drawing 54 JOIST FORMS prenesse rainier 70 FIND TEXT STRING ati 55 Chapter T bane 73 FLG HOBE used 55 ADJUST DIMENSION ossos 73 HOLE SIZE mereranna ninas 56 ARRAY orriaren ia aa an 73 SLOT SIZE norssi aeneon aiis 56 ARROWHEADS TO TICKS oooi 73 LIBRARY MENUS pusen 57 BREAK LINE TYPE dang 73 ADD TO LIBRARY Saunier 57 CHANGE TEXT 74 CLEAN SLIDES nekretina 57 CHANGE TO PLINE G u scenerne renees 74 LEADER NOTES jssvessstiseiesieasuavcatitnevencesiecvaetis 58 COLOR cigire n wie 74 LINTE 16000 ae 58 COLOR wi Nlier scissor aber 74 LINTEL shop attached erononnnnrnr
215. ces for washers are Add blank for none 1W for 1 standard washer Fenn Se 1HD for I hardened washer FoR cancel Draw Chapter 3 AutoSD Steel Detailing 2W for 2 standard washers 2HD for 2 hardened washers BW for beveled washer SBW for 1 standard washer and 1 beveled washer SLW for 1 standard washer and 1 load indicator washer SSQ for I standard washer and 1 squirter washer SBL for 1 standard washer 1 beveled washer and 1 load indicator washer HDB for 1 hardened washer and I beveled washer HDL for 1 hardened washer and 1 load indicator washer HDSQ for I hardened washer and 1 squirter washer LBW for 1 load indicator and 1 beveled washer SQB for 1 squirter washer and 1 beveled washer The description must be one of these choices for type for the extract program to recognize it The bolt circle uses attributes instead of text The advantage of using attributes is the ability to extract the data to an ASCII file where it can be used by other programs In order to extract information you must have a template file The one shown below is for use with the Windows program EXTRACTW EXE supplied with AutoSD Steel Detailing program and the bolt list program which is part of the CALCULATOR programs Attribute extract file AUTOSD BONUS ASD_BLT TXT The file FLDBOLT TXT is used for drawings created with version 4 0 and earlier Do not modify these files The information given below is for reference only ASD_FIEL
216. ction Tools gt Brace Lines w Desc Toolbar Erection Tools Ribbon AutoSD I gt Erection Tools This program will draw a line to represent a brace and place the member size at the center of the line and an option to place a solid filed triangle moment symbol at the ends Select a member size and enter an offset at each end A negative offset will pull the brace back from the selected point Select a point at each end of the brace for a start and stop point All information will be placed on a layer called BRACE The scale is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command Hi BLOCK WALL SECTION Pulldown AutoSD gt Erection Tools gt Block Wall Section Toolbar Erection Tools 28 AutoSD Steel Detailing Frection Tools Chapter 2 LI Ribbon AutoSD I gt Erection Tools This program draws a cross section of a 4 6 8 or 12 100mm 150mm 200m and 310mm block wall The first point you pick will be a corner point of the first whole block on one face The second point may be above or below the first point The third point picked determines if the face location picked was the right or left side The blocks are drawn 7 5 8 193 7mm tall with a 3 8 9 5mm mortar joint The scale is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command BRICK w BLOCK WALL SECTION Pulldown AutoSD gt Erection Tools gt Brick w Block Wall Section
217. d or welded with or without pickets with or without toe plate using angles pipes or tubes for the rail material The height of the rail is drawn to scale and there is an option to draw the post spacing to scale The program is supported by icon menus and dialog boxes that guide you through the input You select where to start drawing the rail by selecting the Select Rail Configuration N X X FLOOR FLOOR N FLOOR location of the upper left corner of the detail The handrail will be drawn from left to right with a top view above the portion shown horizontally in the icon menu The handrail can be drawn looking from the outside toe plate far side or from the inside toe plate near side of the platform Command Detail handrail viewed from the inside Y N lt Y gt Enter Toe plate near side The icon menu to the left shows all of the possible handrail configurations The one in the upper left corner will have one side The others will have two or three sides as shown Each side will have at least one post In 192 AutoSD Steel Detailing Rails Chapter 13 addition to these configurations you will select one end condition from the icon menu below left for the extreme left and right ends Some end conditions are for the rail to turn near side or far side These turns will not have a post I
218. dd piece to shop bill Yes No lt Y gt Enter Shop bill information on mark ac Total sub quantity 1 The Tread builder dialog box is displayed Select 10GA 2 2 6 Angle 1 1 2 Sub assembly mark for vertical support angles at top riser ad Add piece to shop bill Yes No lt Y gt Enter Shop bill information on mark ad Sub assembly mark for horizontal support angles at top riser af Add piece to shop bill Yes No lt Y gt Enter Shop bill information on mark af Sub assembly mark for horizontal support angles at standard pans ag Add piece to shop bill Yes No lt Y gt Enter 173 Stairs Chapter 12 AutoSD Steel Detailing Shop bill information on mark ag Pick a point in clear area for blowup of pan Select dimension line locations Quantity of this stair lt 1 gt Sub assembly mark for Standard pan ha The Tread builder dialog box is displayed Select 10GA 2 2 1 Angle 1 1 2 Sub assembly mark for vertical support angles at bottom riser ah Add piece to shop bill Yes No lt Y gt Enter Pick a point in clear area for blowup of pan Select dimension line locations Quantity of this stair lt 1 gt Sub assembly mark for Standard pan hb Shop bill information on mark hb Add upper stringer mark ma to shop bill Yes No lt Y gt Enter Shop bill information on mark ma Total sub quantity 1 Add sloping stringer mark mb to shop bill Yes No lt Y gt Enter Shop bill information on
219. ded See chapter 5 for the manual EXTEND WEIGHT program MATERIAL LIST Edit Material List Input is in FT IISS x Configuration file Unnamed r Material list Mark Length Description W3 0 03 L3 8x3x 5 2 0508 L3 8x3x 5 W32 0 0508 L3 6x3x 5 W33 0 0808 L3 8x3x 5 w34 0 1108 13 8x3x5 W35 1 0208 L38x3x5 W36 1 0508 L38x3x5 W37 1 0808 W38 1 1108 L3 8x3x5 L3 8x3x 5 r Description Mark Length Description W31 0 03 L3 8x3x5 Apply Add Delete EE Cancel Customer configuration and pick Unnamed and pick Edit You can change the mark length and description You can add and delete marks Each time a sub assembly mark is entered when using the shop bill program the program searches this file for the mark If it is found the length and description are read from the file and automatically entered in the shop bill If it is not found or you selected None for the material list file you must enter the length and description manually Use this file to list all standard marks for clips plates bolts etc Material list This file must be modified before it can be used A sample file is supplied called Unnamed and is shown to the right To edit the file select AutoSD gt Select Material list configuration Detail variables Material list
220. e MENUS AutoSD comes with two menus autosd mnu and autosd cuix All versions of AutoCAD will load the mnu file but you need AutoCAD 2010 or later to load the cuix file The difference between the two menus is the cuix file contains a ribbon menu and the mnu file does not The ribbon menu has two tabs AutoSD I and AutoSD II In this reference manual you will see AutoSD or AutoSD I AutoSD refers to the pulldown menu AutoSD I or AutoSD II refers to the ribbon menu tab You can use the ribbon menu exclusively or just the pulldown menu Toolbars can be used with either menu The AutoSD menu is an add on to the standard AutoCAD menu Ribbon menus can be turned on and off with the commands RIBBON and RIBBONCLOSE Pulldown menus can be turned on and off with the command MENUBAR Set the value to 1 to turn it on and to 0 to turn it off FT IISS or I1 SS You will see this in most of the input prompts It is the standard method of entering dimensions If the current dimensional unit format is set to architectural the FT IISS format will be used If it is set to fractional the ILSS format will be used Where FT number of feet II number of inches SS number of sixteenths Using the FT IISS format Using the ILSS format 1 3 1 2 would be entered as 1 0308 15 1 2 would be entered as 15 08 6 10 15 16 would be entered as 6 1015 82 15 16 would be entered as 82 15 4 0 would be entered as 4 48 would be entered
221. e column mark The mark will automatically be placed in the center of the bubble and will have a rotation of 0 Snap mode is automatically set to end snap for easy insertion D COL GRID lt gt O OO This is a bubble for column line identification where you would have a mark and a reference The mark will be placed above the reference and will automatically be placed in the center of the bubble at a rotation of 0 Snap mode is automatically set to end snap for easy insertion AutoSD Steel Detailing Erection Tools Chapter 2 This is for drawing a single line end view of a W shape The insertion point is the center COLUMN of the web The AISC symbol is provided for your use for creating title blocks of customers that use the symbol File C autosd sec asd_aisc dwg The AGC logo is provided for your use for creating title blocks of customers that use the symbol File C autosd sec agcoa dwg The AISC Certified Fabricator logo is provided for your use for creating title f N YCERTIFIED blocks of customers that use the symbol UJ ANA File C autosd sec aisclogo fab dwg and C autosd sec aisclogo fab bmp This is a typical revision symbol You are asked for a number when it is inserted You may enter a number or letter The attribute name ASD REV REV These are direction arrows The arrow may be rotated to any angle but the UP and P gt DN lettering will always b
222. e connection and a negative dimension reverses the direction of the connection The front view does not have a Right or Left It will always be centered Both edge view and front view plates will have either 1 or 2 columns of holes 107 Beams Chapter 7 AutoSD Steel Detailing If the beam is sloping the plates can be either vertical or square with the beam flange Left Left Right Right Center Center 0 Edge View Top Flange l i i i i Edge View Bottom Flange Front View Top Flange Her Front View Bottom Flange Her Import connection Edit Beam Connection List Input is in FT IISS Beam mark 181 LEFT End Rows Bolt Size Angle 1st Hole Down Hole spacing Connect with Holes 2 0 0300 0 0012 0 0300 Left Side Center Right Side Gage 1st Hole Out 2nd Hole Out 0 0300 0 0300 ELEVATION 43t HOLE DOWN r Ga i Et HE SIT PE rows Cancel Browse Delete Holes and skewed wing plates may be rotated to any angle in the web of a sloped beam The angle of rotation is measured from a line that is squa
223. e at a rotation angle of 0 TN This is for drawing a break line in a round section Pick the start and end points and the direction of the open end START POINT MEMBER Pulldown AutoSD gt Erection Tools gt Member Toolbar Erection Tools Ribbon AutoSD I gt Erection Tools SELECT OPTTAN SLET MENTER TYPE This program is for drawing a double line representation of a member on an existing single line The program will break the line at the two points picked erase that segment and draw the member picked from the icon menu The scale is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command The different member shapes are ANGLE COLUMN FLANGE COLUMN WEB BEAM WEB and CHANNEL FLANGE ED REVISION CLOUD Pulldown AutoSD gt Draw gt Rev Cloud Toolbar Miscellaneous Ribbon AutoSD I gt Miscellaneous 43 Erection Tools Chapter 2 AutoSD Steel Detailing The revision cloud is for drawing a cloud around something When drawing the cloud using the Arbitrary or Freehand option 71ers noer move the cursor in a counter clockwise direction In the TF IT E Freehand option the program will automatically close the cloud xrensievsennumbertlsername when the cursor is a short distance from the beginning If the TG int layer names are blank and Append revisio
224. e corner BS cuts both corners Flange Thinning If the member is not an angle and the angle of the flange thinning is not 0 and the flange is thinned on both sides the end of the member is automatically skewed Angle Channel Other These options change the reference slide and some of the options to make it easier to understand how each input is used for different materials The option selected is not saved as part of the burn data Layer Selection x Layer 1B1 Selecting the Layer button pops up a list box shown to the left of all existing Leyers in Current Drawing layers in the drawing Select the layer with the same name as the main mark and pick HOEN OK All CNC holes and burns MUST be on a layer that has the same name as the BORDER ASD DRAW main mark of the piece the hole or burn is in This layer is created automatically ENE when a new piece is detailed If you copy an existing piece to make a new one you MUST create a new layer with the same name as the new main mark and change all Com entities of the new piece to that layer The Change Layer command does all of this for you rampe a The dialog box shown below will open if a mar
225. e frame for cases where that channel is part of the stair stringer All inputs are stored and recalled the next time the program is run Landing Grating This program is for detailing the grating that covers a stair landing Bearing bars can run either direction If the center notch is not required enter 0 for dimensions 4 and 5 The layout is drawn to scale Separate marks are given for each piece Landing Grating Input is in FT 1ISS x 1 7 ol Pa POSITIVE wot el tal i 3 4 6 NEGATIVE Bearing Bar Height 0108 Rotate bars r Nosing type Bearing Bar Thickness 0004 9 YP O Abrasive Overall Length 7 Ll amp Checkered Plate Overall Width 4 06 2 Mebac Left Stair Width 3 03 43 O None Notch Width 06 4 Notch Depth 04 45 r Nosing location Leftside Offset 01 6 Grating Width 3 7 O Right side OK Cancel Landing Pan This program is for detailing the pan or plate that covers a stair landing Stiffener angles are optional and can run vertical or horizontal If the center notch is not required enter 0 for dimensions 4 and 5 Stiffeners will be equally spaced For the Gage or Thickness enter one or ORAT xt x 3 0 4 193 1 ONE CHK D R NOSING sfo 161 162 163 ONE 162 GRAT 1
226. e installed by the installation program If you need to change the configuration or reinstall the driver run the program in the Sentinel folder of the CD INSTALLING AutoSD STEEL DETAILING Installing your AutoSD Steel Detailing software is simple Just run the installation program All the necessary files will be copied to the hard disk The AutoCAD or BricsCAD program should be installed first on the hard disk After AutoCAD or BricsCAD has been installed follow these procedures Windows 2000 NT XP Vista Windows 7 8 Put the CD ROM in your CD ROM drive Close all open applications From the Task Bar select Start RUN Type D autosd_setup where D is your CD ROM drive Press enter Follow the on screen instructions When the installation is complete you will have to configure AutoCAD or BricsCAD The following is not available with AutoCAD LT Since the release of AutoSD 2012 you can run multiple versions of AutoSD at the same time by installing each version of AutoSD in a separate folder and creating a profile in AutoCAD for each version of AutoSD AutoSD 2012 and later can run with one older version and multiple newer versions 223 Installation Appendix A AutoSD Steel Detailing If you re current version of AutoSD is version 2012 or later and you want to also run AutoSD 2015 simply install AutoSD 2015 in a folder with a different name from where the earlier version of AutoSD is installed Example
227. e location of holes Pick OK to continue ul a mm r 3 3 Ea i e mz olin se 5 yapaa ESS me d g Select aa Hane leg leg 1 CAN BE Q CAN BE 0 3 2 PLThk TERIOR FR IE 120 AutoSD Steel Detailing Beams Chapter 7 How many rows of sag rods 2 Do you want to enter any SPECIAL block size Y N lt N gt Enter Pick point top of girt left end FT IISS Distance from girt line to C L of sag rod lt 4 gt Enter FT IISS Distance from C L to C L of sag rods in one group lt 3 gt Enter Can be 0 for one hole FT IISS Hole size for sag rods Enter 0 if holes are standard size 0 Do you want equal spacing for sag rods Y N lt Y gt Enter Do you have any internal connections Y N Y jon Input is in FT IISS x pee This dialog box is used to select the internal connection and enter values HE x gt ne CONNECTION for the location of holes Pick OK to continue of Pick location for left jamb Pick a point 3R 2 3 sE Pick location for right jamb Pick a point CAN BE 0 we pe Pick a CLEAR area between holes for vertical dimensions DOOR FRAME ARRA
228. e lock to a USB port STEP 3 Configure AutoCAD or BricsCAD Start AutoCAD or BricsCAD See appendix A for complete instructions on setting the support file search path template location and loading the menu If you are using AutoCAD 14 close AutoCAD and reopen it after setting the support file search path and before loading the menu iv AutoSD Steel Detailing Note If you are updating an older version of AutoSD you must unload the AutoSD menu and reload it See appendix A for instructions on loading the AutoSD menu STEP 4 Configure AutoSD After configuring AutoCAD and loading the AutoSD menu select the AutoSD pulldown menu and Customer Configuration Select Detail variables Select Unnamed and pick Edit Change the settings in the dialog boxes as needed and select OK Select Color list Select AutoSD from the list of names and pick Edit Use the dialog box to set each color by picking on the color of the item to be changed Colors for weld symbols are set in the Weld Menu dialog box Pick OK to close the Setting Colors dialog box You can rename the file names and add more configurations if needed Pick OK again to exit the configuration STEP 5 Starting AutoSD Start AutoCAD or BricsCAD If you are using AutoCAD LT you need to use the Lisp enabler desktop icon to start AutoCAD LT Select File gt NEW Select Use a Template and select the autosd dwt template It is in your C autosd support folder Pick AutoSD gt F
229. e near side Checking this option will draw the treads as solid lines and the flanges of a channel stringer as hidden Leaving it unchecked will have the opposite effect Use Plate for Stringer Checking this option will let you input the depth of the stringer and will not have any flanges Leaving it unchecked will allow you to selecting a C or TS shape File name This shows a list of names that were saved by the stair stringer program Select a name and pick Load to set all of the inputs to match the stair that created the file Browse will let you select a list from another folder Delete will delete the file selected If you exported stringers from the Elevation Generator you must open the file with the Stair Stringer program to convert the file before it can be used by the Stair Elevation program PICK WPs Checking this option will disable boxes for dimension 1 amp 2 and the program will ask you to pick the upper and lower points Start Point You can choose to pick the lower work point or the upper work point as the starting point as shown in the slide picture in the dialog box above If a block is NOT required enter 0 for the length and depth or leave these blank 180 AutoSD Steel Detailing Stairs Chapter 12 Pick Lower work point at finish floor Pick location of Horizontal dimension Pick location of overall Vertical dimension EEE PLAN VIEW OF STAIR Command Pick AutoSD or AutoSD II gt Stairs
230. e next line number that was used in the shop bill is higher than the previous the output file will be in order If you go back and add a line to a previous piece the output file will be out of order and that last line will be listed with the wrong piece in the extract file This is the reason for the line BL Y N005000 It outputs the Y coordinate of the block on each line The lines can then be sorted using this number CAUTION Template files and extract files use the extension txt Do not give the same name and location for both or you will overwrite the template file with the extract file Typically the extract file name will be the same as your drawing Use the following command to extract the attributes manually Command ATTEXT CDF SDF or DXF Attribute extract or Entities lt C gt S Use the S option Template file C AUTOSD BONUS ASD SBL Extract file name C jobs 2012 1 The default output file name is the current file name with a TXT file extension EDIT SUB MARK LIST Pulldown AutoSD gt Shop Bill gt Edit Sub Mark List Ribbon AutoSD I gt Shop bill If you configure the shop bill to use the sheet number as a suffix to the sub piece marks selection 1 or 3 shown below and check the box Carry sub marks through in the Shop Bill Text and Attribute Configuration the description for a mark will carry from one sheet to the next Each time you enter a sub mark the file submark tbl in your customer job
231. ead of using the Rule MT of thumb method You can also input a 3a 0308 distance If it works with the given clearance it will be used If it does not work the correct OK Cancel Gusset Plate Input is in FT ISS r Design brace for Tension O Compression O Both 50 of Tension 50 of compression Brace Size Qy of Angles r re angles LLBB r Seperation L4 x4 x5 16 7 1 O2 Yes ONO 00 amp 3 8 See Bolt PL Size Overide m Grade of Steel Load on Brace Horiz 36 50 Vert rls brace x Area of Brace s 2 40 Slope OYes ONO pr Bolts Diameter 3 4 Y Edge distance 0 0108 Value 75 Thickness of Bolted Section 0 0005 User Value Spacing 0 0300 Thickness of Gusset Plate 0 0006 Shear Planes lo 1 og Minimum Clearance 0 0100 Cancel PREVIOUS distance for the given clearance will be used Another dialog box is put on the screen Select the options at the top and select a brace size The area of the brace selected will be displayed in the area box If you selected an angle you can select whether you have I or 2 angles If you select 2 angles the value in the area box will be doubled and you will need to select the separation The three boxes unde
232. ect plate to bottom flange Slope of support beam from horizontal in degrees a 00500 p Skewed plate ME Plate is skewed r Select input method a 00500 amp Angle O Bevel O Controls 84 0002 45 0003 Angle in top view 90 0000 Bevel in top view 6 0 0104 Referenced from Web S ECT A 87 00104 r Control dimension in top view 4 sour DA 00300 Parallel with web 90 degrees to web 5 HOLE DIA 9 2 fv Plate location in plan view 10 Lett side of WP O Right side of WP ent i ae Thickness of plate Insertion point at top ok Cancel center of tube Plate Only Draw plate on Beam web Left near side Member W14x22 1 03 HG OF BEAM 2 03 p a BE 408 2 pg fo 4 0012 5 0013 a PS 6 0104 am aa 7 0104 je 8 03 9 3 Pick center of beam end view on top flange Entering a positive number for the vertical distance from the W P to the first hole will place the first hole below the W P A negative distance will place the first hole above the W P 114 AutoSD Steel Detailing Beams Chapter 7 The following example uses a negative distance from the top of the beam to the first hole Plate amp End View of Shape a s 4 Draw end view of member go E DP Draw plate on Beam web ed zd Left near side nan Member W14x22 1 05 2 0 3 0208 SECT B 4 0012 ER 5 0013 6 0104 7
233. ected can be changed The line weights will be changed to the weights stored in your customer configuration for colors RESET DWG SCALE Pulldown AutoSD gt Modify gt Reset DWG Scale Toolbar Change Ribbon AutoSD I gt Change This command will reset the scale of the drawing back to the original scale and will place the scale in the left end of the status bar REP REPLACE DIMENSION Pulldown AutoSD gt Modify gt Replace Dimension Toolbar Change Ribbon AutoSD I gt Change This command will replace a dimension or a string of text with a dimension It takes a number for input in the FT IISS format or two points Command Pick Replace dimension Select objects 1 selected 1 found Pick text Select objects Enter FT IISS Spacing Pick Dimension 10 0312 10 3 3 4 Command Dimension is changed to 10 3 3 4 Enter S to enter number of spaces and length of space FT IISS Spacing Pick Dimension S 76 AutoSD Steel Detailing Edit Chapter 4 SPA Enter number of spaces 2 FT IISS Length of each space 03 Result is 2 SPA 3 6 Enter P to enter distance by picking two points FT IISS Spacing Pick Dimension P Pick first point Pick second point Result is the scaled distance between the two points Using the P option the distance picked is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command Dimensions can be put on the drawing more easi
234. eel Detailing Calculator Chapter 5 If you do not have a configuration selected for the shop bill and this is the first time you use this program in the current drawing session you will be asked to pick a point for the right side of the weight column Pick any point where the vertical cross hairs of the cursor will be the right end of the text for the weight If you need to change this point choose the Locate Weight Column command directly under EXTEND WEIGHT in the pulldown menu The weight will be written on the same line as the description See chapter 10 for information on valid material descriptions 44 LOCATE WEIGHT COLUMN Pulldown AutoSD gt Calculator gt Locate Weight Column Toolbar Calculator Ribbon AutoSD I gt Miscellaneous This command will change the location of the weight column by picking a point The location is not saved It is valid only during the current drawing secession Useful if you do not have the shop bill configured to extend weights but you want to extend some weights afterwards EF HANGER Pulldown AutoSD gt Hanger Ribbon AutoSD I gt Utilities The hanger program is for calculating the thickness of a connection angle or end plate when the connection has a tension and or shear load Command Pick AutoSD or AutoSD I gt Utilities gt Hanger pe k END PLATE Re ie Make the selections for bolt type if threads are included in a I shear plane N or excluded X connec
235. elect Shape x O Australia Toolbar Miscellaneous O Canada O UK O Europe amp USA Ribbon AutoSD II gt Miscellaneous I Flanges v x 30 v d 137 8 bf 63 4 This is for drawing shapes to exact scale The shapes available are EN HP M MC S W Lr PS STS and Pipes Ps 7 amp STD XStg O X Stg 0146 Size 1 2 v x 0109 v Thick CF CF is for Cold Formed shapes made out of light gage Ts fy re x fi i fv x 18GaG v metal Flanges that slope will be drawn at 90 These shapes will C4 x21 2x16GA be drawn to the scale selected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command A dialog 2 Cancel box is used to select the shape Just pick the type of member and size and then pick the OK button The three views that can be drawn are TOP VIEW Select View ENDVIEW and WEBVIEW End View O Top View Web View The insertion point for each view is as follows END VIEW At the top on the center line or at the middle WEB VIEW ens vw Of the web on the center line WPT 1 g 2 TOP VIEW Each end on the center line Inpt 1
236. elevation at the top of the column or the column splice for multi tier columns Picking Del Tier 2 will delete the column for tier 2 and tier 3 and puts you back to having only one tier Picking Del Tier 3 will delete the column for tier 3 and puts you back to having two tiers Picking Select Size lets you pick a column size for the currently selected tier Picking Clear Size will remove the column size for the currently selected tier The Bottom of Col EL is the elevation at the bottom of the column or the column splice for multi tier columns Orientation lets you select how the column is viewed Show Cap PL and Show Base PL toggles cap and base plates on if selected and off if cleared Columns are optional If a column is not required you must leave the column size blank If you have an elevation detail with no columns such as a stair elevation inside block walls you need to enter a Top of Col elevation for one of the columns that is the height of the block walls or higher and a Bottom of Col EL that is the elevation of the bottom of the lowest stair These elevations determine where the bay width dimension is located 32 AutoSD Steel Detailing Erection Tools Chapter 2 Top center section This is for adding or changing Bay information and entering the Main elevations Bay selection Bays are numbered in sequence from left to right starting with 1 Picking Add will add a bay The Bay
237. elow the beam The end connections can be a single clip or two holes Internal connections are limited to two holes per connection but there is no limit to the number of connections If any blocks are required the size of the block is entered manually Where the blocks are dimensioned from depends on how you have the beam variable for blocks configured It is assumed that the support at each end will be the back of a channel so the minus dimensions will be 0 for clip connections Main mark 1B1 Are marks RIGHT and LEFT Yes No lt N gt Enter Quantity 1 FT IISS Distance from back to back of landing channels 7 Channel is toed 1 NS 2 FS lt 2 gt Enter FT IISS Top of channel to hole 3 0208 Sub assembly mark for clip aa Clip is 1 NS 2 FS lt 1 gt 2 FT IISS Gage of clip 0112 Add clip to shop bill Yes No lt Y gt Enter FT IISS Back of channel to hole 1 0204 FT IISS End of channel to hole 2 lt 1 1 4 gt 0108 FT IISS Top of channel to hole 3 0208 Do you want to enter a block size Yes No lt N gt Enter Pick point top of header beam left end Pick point to the right top of header beam right end Is there a stringer connection Yes No lt Y gt Y FT IISS Back of support to back of stringer fl 3 FT IISS Back of stringer to first hole 2 0112 FT IISS Top of header to first hole 3 0208 FT IISS Hole to hole ente
238. ength of weld on vertical member WH length of weld on horizontal edge of plate 137 Bracing Chapter 8 AutoSD Steel Detailing 138 AutoSD Steel Detailing Columns Chapter 9 In Chapter 9 Columns All programs in this chapter are under the AutoSD gt Column pulldown menu Columns toolbar and AutoSD II gt Columns ribbon menu Edit Column File This program is for detailing columns in a vertical position only Columns can be Go View BASEICAP File detailed from a column file or they can be detailed by supplying the connections Column manually column file can be created when the beams are detailed that frame into El Base Cap Plan a column or it can be created from the Elevation Generator or it can be created from LL Base PL Edge View scratch using the Edit Col File program All column file names have an extension TI Cap PL Edge View of col and will be saved in your job folder Column files must be edited before they Vice can be used if they were created when detailing beams or from the Elevation Generator The least you have to do is Pick OK when the Column Connection 4 Skewed PL Top View program opens You should however check the file to be sure all connections are Bse listed and add holes for any bracing connections If you edit a file and later add another connection from the beam program the Column Connection program will launch when you detail that column in order to upda
239. enter dimension for holes in the near side web with a row of three down 3 and the list noted above for the Left dimension for holes in the far side web with a row of one down 4 1 2 This is a typical beam connection for a horizontal brace The table below shows the result of entering dimension as a positive and negative As you can see in the examples Left dimensions move the connection left and Right dimensions move the connection right of the work line regardless of being positive or negative A positive dimension however continues to go in the same direction with the connection and a negative dimension reverses the direction of the connection The exception to this is skewed wing plates Skewed wing plates are placed on the opposite side of the work line as viewed from the top if the dimension is negative Entering the angle as negative has no affect A Left dimension rotates the plate left of vertical and a Right dimension rotates the plate to the right side of vertical To make a list negative enter the first number as negative The remaining numbers can be positive Example 04 03 03 The examples below show the result of entering dimension as a positive and negative for vertical plates on top and bottom flange Left dimensions move the connection left and Right dimensions move the connection right of the work line regardless of being positive or negative A positive dimension however continues to go in the same direction with th
240. es and gusset plates by draftsman not using a computer and reduce check time by having accurate details 237 Gusset Plate Details Appendix C AutoSD Steel Detailing GUSSET PLATE INPUT FORM CONNECTION NO TYPE QUAD LOAD ON BRACE narrer eee May be 0 zero MEMBER SIZE rneer a iE a May be the letter O for Other TOTAL AREA OF BRACE S rrrernnnnrrrnrvrrnnnrrrrrnnnrer May be 0 zero NUMBER OF BOLTS rerrrvrrrrorrvrrnrrvrennvrrrensrrsrrsrsrnen i If load and area are 0 zero COMPRESSION TENSION BOTH i SMALLER RADIUS OF GYRATION 3 Input if MEMBER is not given and brace is or IS BRACE X lt Y N gt iioii i Input if brace is double angle and is or BOLT SIZE 3 4 6 7 8 7 18 EDGE DISTANCE 0 ccccccssseecesseceesececeeeeesseeenens 2 Default is bolt diameter x 2 BOLT VALUE SINGLE SHEAR GRADE OF STEEL Fy 36 50 rervrrvrnrnvrnvvrrvrrnne GRADE OF GUSSET PLATE Fy 36 50 i BOLTS IN DOUBLE SHEAR Y N neeese i FT ISS THICKNESS OF BRACE oee FT IISS THICKNESS OF GUSSET PLATE i FTEISSJHL Ar asker naar ET ISSJH2u unike seperat sibs i FT IISS INPUT A OR lt ENTER gt TO CALCULATE Input 0 zero or dimension HORIZ CONN IS 0 WELDED 1 CLIP 2 CLIPS 3 END PLATE desired for A in order to input FT IISS SETBACK clearance VERT CONN IS 0 WELDED 1 CLIP 2 CLIPS 3JEND PLATE FT I
241. es extend through a tube or pipe column you should detail the second plate that has a connection on the opposite side immediately after the first wing plate If you only have two wing plate connections at a given elevation and they are on adjacent sides 90 degrees to each other the connection detailed first will extend through so it should have the most rows If a wing plate is skewed it must be detailed last If you want the wing plate in the web to extend upward and downward to weld to stiffener plates the stiffeners should be entered first and the wing plate second If the wing plates are entered first they will not extend to the stiffener plates 148 AutoSD Steel Detailing Columns Chapter 9 10 FOR DIM S GOING UP THE PLATE CLOSEST TO THE ELEV LINE WILL BE DIMENSIONED TO THE BOTTOM OF THE PLATE ALL OTHERS WILL BE DIMENSIONED TO THE TOP OF THE PLATE ELEVATION STIFF PL P ple Fs ELEVATION FOR DIM S GOING DOWN THE PLATE CLOSEST TO THE ELEV LINE WILL BE DIMENSIONED TO THE TOP OF THE PLATE ALL THERS WILL BE DIMENSIONED TO THE BOTTOM OF THE PLATE ENTERING O FOR THE FIRST DIM WILL PUT A PLATE AT THE ELEV LINE IF WING PL IN WEB IS TO EXTEND TO STIFF PL YOU MUST INPUT STIFF FIRST FROM EL DOWN FROM EL UP N eter ns FROM EL DOWN FROM EL UP FROM EL DOWN L
242. eseuunsvonnsutdddkmsky 28 BASEGAP PE sussie 9 Br ces issis nisin sunatna 131 Beam lines W desc rrmmererrvrverrerrerrorrersereen 27 Calculate Gusset PL Truss 2 137 Beam on plate w AB action denis aie ns 28 Dia Wonk preni eee ieee e a 131 Beams HSS 10 frame tye eck eet ene 136 Beams sloping up to the right 23 Parallel brace tower 137 Bevel Flanges occas nose eaten Sahat 21 TOG EEE aaa he EE oes 136 BIGGEST ene 22 Welded soci isi veccie State een 135 Clearance for non standard shear bar 23 Break line cts seit oe cee aes catia 42 Clips and Stiff ccccacacetnen nunc 21 Brick w block wall plan View cece 30 Pep 22 Brick w block wall section 29 Dimension blocks 0141 22 Brick wall plan view m usserdrukdsrdd 30 Dimension clip edge distance 2 23 Brick wall section sunmsnaunnuetnedndenke 29 Extension and tails at left end 23 Cale hie cc are let SELER e e ESS SEER SEE Er e 81 Index AutoSD Steel Detailing Camber niende De NE 83 Cap pl edge nevnes Ree 141 Clevisukasvemaukarddesknaddnsskedkd 51 GREEN RE 51 ING smeden LMS 207 BUMS snarere 210 Change pa GE 211 Beam end erei A 211 Datare Ee a eas en Ge a 212 Depth Y aeta a 211 LoA VEN en nnan n S 212 Eent OE SEES ES sess SER 211 NOtCh Ds salen 211 Setbacks ras Ne ahh 211 BIAS NN EE 211 Surface knappe S 212 Tess 212 Edit BAs a 213 217 Grather marks gerne 219 Graphically check DSTV data 2 221 Holes Associate hole
243. esgancsamiedes 11 IE Lan is SEES SER races teed ane calc ees NE SEERE uae 53 DXF into AutoSD eererororrvrvnvrnnvnnenersverern 11 25 Elevation generator ccccscesssccsssssesensccssnteces 31 EJ Bad 9 B rsen 33 Edit attributes uret 75 Penn 33 Edit Col flere ee 143 BLaCOS taxi screen gens ren beses 34 Colummsdevsvsassads konen 144 Work point at bottom srrrorrrrvovrrrvrennr 34 Connections aske 144 Work point at top eerronnrnrnnorrrrnnvnrrveennr 34 Nl 144 Work point is a 34 CC Mip ANGIS wears des ortor innn 146 EMU Wall orale sn eng 34 COPY EEE iiao 144 Column file configuration sc 38 I BF FO e x sea ninian ES TERESE REDER 144 Column HNC 1223 sons aens 32 Flange plate monine 149 El Note EE EE EE i 33 Girt ANGIE guunsesnnetemenninstjvde 146 End VIEWS raser teen ea aner 35 GEE WL cvexsacsanSoaseosccudentavasecessaensaeeasesaes 146 Girt configuration rroeorrrvrorrrvrrrrrvrrnrrvernnn 39 Gusset Please 150 GE RE EEE 35 AOI PORERNE REDER ERE SS E NESS SKER 149 JOS eee 35 Joist angle nren dessaacuesteactaedacedansantestvesans 147 Joist configuration reronrrnrorrvervrrvnrrrrveennr 39 JostpRleb veven 147 Ladder Sene 36 M re d r saadan 144 L ding setup saa 37 MOVE UDr e E cease 144 Detail angina 34 cus cn anes 38 NJ IE 150 Dr weuanaraqrdauaingdntsdnannsje 39 Sed er ET 147 Draw plans se r 38 Seal PERS 147 Export Stas sa 38 SE 148 Manelevitions sradsdtdserses 33 STA PE sun eder 149 DPE NE 32 Stub EE 150 SE
244. etailing girts The girt may have holes plate or clip in the web for the connection to column door jamb or another girt or can be field welded You can have holes for sag rods and door jambs The ends can be blocked as needed You must have a customer job folder created and configured for detailing beams before you can detail girts The last mark was 1B1 Main mark 1B2 z Are marks RIGHT and LEFT Y N lt N gt Y Lar ENE Quantity of RIGHTS 1 i E Quantity of LEFTS 1 1 on BE 0 The dialog box to the left is used to select the left end enter values for the location of holes select the girt size which way the flanges are toed if not saving CNC enter the length from column to column and select if the length is drawn to scale Pick OK to enter values for the right end If the girt is a tube it may be mitered at a corner or cut square with an optional end plate If the tube does not have equal sides you can select which will be the horizontal side Positive dimensions will draw the girt as shown in the slides Negative dimensions will move holes and the end of the girt in the opposite direction from that shown S n The dialog box to the right is used to select the right end and enter values for th
245. ext Ribbon AutoSD I gt Utilities Arched text will produce text about a curve Some examples are the AISC symbol and the slide in the ARCS program Pick AutoSD or AutoSD I gt Utilities gt Arched text ATEXT Pick radius point 60 40 ARG Text height 1 5 Pick middle point of text 60 7 XN E NG HER Is base Enter of text towards radius point lt Y gt Text THIS IS ARCHED TEXT Command al The text is written about an arch ASSEMBLY MARKS Pulldown AutoSD gt Shop bill gt Assembly Marks Toolbar Miscellaneous Ribbon AutoSD I gt Shop bill 48 AutoSD Steel Detailing Draw Chapter 3 This is used to place assembly marks on your drawing It works the same as the LEADER command except it keeps track of marks for plates angles bars rods channels and miscellaneous marks You can choose to have notes such as NS FS BS CTR D R L and R L automatically added to mark You can increment the mark each time or repeat the same mark multiple times The CNC option will allow you to make a DSTV file of a plain material piece T BEARING PLATE NE Pulldown AutoSD gt Detail gt Bearing Plate Toolbar Detail RAA Ribbon AutoSD II gt Detail This program will detail a plate with multiple rows and columns of holes or anchors on the far side and show the edge view of the plate The scale is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify
246. ext description parallel to a line on either side and centered at the point picked Normally this would be the size of a beam brace column or some other member U BLOCK SECTION VIEW Pulldown AutoSD gt Erection Tools gt U Block Section View Toolbar Erection Tools Ribbon AutoSD I gt Erection Tools This program draws a cross section of 6 8 and 12 block 150mm 200m and 310mm block The blocks are drawn 7 5 8 193 7mm tall The scale is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command WOOD END VIEW Pulldown AutoSD gt Erection Tools gt Wood View Toolbar Erection Tools Ribbon AutoSD I gt Erection Tools 45 Erection Tools Chapter 2 AutoSD Steel Detailing This program draws the cross section of wood Input the nominal size and the program will draw it to actual size You enter the nominal width nominal thickness start point and orientation The end view can be drawn from a corner center or midpoint of an edge and at any angle The scale is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command 46 AutoSD Steel Detailing Draw Chapter 3 Chapter 3 Draw LINE Pulldown AutoSD gt Draw gt Q Line Ribbon AutoSD I gt Utilities This command is similar to AutoCAD s line command It operates in much the same way by starting with a point and asking for your next point To enter the next point y
247. f this form is enclosed in the back of this page Follow the directions written on the form 253 Error Handling Appendix F AutoSD Steel Detailing AutoSD 2015 Report Form Please use this form when reporting program problems or comments State the nature of the problem the type of computer system the version of AutoCAD you are using the page in the manual or the menu name where the problem was encountered and the sequence of events leading up to the command used Your name Company Address Phone Fax E mail AutoCAD BricsCAD Version Operating system Windows 98 NT 2000 XP Vista 7 8 State the problem Please Return To AutoSD Inc 8203 LIZELIA RD Meridian Ms 39305 254 AutoSD Steel Detailing Index INDEX CPO EET EE NER 9 Grade ol SCE ite tates saa 24 GING va 47 Horizontal dimension are 1 22 2 PL VECO oss snittes tyende dagen ang 47 Minus dimensions framing into beams 23 Add Studs 4 soon ere 47 Overall length is at svissesvsnssessssnssarersvsssers avs 22 Adhesive AO en 47 Show beam properties ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 23 Adjust dimension uuyasdgsmmunavdsoisande 73 Show loads on end of beam eee 23 AGC 1080 rn innana a 43 Show support member size 1 23 AISC Certified Fabricator logo eee 43 Use max rows in end connection 25 AISC Symbols eee eet ene 43 Use standard shear bar with slots
248. f you need a handrail that looks like the one in the left middle without a post on the vertical side you would select the upper left icon and then select one of the end turns from the icon menu below The main mark will be placed under the horizontal portion shown in the icons above Choose the upper left icon shown in the icon menu to the left if you want i to end the handrail in a post with or without a return The icons that show a wus mase top view with a turn will allow you to turn the handrail at the ends without c a post These end types may be used with any of the handrail types shown J J in the first icon menu If you have a multiple line rail and want a single 1 07 line at the end beyond the post you need to select an end that has a return A dialog box is used to get your input Select the options you want and enter the dimensions that are required The image in the upper left indicates which portion of the rail is being detailed The number of rail lines must be greater than I in order to enable the picket option Pickets can be between any two pair of rails but are not allowed on 4 angle rails PUED 12
249. ference is 250 Command BEVEL horiz Command BEVEL Select line Pick a line that is sloping Select side for symbol Pick one side of the line Bevel lt 4 5 8 gt Enter Angle lt 21 1810 gt Enter Current line width is 0 0 Symbol is put on line Command Finished HORIZ 5116 7055 In response to the Bevel prompt you may type in a dimension in the FT IISS format if you don t want to use the default value You may also type in a different angle at the Angle prompt to be put in the symbol RV HE 12 ALIGNED 23 4 12 CROSSING Pulldown AutoSD gt Dimension gt Crossing Toolbars Dimension I Ribbon AutoSD I gt Dimension This dimension command is located in the pulldown menu It allows you to dimension the distance between two or more lines by picking two points rubber band line is stretched between the two points you pick and all spaces between lines that are crossed by this rubber band line will be dimensioned The group of lines selected should be parallel LEADERS WORD WRAP Pulldown AutoSD gt Dimension gt Leader word wrap 96 AutoSD Steel Detailing Dimensioning Chapter 6 Toolbars Dimension I Leader Ribbon AutoSD I gt Dimension This leader command can place the text on a single line or wrap it for multiple lines It can have one leader or multiple leaders Leader start to point to point Rotation Leader note NO PAINT WITHIN 3
250. file using the command DXF into AutoSD the colors of some of the objects will be changed to match the colors in the configuration You can change the colors in these configuration files by putting a check in the box for CVSpro SDS 2 SteelCAD or XSteel When you pick OK the colors will be saved to the file custCLR cfg for the file name selected in the Color list box and to any and all names that are checked The colors used for importing DXF files are saved in the following files File name Configuration use CFG SDS2 LSP SDS 2 CFG CVS LSP CVSpro CFG SCAD SteelCAD CFG XSTL LSP Xsteel Exception The file CFG SDS2 LSP for SDS 2 is NOT used for converting colors when importing dxf files from SDS 2 It is only used to set the colors for detailing when you run AutoSD gt Format or AutoSD I gt Utilities gt Setup and select the SDS 2 option Converting colors when importing dxf files from SDS 2 is PREGE handled by the command AutoSD gt Tools or AutoSD I gt ses Crctes Hey Ten Ses Utilities gt DXF into AutoSD gt Configure SDS 2 colors The reen HEN dialog box shown to the left is used to configure the colors wan The list under SDS 2 is the color of the object in the dxf file The colors under To AutoSD is what each color will be changed to for each type of object Solids are for arrowheads
251. folder will be checked to see if the mark has been used before If it has the description length and remarks will automatically be entered into the shop bill If it has not been used you will be 158 AutoSD Steel Detailing Shop Bill Chapter 10 BOM ATT BOM TXT Fu asked to enter the description length and remarks After doing so they will be added to the list for future reference Line in shop bill configuration for selecting to carry sub marks through For sub marks use 0 a b c 1 al bl 2 aa ab 3 aal ab1 0 1 2 3 lt 2 gt 3 Note If you select option 0 and 2 the marks will be saved to and recalled from the submark tbl file only if you end the mark with a number If the description length or remark of a sub mark needs to be changed after it has been saved to the file submark tbl you can change it with EDIT SUB MARK LIST located in the AutoSD gt Shop bill pulldown menu A dialog box is used as shown to the right Select a mark and the mark description length and Sub mark remarks are displayed in edit boxes To change ab shap C one click on an edit box and make the change 35 Mark f d You can also delete a mark and the information Description associated with it If you select Cancel no Length ps changes will be saved Remas EXTRACT SHOP BILL pe RE Pulldown AutoSD gt Extract gt Shop Bill Using Attributes Pulldown AutoSD gt Extract gt Shop Bill
252. for Top for Bottom lt N gt Enter 2 0 This program will draw wall rails These rails are drawn to the actual bevel sloping in either direction and the length may be drawn to scale A dialog box is used to get your input Select the options you want and enter the dimensions that are required Some dimensions can be entered automatically from stair stringer input that has been saved By using the list under File name select a file and pick Load This list shows all of the stringer inputs that have been saved for this job List from other jobs can be selected with the Browse button The Delete button will delete a file from the current list cross hairs outlining the area ma MP Kar Ge 1129 PIPE x 8 0 LIN 2 9 8 i a WP WP l4 11 1 112 3 0 5 3 TWRI ONE Wall Rail is LeveL or Sloping Choosing level will draw a level length of wall rail that would be used above a floor Choosing sloping will draw a wall rail for use on a stair or ramp 190 AutoSD Steel Detailing Rails Chapter 13 Slope UP to the right or to the left Select whether you want the rail drawn sloping up to the right or left Dimension 3 is to Top or Center The height of the rail over the treads can be measured from the top or center line of the rail The horizontal ends of the rail will always be measu
253. for EJE using attributes eee 161 for EJE using EX Vasatadasrrad een 162 for Fabtrol using attributes 162 for Fabtrol using text 163 for KISS using text Colums aen sa re e a 163 JastificatiOn ennnen 163 Mark amp Quantity sorroooorrooorrrvrvrrrverrnr 163 ROWS men berusende 163 PROSTAR escola aes ease eee 159 Shop billens hapa ates 159 Extract bolts all drawings rrrnrrrnvorrrrvervrrvnr 54 Extract bolts current drawing errrrrrrovorrrrvnr 54 Pal Suite kss levner 164 Peet to Decimals Lana 84 File names ata inneics si nta e ai 8 Files sardiner sa 174 Find text strid sanserne ende 55 Finger shim plate 113 Flange gage leader note ssnrronvnnnnrnvnrnrvnnnnnene 99 Flat bars amp Plates vss iis deisesauecybenencsnadesgees serecnees 18 Fle OIE uuansed SEES 55 folders ER EN REN 14 Fosser ene 13 92 ASD BKAP enant iiaiai 91 ASD FON Te ELSE 91 PINS Sede ea 7 EES Sonnen 8 73 84 86 87 89 GE RE a RRS SR 120 Grid lines WDIM oi in aE a 40 Gu sset plate Mess 9 Gusset Plate Input Form 238 Gusset plates EE EN 125 Calculation EE 125 dimension A seessesssessessessssssrssessssssesseessesse 126 AW seth Soars a e nie iiaae 130 Eee NES 130 Eee 130 Printing file scat ates cack aars 128 Viewing file uusikeinsnersmesininiisetestig 129 VAN SRE sats devas nassrqoodectuaadont a RON Rn cee 85 ACC assent Bee ee 70 Header beam iii 3 23 ccsaceseaieee niin 182 HIP and VALLEY 2 siccsteseess 15 secs deadanyettadeuess 20
254. ft end of the beam is Web FS Holes 26 23 06 03 Ba TIP 9 05 J X Bottom Fig Foss El 7 TE BELE detailed and before the right end is Vertical hale spacing Near Side 0 0300 Vertical hole spacing Far Side 0 0300 detailed r Stiffeners Add Symbol for Channel Left r Center Right Toed Left Toed Right E i ke i The AUX internal connections are ey used after the right end of the beam Web FS Deer is detailed to add connections after a CE ma ear Al Previous beam is detailed such as handrail holes or because of a revision It can be a single connection or you can chain them together by pressing enter after the first connection is completed to repeat another connection If you repeat you can select the same connection or use a different one If you select the command from the pulldown menu the connection will not be chained to the previous one You cannot alternate between MAIN and AUX internal connections You must complete the beam with MAIN before using AUX Now let s put some internal connections in the beam Choose the appropriate box in each section To recall the last internal connection used pick the Previous button Pick OK when finished Connections You can make one selection from each connection For wing plates an optional side view section can be drawn This view is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command Only the side view will be
255. g If you used the tag names ASD NA for Project Name ASD NO for Job Number ASD GR for material grade and ASD RE for the revision mark in your title block attributes this information will be included in kss file when extracting for Fabtrol Inserting the title block Configuration file Unnamed 24x36 Jab name Prompt Project Location Value This Project Contractor Architect Holes Paint 1 of 2 Paint 2 of 2 0 18 0 rawn Checked Sheet number Job number Material grade Delete Rename Save as varia Beams Cancel OK delete all Job Names except the Default Sequence Configuration r Total Number on 01 O2 03 04 05 65 r Number or Letter r Location From Right Border Ist 1 Center of Sequence 1 8 0206 Pick 2nd 2 Center of Sequence 2 8 0806 Pick 3rd 3 Center of Sequence 3 9 0206 Pick 4th 4 Center of Sequence 4 9 0806 Pick 5th 5 Center of Sequence 5 10 0206 Pick 6th 6 Center of Sequence 6 10 0806 Pick OK Cancel Title Block Configuration Input is in FT IISS x Configuration file Unnamed 24x
256. g file or create a new file to merge all files into You cannot merge a file onto itself where new file and merging file have the same name Extract for SMM uses some support files located in the AUTOSD BONUS folder They are asd_smm txt and smm txt Do NOT modify these files or the program will not work Extract for SMM also works with shop bills created with older versions of AUTOSD without having to change the attribute block The description of a main member is usually the member size but sometimes you will need to use a description such as FRAME or BRACE for the main member When such a description is given the length should be left blank A main mark with no length will be treated differently than a main mark with a length 161 Shop Bill Chapter 10 AutoSD Steel Detailing EJE TXT FAB ATT EXTRACT for EJE using Text Pulldown AutoSD gt Extract gt for EJE Using Text Ribbon AutoSD I gt Shop bill This program will extract the information when text is used in the shop bill The program uses the shop bill configuration file to locate the columns of text therefore you must select the customer configuration file that was used to place the text in the shop bill The text must be lined up in columns and rows with the following restrictions Columns The insertion points of the text in a column must line up within 1 on either side of the item as defined in the customer configuration file for the location of that column
257. g them For example to solve the equation 5 3 6 x 2 15 1 use the following keystrokes 5 Enter 3 6 Enter 2 15 Enter 1 5 Enter 3 results in 8 in the display 6 Enter 2 results in 12 in the display and 8 in the X register 15 Enter 1 results in 14 in the display 12 in the X register 8 in the Y register and 8 in the Z register 82 AutoSD Steel Detailing Calculator Chapter 5 mm subtracts the display 14 from the X register 12 resulting in 2 and moves the number in the Y register 8 down to the X register repeats the same process It adds the display 2 to the X register 8 resulting in the final answer of 6 The same equation could have been input using only two storage register as 5 Enter 3 6 Enter 2 15 Enter 1 Every time you press Enter you move the numbers up one register and when you press or you move the numbers down one register e SQUARE ROOT To take the square root of a number press the letter N upper or lower case The square root functions will only work in the decimal calculator e EXPONENT To raise a number to a power type the exponent and then press the letter M upper or lower case For example to solve for 6 raised to the power of 3 follow these key strokes 6 Enter 3 M The exponent function only works in the decimal calculator You can switch over to the RIGHT TRIANGLES program while you are in the calculator
258. gt Dimension gt Radial gt Arc Toolbars Dimension I Ribbon AutoSD I gt Dimension This command is for dimensioning the length of an arc or an arc distance on a circle It works the same as the dimension command for straight lines The arc will be measured in a counter clockwise direction between the two points that you pick ARC CONTINUE Pulldown AutoSD gt Dimension gt Radial gt Arc Continue Toolbars Dimension I Ribbon AutoSD I gt Dimension This command is for continuing an arc dimension on an arc or on a circle It works the same as the CONT dimension command for straight lines The dimensions will continue in a counter clockwise direction STATUS DIMVARS UNDO RADIUS DIAMETER and ANGULAR are AutoCAD s dimensioning commands LEADER is a custom leader command that works just like AutoCAD s BEVEL Pulldown AutoSD gt Dimension gt Bevel align Pulldown AutoSD gt Dimension gt Bevel horiz 95 Dimensioning Chapter 6 AutoSD Steel Detailing N Pulldown AutoSD gt Dimension gt Bevel miter Toolbars Dimension I Ribbon AutoSD I gt Dimension BEVEL horiz calculates the bevel and angle of a line in reference to the horizontal BEVEL align calculates the bevel and angle in reference to another line BEVEL miter calculates the bevel and angle in reference to two other lines Each one places the bevel and angle on the line on the side of your choice For metric the bevel base re
259. gt Plan View of Stair You can draw a plan view of a stair by picking Plan View of Stair from the pulldown menu The plan can be to scale If you saved the stringer file when detailing the stringer you pick the Stringer file buttons and have some information enter for you from the files fr hk fr fi Slope Stringer file far side Section Marks AA i i l l l l A4 Scale sloped stringer i i i i Upto the Scale Horiz stringer Stinger file near side 9 l i i l oA Plate stringers FS Sy r gt Thickness Singer ES I i I i I I x YB B O Let Plata stingers NS cress Ed Thickness Pete gt GS EET GS 6 1 7 1 6 0000 1S1 FAT TJA ONE FE LISE LEE LITE LEE LE LIE 2 20000 te i i 3 4 0000 X i ft pi SE Section marks can be facing toward the back or toward the a_i FY tan um front Picking AC will put section marks at AA and utt pe CC and you enter the mark you want to use at section A 3 1 5 2 Be in the box labeled A Do the same for section C Enter 4 TREADS rs values as required and pick OK to draw the plan
260. guration This is the distance from the heel of the clip to the first shop bolt in the web of the beam If the support is a beam column web or user type and the clip is field bolted you have the option of selecting to Use Safety Connection This option will stagger the near side and far side clips At the left end the far side clip will be dropped down 3 below the near side clip At the right end the near side clip will be dropped down 3 below the far side clip If the support is a column web column flange or user type and the connection is a field bolted clip bent plate or end plate not moment you have the option to Add row above AND OR below beam This option allows you to extend the connection above or below the beam to connect to a gusset plate The dialog box shown to the right will be displayed to select options and enter number of rows If you pick Cancel the connection will be detailed without being extended v Extend Up v Extend Down A 0 0300 B 1 0800 Bevel Flanges sood a This is set to No by default If you need the flanges to be beveled Ca na for a full penetration weld select yes 101 Beams Chapter 7 AutoSD Steel Detailing Degrees If Bevel Flanges is set to Yes you can select the bevel to be 45 or 30 degrees The default is 45 and will give a clearance of 1 4 f
261. h the xdata of the hole so that when the dimension text is changed the xdata for the hole is also changed If there is more than one hole associated with a tail dimension text the xdata for all of the holes will be changed when the tail dimension text is changed The following commands are shortcuts for changing one value of hole data but multiple holes can be changed at one time For a complete look at the hole data use the Edit Data command CHANGE FACE This program changes the xdata face value of all holes selected The face values for beams are top flange web and bottom flange The face values for columns are left flange web 208 AutoSD Steel Detailing CNC Chapter 16 NS amp FS web NS web FS and right flange The face values for angles are upper leg and lower leg GA CHANGE GAGE This program changes the xdata gage value of all holes selected 1 Beam web gage distance down from the top flange or up from bottom i flange Column or W brace web gage distance from hole to hole on each side of the center line of the web Beam or Column flange gage the given gage as detailed Angle gage the given gage as detailed The gages in the picture shown above are 4 and 7 OPT CHANGE OPTION This program changes the xdata option value of holes selected The available values are for Tail from left end gage from top flange Tail from right end gage from top flange Tail from left end gage f
262. hase this product Updating an older version of AutoSD Steel Detailing You should uninstall the current copy of AutoSD Steel Detailing first Uninstalling AutoSD will not remove any drawings or customer configurations that you have created Windows XP From the task bar pick Start Settings and Control Panel Double click on Add or Remove Programs in the Control window Windows 7 From the task bar pick Start and Control Panel Click on Uninstall a program in the Control Panel window Windows 8 amp 8 1 Change to the desktop screen Right click on the Windows icon and pick Control Panel Click on Uninstall a program in the Control Panel window Select AutoSD Steel Detailing XX where XX is the version number and pick Uninstall Note If you have customized your autosd dwt template file located in your AutoSD support folder you will need to save it to another folder or disk or rename it before un installing AutoSD After installing AutoSD copy your old autosd dwt template file back into your AutoSD support folder All files will not be removed Some files and folders will remain Do not delete the remaining files and folders Install AutoSD over the existing files Insert the CD ROM into your CD ROM drive and if the installation does not start choose START RUN Type X AUTOSD_SETUP where X is your CD ROM drive letter Follow the on screen prompts STEP 2 Installing the hardware lock After Setup is finished Attach the USB hardwar
263. he description Only Australian key words may be placed in the middle 150UB 14 You may use upper or lower case letters The dimensions for Angles Tubes Bars Flat Bars and Plates may be in any order The first two dimensions for GRATING may be reversed but the width must be the third dimension in the description Spaces are permitted anywhere in the descriptions but not in the key words except where shown In all cases the descriptions must use the custom text supplied by AutoSD using the backward apostrophe C or tilde characters for fractions If a description is not recognized no weight will be given Grating is for welded steel grating only Cross bar centers can be 2 or 4 and bearing bar centers can be 15 16 1 3 16 1 3 8 1 7 8 or 2 3 8 The weight calculated is for non galvanized carbon steel When listing common pieces it is customary to describe the piece completely the first time and then give just the quantity and mark of the piece each time after that Each time you describe a new piece it is added to a list 166 AutoSD Steel Detailing Shop Bill Chapter 10 that is held in memory When you give only the quantity and mark of a piece the program searches this list for the same mark If it finds it the weight will be extended for the common mark When you end the drawing this list is erased from memory This is why the shop bill should be filled out completely in one drawing session in order for all weights to be exten
264. he one you type into the edit box to the right of Note Print Print a hard copy of all of the configuration settings Create BOM files for The options are Fabtrol and FabSuite Each one imports a kss file but each uses a different shape designations Choose the material management program you are using File extension for EJE SMM The options are csv for the newer ASCII delimited file format and imp for the older fixed field file format Choose the extension for the version of SMM that you are using The country you select will determine which data base OAustalia O Canada OUK Otuope musa Will be used for shapes and which design method will be Connection Design Method used for connections If you choose any country other than USA your drawing must be set up using metric units OAS 4100 LSD O BS 5950 O BS 5950 ASD LRFD 4 OK i Cancel 17 Introduction Chapter I AutoSD Steel Detailing tere eee BOLTS This box is for setting the type diameter bolt spacing bolt length when to use X SPA Y Z where X is the number of rows graphics for the bolt head and edge distances for each bolt diameter The type diameter and bolt spacing are also available on a per detail basis Bolt length N and X N is for threads included X is for threads excluded from the shear plane Stick through The length of
265. he changes made to the list back to note dat DEFAULT This will replace the list with the original list from note def SORT This will put the list in alphabetical order LINTEL loose Pulldown AutoSD gt Detail gt Lintel loose Toolbar Detail Ribbon AutoSD II gt Detail This program draws a lintel with a main shipping mark using I or 2 angles attached to a plate LINTEL shop attached Pulldown AutoSD gt Detail gt Lintel shop attached Toolbar Detail Ribbon AutoSD II gt Detail This program draws a lintel and or masonry anchors on an existing beam detail The lintel can be on the top flange bottom flange or both It can be a plate or angle or both Angles can be near side far side or both sides You can draw any combination of side view top view and end view The end view can be on an existing end view of a beam or you can draw the end view of the beam too The top view can only be drawn if a lintel is on the top flange If there is a plate on the bottom flange it can be suspended below the beam or welded directly to the flange 58 AutoSD Steel Detailing Draw Chapter 3 The beam length is required only if the side view is drawn The lintel and anchor material T NEAR FAR Views
266. he same column the dimensions will overwrite To avoid this locate the left wall from the left column and the right wall from the right column A ond Bo inBey 1 Prev Boy Next Bay Block only O Brick Black Black Brick p Reflerenced to Leftside ofOMU O Right side of CMU p Located from Left column O Right column Nominal Block size a l B 34 AutoSD Steel Detailing Erection Tools Chapter 2 End Views Putting a check in the box for Note size will add a leader with the member size to the detail Short Side Vertical is for the orientation of tubes Angles and channels can be toed left or right Angles and Tees will have the leg or stem pointed up or down The dimension locating the end view can be from the left or right column Girts Girts Input is in FT IISS x Girts between Columns The left and right side of the dialog A andB nay box show an image for a Girt line Elevation Type 104 G to the first and last bay of girts Object Type O Gin O Window OK Cancel End View I
267. hem to the ACAD or a custom menu file AutoCAD LT configuration Using CADBooster Using Notepad copy the contents of C AUTOSD MENUS LoadLT Isp Paste to the end of the file listed below For LT2007 LT2011 Change 2007 to your version of AutoCAD C Program Files cad port CADBooster 2007 CADBoosterDoc lsp For LT2000 LT2006 Change 2000 to your version of AutoCAD C Program Files cad port CADBooster 2000 LTBoosterDoc Isp Using Toolkit Max Using Notepad copy the contents of C AUTOSD MENUS LoadLT Isp Paste to the end of the file listed below For LT2002 LT2010 Change 2002 to your version of AutoCAD C Program Files drcauto Toolkit LT2002 Toolkitdoc Isp For Cadsta Max Open a drawing in AutoCAD LT using the CADSTA icon Click on pull down menu CADSTA gt CADSTA Tools gt Startup Suite Click Startup Suite tab Click Add button Select C AutoSD Menus LoadLT Isp and click OK button to add this to the list Click OK to exit the dialogue box DI ee NIR INSTALLING the HARDWARE LOCK You must attach the hardware lock to your computer in order to run AutoSD Steel Detailing If your hardware lock is damaged or faulty contact AutoSD Inc You must return the original to receive a replacement 228 AutoSD Steel Detailing Installation Appendix A The hardware lock affects AutoSD Steel Detailing only Other programs can run with the hardware lock in place Installation
268. how loads on end of beam Clearance for non standard bar 0 0012 Grade of sten to both flanges equal to From OL of web support or face of column flange p Horizontal dimensions are Flange shapes A35 beam depth minus 2 amp emtee otsuppon net Channels m5 S V Use standard shear bar with slots amp Below beam Angles A36 times flange thickness g i r Extension and tails at left end __ Minus dimension framing into beams _ Plates Bars A36 Otherwise the length amp Both to beam Half web at both ends Pipes A5006 TT O Bath to clip Half web 1 16 at right end only Tubes fase T will be shortened by the Extension to clip tails to beam Half web 1 16 at both ends Studs C1008 amount you enter Cor Canesl Style This applies to level beams only Choose the style you want by picking the image If you are saving CNC data burn data for blocks will be saved with the block length dimension Depth Here you select how the block depth is calculated Select either to use the k dimension of the support or flange thickness tf plus a clearance value If you use the second option and put a check mark in Min k of blocked beam the depth will be the greater of tf plus clearance and the k dimension of the blocked beam Dimension blocks to This controls where blocks copes and cuts are referenced from at the ends The location is for the horizontal dimension If
269. ht Left Mid Center O Right Mid O Lower left Bottom Mid O Lower right OK Cancel of 0 The insertion point can be any corner the midpoint of any edge the center or two opposite corners 45 ROTATE CROSSHAIRS Pulldown AutoSD gt Tools gt Rotate Cross hairs 0 Toolbar Rotate Cross hairs SET Select option Ribbon AutoSD I gt Modify 0 45 Angle Bevel Control Select Core This allows you to quickly set the angle of the cross hairs to match the angle of a line by picking the line if you choose the Select option Other options are to input the Angle Bevel Controls horizontal amp vertical vectors 0 or 45 degrees ROOF FRAMES Pulldown AutoSD gt Detail gt Roof frames Toolbar Detail 64 AutoSD Steel Detailing Draw Chapter 3 TOP VIEW Ribbon AutoSD II gt Detail There are nine different types of frames available as shown to the right The top center and top right frames are drawn using angles only The other frames can be drawn using angles or channels The frames with vertical struts can be detailed with one or more vertical members as shown Enter 0 for the location of each vertical member that is not required SCALE SHAPE Pulldown AutoSD gt Draw gt Shapes S
270. ht Select a new position and the label will be swapped with the one currently in that position The row below Set Order shows how the mark is constructed and a sample of what the mark will look like for a 3 row clip Checking Designation will include the text that is shown in the designation pop down list in the mark Checking Prefix will include the text shown in the Prefix edit box as part of the mark Checking Gage will include the listed gage for a given web thickness The gage will be in the format of inches and 16th s where 1 7 8 is 114 If you want the gage to be represented by a single digit enter it as 0001 for 1 or 0005 for 5 If you are not using slots in the clip or your mark requires the actual gage then check the box by Use Actual Gage Checking Suffix will include the text shown in the Suffix edit box as part of the mark If the clip is shop welded pick Shop weld If the clip is shop bolted pick Shop Bolt If the shop bolts are staggered check the box by Staggered The last items are the Default C C for beam end connections These settings should match one of the C C in OSL that you set for one of the clips Select OK when you have finished all of the changes BEAMS Bevel Flanges Enter values for Bevel Flanges for field welds Shop bolted Clips and Stiff 21 Introduction Chapter I AutoSD Steel Detailing 1 amp 2 are the gages
271. ill be created with the same name as the main mark or sub mark and prefixed with CNC when a member is detailed by the program All entities with CNC data for this detail will be on this layer If you copy an existing detail to make a new one you MUST create a new layer with the name of the layer the same as the new mark prefixed with CNC_ set it current and change all entities of the new detail to that layer You can do all of this with the command Change CNC layer under AutoSD gt CNC If the layer name does not exist it will be created if it does exist it will be set current All entities selected will be changed to the new layer Stairs offer a different problem with separating the xdata since a stair main mark can have two stringers and one stringer can be made from two or more pieces To handle these conditions a layer will be created for each sub piece The layer name will be the sub piece mark prefixed with CNC_ For example if the sub piece mark is ma on sheet 43 the layer name will be CNC_ma and the CNC file name will be 43maR and 43maL You can also use this layer naming convention for built up frames made out of flange shapes Since frames are not generated by a program you will need to create the layers and change the objects layer after detailing is complete or set the correct layer current before detailing each member When xdata is extracted from the drawing a file with the same name as the main mark will be created to h
272. ill cause the program to draw the end view of a channel toed in the direction selected and place beside the work line After all necessary information has been entered into the Internal Connections dialog box pick the OK button The insertion point for internal connections is where the vertical cross hair intersects the top flange FT IISS Center of left support to work line of connection based on control dim fl 3 Web connection is 1 Square with flange 2 Vertical 1 The true length dimension to the work point of the connection from the previous connection is calculated based on the input method selected when the left end was detailed In this example it is based on control dim 1 If the beam is sloping the connection can be vertical or square with the flanges If you insert an internal connection and erase it you must reset the tail dimension Pick Reset Tail Dim from the BEAMS pulldown menu or toolbar and select a number in the Conn Set dimension Delete tail to 1 2 Conn list box The numbers represent the connections in the order in which they were detailed The highest number is the last connection Selecting a number will display a ae dimension in the box above the Delete button This is the tail dimension for that Delete connection Pick Delete to reset the tail dimension to the connection number shown Sa above the one selected This will delete the connection selected and all others
273. ill not change the dimension text It will only change the xdata Use Replace Tail Dimension under AutoSD gt CNC gt Change Hole Data or Replace Dimension under Modify Change to change both Length text and Length xdata CHANGE NOTCH D This will change the vertical distance from the top flange of the beam to the top edge of the burn for a notch in the web CHANGE SETBACK This will change the distance from the clip to the end of the web CHANGE SIDE This is for flange thinning burns and will change which side of the web the flange will be cut Available choices are 1 NS 2 FS and 3 Both sides 211 CNC Chapter 16 AutoSD Steel Detailing a TYP CHANGE SURFACE This will change the surface the burn is in Available choices are 1 Top flange or Lower leg 2 Bottom Flange or Upper leg and 3 Web CHANGE TYPE This will change the type of burn Available choices are Bevel Prep Beveled Flg Block Contour Cutout End Notch Flg Notch Flg Thinning Rat Hole Skewed Cut and Slot CHANGE LAYER If you change the mark of an existing detail to make a new one you MUST create a new layer with the name of the layer the same as the new mark prefixed with CNC_ set it current and change all entities of the new detail to that layer You can do all of this with this command If the layer name does not exist it will be created if it does exist it will be set current Entities o
274. implex The bigfonts asdfrc96 asdtxt and asdtxt96 are used with the AutoCAD font txt The bigfonts cvspro and cvspro are used with the font cvspro supplied by AutoSD To change fonts use the STYLE command Command STYLE Text style name or lt ASD BKAP gt Existing Style Font file lt romans asdros96 gt romans asdsim96 Big font asdsim96 shx Height lt 0 0 gt Enter Width factor lt 0 86 gt Enter Obliquing angle lt 0 0000 gt Enter Backwards lt N gt Enter Upside down lt N gt Enter Vertical lt N gt Enter ASD BKAP is now the current text style The different fonts are shown below Style ASD FONT font SIMPLEX ASDSIMPX Style ASD BKAP font SIMPLEX ASDSIM96 Style ASD FONT font ROMANS ASDROMNS Style ASD BKAP font ROMANS ASDROS96 Style ASD FONT font TXT ASDTXT Style ASD BKAP font TXT ASDTXT96 New font Do not include any spaces 11 3 1 5 37 19915 41315 7 157 16 8 16 4 16 8 16 2 16 8 16 4 16 8 16 64 ABCDEF GHIUJKLMNOPQRS TUVWXYZ 1234567890 l161831614916387161291698 11163413 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 6781916764 liglg 1614 16 162716981116341316 78116764 ABCDEF GHIJKLMNOPQRS TUVWXYZ 1234567890 92 AutoSD Steel Detailing Dimensioning Chapter 6 ABCDEF GHIJKLMNOPQRS TUVWXYZ 1234567890 Style ASD_FONT font ROMANS ASDROMN ea UWAR WA Vi 6 1 67 1 67 54 Style ASD BKAP font ROMANS ASDROM96 ABCDEFGHIUKLMNOPQ
275. ing beams braces CMU walls columns end view of shape on column girts joist ladders and stairs The views can be drawn to various scales independent of the scale that your drawing is set up to Input is entered in bays One bay is the area between two adjacent columns Bays are created from left to right Main dialog box Open Lets you select existing elevation files to open for editing Save As Lets you save a file that has not yet been saved or lets you save an existing file to a new file name An elevation cannot be drawn until the file is saved View title This is name of the elevation view and will be printed below the elevation detail If you want additional text lines printed under the title separate the text lines with the character Example COLUMN LINE A SCALE 4 17 0 Will be printed as COLUMN LINE A SCALE 4 17 0 Note that the inch marks will be removed from the printed text The main dialog box is divided into 4 sections Left side Right side Top center and Bottom center Left side and Right side sections These are for entering the column information of the current bay The first edit box is for the optional column grid If no grid designation is needed just leave this box blank You can have up to three tiers The Piece mark edit box is for the shipping mark of the column of the currently selected tier If no piece mark is needed just leave this box blank The Top of Col EL is the
276. ings Ribbon Not included These are for placing common notes in response to a text prompt Most of these are for the description of material for the shop bill such as pipe and grating They will not work when using the text command 67 Draw Chapter 3 AutoSD Steel Detailing TURNBUCKLE Pulldown AutoSD gt Draw gt Turnbuckle Toolbar Miscellaneous Ribbon AutoSD I gt Miscellaneous area This will draw the side view of a turnbuckle The insertion point is the center of the turnbuckle The rotation is the angle from the insertion nm point to the center of the threaded end The scale is affected by the ve E dr AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command WEB HOLE Pulldown AutoSD gt Draw gt Web Hole Toolbar Miscellaneous Ribbon AutoSD I gt Miscellaneous This is used for putting holes in the web of a beam or other member where the thickness of material is drawn as 1 2 thick It will put only one hole at a time The scale is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command WELD SYMBOLS Pulldown AutoSD gt Draw gt Weld Menu Toolbar Miscellaneous pon ne Aer Ribbon AutoSD I gt Weld he ne 7 Size Strength z P X Length Depth 3 Pitch Spacing 12 This progr
277. ion This leader command can place a single line or multiple lines of text while you view the text on screen as it is typed It can have one leader or multiple leaders Leader start to point to point Enter text NO HOLES WITHIN Enter text 3 OF HOLES Enter text 2nd Leader start point Press Enter to exit Enter w Revision Pulldown AutoSD gt Dimension gt w revision Toolbars Dimension I Leader Ribbon AutoSD I gt Dimension This leader command will place a single line of text with a delta revision symbol under the text It can have one leader or multiple leaders Leader start to point to point Leader note OK Revision label 1 Leader start point Press Enter to exit Enter 98 AutoSD Steel Detailing Beams Chapter 7 Chapter 7 Beams All programs in this chapter are under the AutoSD gt BEAMS pulldown menu Beams toolbar and AutoSD II gt Beams ribbon menu F Cuts Copes and Blocks Automatically calculate end reaction rows of bolts block sizes flange Flange Gage Leader Note width cuts minus dimension tail dimensions overall length cut length YE Property symbol E Left End Connection Create configurations for each customer that are automatically loaded when El Internal Connection Main Am Internal Connection Aux I Right End Connection you open a drawing E Angle beam Girts Sag Rod Plates Top view Skewed connection Reset Tail
278. is is the space from the right ae aH side of the left post or picket to the left side of A Left space 0 0502 the first picket to the right Enter a value and Right space is 2 3 8 press the tab key and the right space is Cancel calculated and printed underneath When selecting the upper and lower borders select the face of the object the pickets are welded to When selecting the side borders select the center of the object on each side Command Select all boundary lines These may be selected in any order Pick dimension line location Pick a point Command at Mesh Insert This program draws a mesh panel within the lines selected There is no limit to the number of lines for the border Any of the boundary lines may be picked first but the remainder MUST be selected in a counterclockwise order Command Select all boundary lines picking a counterclockwise rotation Select objects 1 found 1 found 2 total Select objects 1 found 3 total 1 found 4 total Select objects Select objects Select objects Panel Mark A FT IISS Width of bars around perimeter 0108 FT IISS Size of openings in Mesh 0208 Rotation of mesh 0 45 Select 0 Attach with tabs Yes No Y 196 AutoSD Steel Detailing Rails Chapter 13 IISS Gap between post and bars 01 ma PANEL A 2 1118 3 5 g
279. ise eh rach siatantleeBeveaueuseees 105 HANGER cesio t st eigi 85 SEAT ANGLE SEAT PLATE ce 106 LOADS bes 86 INTERNAL CONNECTIONS MAIN and OBLIQUE TRIANGLES 86 AUX Gere 106 RIGHT TRIANGLES oseere 86 Connections sunset 106 ROLLED PLATE LENGTH 87 Left Center Rigbtuuussanssennetnsesnit 107 SECTIONAL PROPERTIES ceeeeceeeteees 87 Import connection rrrnrrnrrnrorrnnrvrrnnenrrvee 108 SELECT DIM TO ADD sssdrseeten 89 Vertical hole spacing 4 0 55 sciences sdenadees 111 SELECT LINE TO ADD sssesereessevesereseseresses 89 Add Symbol for Channel 1 sc 111 TOTAL WEIGHT sju eee as cease 90 ANGLE BEAM 355 ccccsacssasasnevstdelaeasetannsoantis 113 Number Of nervene eS 90 FINGER SHIM PLATE 113 Chapter 6 Dimensioning svvornvrrvnrnvnrnrvvnvsnene 91 VERTICAL PLATES vusisnt added 113 CUSTOM FONT visesang sesg e 91 WING PLATE side view n se 114 DIMENSIONS cna usinis 93 Plate Only or Plate and End View of Shape DIM TEX coat a Sal REE a SB ERE 114 DIMENSIONING arne a Gadceats 93 Plate amp End View of Shape errrrornrnrnr 114 Arrowheads uu omivssuvseinsssiesisisvee 94 Plate Only vupsarsegmnsmsannandrjnstt 114 DIMENSION LINE or SINGLE LINEAR Plate amp End View of Shape eee 115 DIMENSION ss 95 Plate Only on an existing W8 x 31 column CONTINUE DIMENSION eee 95 HEG Se 115 ARC DIMENSION osasse 95 Plate Only Skewed on Sloping Beam 115 ARC CONTINUE sisverssvassacertessnveatistsendeaseers 95 STIFFENER PLATE
280. k was SEE ae ES rotor alee selected with CNC xdata for clip angles Web leg 0 0300 WEB LEG ee eal For reference the web leg is the leg shown If holes are cot a oa in both legs then both Outstanding leg and Web leg 3 P check boxes must be checked If you uncheck a box the NE Poe xdata for the holes for that leg will be removed sl Boteage m Select mark saves the xdata to the current mark and lets sao Ahern ve you select another mark sms me mme MAIE re Er Write file creates a DSTV file If the file exist you are Er veis x given the option to replace the file or add the quantity to the existing file VETT OK saves the xdata to the current mark and closes the S Sae gli gt Nil se program art 3 Cancel cancels all changes and closes the program i Nl se pen The dialog box shown to the left will open if a mark was al mg selected with CNC xdata for split tees It functions in the same HERG lin Fe ES way as the EET ET dialog box pare E merar Se for clip i F TAL ssn eer reagan angles ee DE mer Selectman wiene 0 cancer above SKEWED WEB Er N far SE TAIL END grep RENE L SLOT ae CUT FLG TO 514 i TEXT PLINE To 3 WIDE SKEWED FLG FLANGE TH
281. king Input is in FT LISS x 2 0 1 4 ee POBITIVE i m i 7 6 3 1 Rotate Deck Deck Description 06x28GA Overall Length 7 06 Notch Depth 04 5 AN 7 3 06 2 Overall Width Offset 02 6 Left Stair Width 3 3 Decking Width 2 0 7 3 0 B 3 10 Notch Width 08 4 OK Cancel ONE DECK 1D1 ONE DECK 1D2 1 DECKS 1D3 ONE DECK 1D4 183 Stairs Chapter 12 AutoSD Steel Detailing Landing Frame Olet amp Right Leftside comers amp Extend Horiz Extend Vert amp Pan p Floor Material MK7 C Grating Select Gage Gage Optional Select C8x115 Mark mal Select MC12x10 6 pe Mark mb O OmitMK3 Select MC12x143 MI Mark mc I Omit MK4 Same as Select A Mark Laxaxt 4 Mark 205 TO OMIT HOLES 13 BACK OF i MIE STRINGE
282. l 0 0100 0 0100 0 0007 The dialog box for the right end is also used for the left end Many of the inputs will be disabled For this end type only inputs for 5 and 6 are active The image in the upper left corner indicates which portion of rail is being drawn End of rail is Open Splice The last mark was 1RRI1 Main mark 1HR1 Are marks RIGHT and LEFT Y N lt O gt lt N gt Enter 1345 Enter values for toe plate splice connection Enter 0 for B to omit holes in toe plate 6 SPA 4 2 4 pa NS Ba 10 Fjer 4 all aa la 1 29 PIPE x 26 0 ma 1HR1 ONE 11 PICKETS BAR farta x 1 10 mb 194 SECT A AutoSD Steel Detailing Rails Chapter 13 Quantity 1 Shop bill information on 1HR1 INE lt 16 gt Enter Description of 1 3 4 rail 1 8 O PIPE Piece mark for 1 8 O PIP Place shop bill text on FI Enter mark or use lt mg gt ma EA Detail Panel This program will detail and bill out a mesh panel FRE insert for sloping or level handrail If it is sloping it can be detailed sloped in either direction Enter 0 for the bevel for a level rail panel CFs S EDGE OF MESH SECT A Ho a
283. l An icon menu appears Pick the truss type Another icon menu appears Pick the chord and orientation A slide drawing is put on the screen of the truss type chord and orientation that you picked Command DECIMAL Load on slope member kip 55 een DECIMAL Area of slope member s 4 CANBER fl CAMBER AE MSR LDAR ONS VERT DECIMAL Load on vert member 80 det DECIMAL Area of vert member s 8 1 Single or 2 Double angles 1 2 lt 1 gt 2 FT IISS Input fl 8 06 FT IISS Input 42 6 03 FT IISS Camber 1 0008 FT IISS Camber 2 0010 FT IISS Input Bevel 02 FT IISS Input 3 04 FT IISS Min clearance 4 lt 1 2 gt Enter Mm 1 FT IISS Input A or lt ENTER gt to calculate Enter P i FT IISS Input 45 0108 FT IISS Input 5a lt 1 1 2 gt Enter FT IISS Input 6 02 FT IISS Input 6a lt 2 gt Enter 169 Trusses Chapter 11 AutoSD Steel Detailing INTEGER Input weld size in 16ths 7 lt 3 gt Enter Command REDRAW Finished At the prompt FT IISS Input A or lt ENTER gt to calculate you can input a dimension if you are checking a drawing made by someone else or you can press the enter key If you input a dimension the program will check to see if it works with the given clearance If it does fine
284. l Files Save If the stair has 6 treads or less the length will be drawn to scale otherwise you would need to check the box for Draw Length to Scale if you want to draw the stringer length to scale If you are saving CNC data and will have bolted bracing under the stair the far side stringer will need tails from the left end and the near side stringer from the right end of material 171 Stairs Chapter 12 AutoSD Steel Detailing Select Upper End Condition Select Lower End Condition mz e mm Cancel Cancel An icon menu is used when you click on Select under Connection at top Select Sloping Stringer Size O Australia O Canada O UK Europe USA Flanges c 12 v 207 v Angles v Pipes Hss Y STD O XxStg O Xx Stg Size 12 v x 0 109 w Thick O 14G Tubes Ts EN nd ee m2 x x 18 GAG 4 Cold Formed Insertion point Main mark 181 Are marks RIGHT and LEFT Quantity 1 Yes No lt N gt Enter Shop bill information on mark 1S1 Select
285. late size The mark may be part of the description text but is not required to be Example P 6x10 8x1 3 8 pa If it is part of the description it should be at the end of the text This is typically how the gusset plate program labels a plate If a description is not selected you will be asked for the plate width length and thickness For the width and length you can enter a numerical value or the letter S to select two points for determining the width and length Next you are asked for the grade of steel and quantity and then to verify the file name for the CNC data The next step is the select the plate and all holes and cutouts in the plate The last step is to add a bevel edge prep for weld if needed e Plates and all cutouts in plates must be made with closed mn Kg Wee polylines o liswa E e Round holes must be made with circles and can be concentric i GE Caeveles circles The outer circle establishes the diameter nae oe e Slotted holes must be made with a closed polyline Multiple CS polylines inside each other to fill in the slot must be at the same centers e All details of the plate must be drawn to scale and to the scale of the drawing no change scale allowed e Gusset plates and their clips drawn by the brace program may be used to create DSTV files e The gusset plate and holes may be selected using a window to se
286. late F will let the program calculate the tread width from the value entered for Tread Removing the check will force the program to use the value F for the tread width Delete This will delete the selected tread from the File names list Import This will allow you to import a tread from another TRDBILDR CFG file Rename This will allow you to rename a file name Saveas This will save an existing tread as a different file name making a copy of it Save This will save the current file selected Size all treads Values here are global one value for all treads All other values are saved for each tread Enter the Angle and Bar size using the custom text character for fractions Putting a check in the box for Calc horiz length will cause the horizontal support length to be calculated based on the tread width Putting a check in the box for Show dimensions will cause dimensions to be placed on one set of supports on the stringer If the top icon for Supports is selected and you putting a check in the box for Draw blowup the program will draw a separate detail of the mitered support with dimensions at a larger scale Option E and L For nose type 3 Select E to enter dimension E for calculating angle L Select L to enter the angle L for calculating dimension E Main mark This option will put a main mark for the tread when drawing a Tread End View Sub mark This option will
287. lect all objects at once e CNC does not need to be turned on to use this program e Plates cannot be batch processed They must be processed manually one at a time The DSTV files are saved to a file with the same name as the piece mark The file name extension for DSTV files is set in your customer detail configuration These files will be saved in the same folder the drawings are in If a member with CNC data has a sub piece mark such as a stair or frame or if the main mark begins with a letter the DSTV file created will be the piece mark prefixed with the drawing number For the piece mark ma on sheet 43 the DSTV file name will be 43ma If the mark is a right and left two DSTV files will be created 43maR and 43maL 220 AutoSD Steel Detailing CNC Chapter 16 Graphically Check DSTV file This will read a selected DSTV file and draw the web top bottom and rear view if required of the member to scale showing all holes and burns Channels will be drawn toed near side and upside down Holes will be labeled with an X and Y dimension X is the distance from the center of the hole to the left end Y is the distance from the reference axis For beam web holes this is either the top or bottom flange Beam Column and Brace holes in the flange is the flange centerline It is the heel for angles Edges that are beveled will be drawn thicker 8 SUB MARK This command is for labeling
288. les there will be a minimum of two fillers for braces over 6 0 long and a minimum of one filler for braces less than 6 0 The 6 0 control is from hole to hole Dimensions Al A2 A3 and A4 may be 0 zero Number of rows of bolts may be 0 zero Enter 5 as the same value as 5a and negative to calculate a gusset with a single line of holes offset from the work line The number of bolts may be different at each end of the brace This is to allow one end to be bolted and the other end to be welded If the end information is read from files one end may have a single line and the other end may have a double line of bolts Offsets 8 and 9 for drawing braces may be entered as positive or negative A positive dimension will offset the work points in the direction shown and a negative dimension will offset the work points in the opposite direction 1 can be 0 to draw a single brace in the vertical position 2 can be 0 to draw a single brace in the horizontal position 134 AutoSD Steel Detailing Bracing Chapter 8 2 Welded Brace This is for drawing a brace with the ends mitered to fit against other members in a rectangular frame Command Pick AutoSD or AutoSD II gt Bracing gt Draw gt
289. levation by 2 1 2 change the lower elevation to be the same as the higher one and increase the first dim from elev down by 2 1 2 This will reduce the clutter of dimensions when the column is detailed The large box in the middle of the screen shows the type and dimensions for the connection Conn is a pop down list of all available connections Pick the box or the arrow at the right end and the list will pop down Select the connection desired and the appropriate fields will be displayed below and a reference picture will be shown to the right Below Conn are the dimensions for the selected connection Enter the dimensions in the format indicated in the title of the main screen The example shown is FT IISS Press the tab key after each dimension and the cursor will jump down to the next dimension to enter Dimensions for FROM ELEV DOWN and FROM ELEV UP are entered as a list of dimension separated by commas Do not include any spaces Example 03 03 03 03 Selecting a value under Rows will automatically fill in the list of dimensions for the number of rows selected If wing plates extend through a tube or pipe column you should list the plates that extend all the way through first If you only have two connections at a given elevation and they are on adjacent sides 90 degrees to each other the connection listed first will extend through so it should have the most rows If one of the plates is skewed it must be listed last Use the Move
290. lines dimension line gap and default text height that will be set when you create a new drawing you must change the values here If you want to change any of these values after the drawing is setup you change them in the Dimension Style dialog box for the AUTOSD dimension style 55 6 7i 82 ASDRAM96 To change the font pick the Font button Select one of the seven th ol 38 al 146 2 3 6 1116 218 346 fonts shown in the icon menu The name of the font is listed at 5 6 6 7746 5 6 6 7716 the bottom of each slide and will be shown to the right of the ASDROM96 ASDROS96 Font button The font selected will become the default font used 1 1 i 53 2 6 alv ale 3 ER ale aH cho os ASDSIM96 ASDTXT96 when you set up a new drawing A different font may be saved with AutoSD SDS 2 SteelCAD and Xsteel lis 2b SE 4 4F 1746 2 8 3518 at Be 68 Tie amp 5916 6 7716 CVSPRO OK Cancel SCALE 1 16 1 3 32 1 TEXT HEIGHT and PLOT SCALES In order for the text to appear the same size when plotted using different drawing scales the text height must change with each scale AutoSD will make this change automatically when you set up your drawing The text will be 1 8 in height when plotted You can however change this setting each time you use the text command The chart below shows the correct text height and plot scale for each drawing scale ME
291. ll always be at least one file If you have an older version that used the detvar cfg file you can import those files and use them Older versions had separate detvar cfg files saved in each job folder This version has all of the configurations stored in one file called custvar cfg located in your autosd folder The metric version is called custvarm cfg You can also import and export individual configurations Select the configuration you want to use and pick Set Current to save the setting in the drawing Detail variables configuration Detail variables Material list Shop bill Color list Current setting is AutoSD r File name BINZ Charles Leonard SS Cooper Stee Customer CYSPro 0444 Addison 11x17 E Delete Rename Edit Save as Export Import Set Current Select a configuration file and pick the EDIT button The Customer Detail Configuration box pops up If you did not purchase the beam program the Columns and Standard Clips buttons will be disabled Customer Detail Configuration Configuration file AutoSD r Mark Type COUNTRY DESIGN v Save CNC data in drawing DSTY file name extension v Tail all holes SHEAR BARS INC r Dimensions Ticks only Arrows
292. lliCAD IntelliCAD is no longer supported You should upgrade to AutoCAD 14 or later or Bricscad Pro 10 or later 229 Installation Appendix AutoSD Steel Detailing 1 0 AutoSD Steel Detailing Version 2015 Pulldown Menu Diagram RI ii et JSS seas v amp N v Fi om D D fe 4 gt N gt Cc D E S wn O sed 3 oo oO be 3 O gt S Oo D ond Oo Q 2 E p bo AS 5 3 Cc D E f z 2 So 5 a Oo uv T O up lt z fm gt 2 v D lt is 24 x 36 and the scale is 1 1 TAG 234 1 11 16 230 AutoSD Steel Detailing Installation Appendix A MT Gir hanka HHH iaraa Archer Anchor Bok Belt v r te Bett Expancien tren ep tated 1 0 AutoSD Steel Detailing Version 2015 ea RRR RT Ribbon Menu Diagram il 33 2 v N N v lt c D fo u N 3 Cc D E a Ee N Oo w 3 oO 3 fe gt E Oo D w Oo Q xe E p aD As 5 gt Cc D E Cc fe Re Ke x Oo xo T O up E z po 2 v D lt ke 24 x 36 and the scale is 1 231 Installation Appendix A AutoSD Steel Detailing 232 AutoSD Steel Detailing Support Files Appendix B Appendix B Support Files ASD CFG LSP This file is created when you install AutoSD It is created in your C autosd support f
293. lt 3 8 gt Enter Width of plate should be 0 6Fy lt 7 gt text on LINE lt 11 gt Enter Shop bill information on mark aa H k for filler plate pa 4S 4325424 19 Enter Sub assembly mark for center plate pb First Brace is drawn Shop bill information on mark pb 133 Bracing Chapter 8 AutoSD Steel Detailing Insertion point at left end of brace 2 Pick a point for the upper left end of brace The last mark was 1D1 Are marks RIGHT and LEFT Yes No lt N gt Enter ab Sub assembly mark for brace ab Shop bill information on mark 1D2 Place shop bill text on LINE lt 18 gt Enter Shop bill information on mark ab H Main mark 1D2 Quantity 1 5 9 46 I 4 348 A325x214 14 6 3718 Sub assembly mark for filler plate lt pa gt Enter 1D2 Shop bill information on mark pa Insertion point at left end of brace 3 Pick a point for the upper left end of brace The last mark was 1D2 Are marks RIGHT and LEFT Yes No lt N gt Enter Sub assembly mark for brace ac Shop bill information on mark 1D3 Place shop bill text on LINE lt 24 gt Enter ONE Second Brace is drawn 135014 1 Main mark 1D3 Quantity 1 5 638 I Shop bill information on mark ac H Sub assembly mark for filler plate lt pa gt sisi Shop bill information on mark pa 103 ONE Command Third Brace is drawn NOTE For double ang
294. ly with AutoSD gt Dimension gt DIM TEXT than with the TEXT or DTEXT command It works like the text commands except the input is FT IISS only REP REPLACE TEXT TXT Pulldown AutoSD gt Modify gt Replace Text Toolbar Change Ribbon AutoSD I gt Change Replace text is similar to change text except that you are asked only for the new text and all of the old text that was picked is replaced with the new text I RELOCATE TEXT Pulldown AutoSD gt Modify gt Relocate Text Toolbar Change Ribbon AutoSD I gt Change Relocate text is for moving dimensions that have been mirrored and need to be moved back to the other side of the dimension line Multiple selections are possible using window or crossing or select one at a time FE ul Scale of Drawing Sp Vee Pulldown AutoSD gt Modify gt Scale of Drawing Sait es Toolbar Change ME Ribbon AutoSD I gt Change en dr Meg The Scale of Drawing command will enable you to draw to a different 111 15 5 scale in the same drawing After picking Scale of Drawing you are asked jonr former to Select the scale from the dialog box Selecting a scale will change aaa i the drawing to the scale selected The scale that you select will appear in i AR the left end of the status bar O Typer O Tyren Commands affected by the Scale of Drawing command are Distance CE Object info dimension commands and Offset This will e
295. m web and flanges on gusset plates on stairs and on columns All Drawings This will create a DSTV file for each clip angle or tee on all drawings in a selected folder If a mark is used more than one time the quantity will be increased for each mark found Because of this increase in quantity you should not run this more than once on a set of drawings If you must repeat the command you should delete all existing NC files from the folder or copy the drawings to a temp folder and run the program on that folder 219 CNC Chapter 16 AutoSD Steel Detailing PR Current Drawing This will create a DSTV file for each clip angle or tee on the current drawing If a mark is used more than one time the quantity will be increased for each mark found Single mark Select a clip angle or tee mark and a dialog box will open showing the CNC data for the clip tee If no CNC data is saved with the mark you have the option of adding the data to it Pick Write file and a DSTV file will be created for the clip tee Pick Select Mark to select another clip tee Do not include the R or L in the mark if the clip tee are right amp left It will be added when the file is written Pick OK to close the box Any changes made will be saved to the clip tee mark Pick Cancel to close the box without saving any changes Write DSTV file for Plates The program will ask you to select the plate mark or press Enter to input the mark and p
296. mark mb Total sub quantity 1 Command Finished If the stringer had been drawn going up to the left the tail dimensions would be from the upper end Either way you draw the stair the tails will be from the end selected in the main dialog box If you checked the box to draw the stringer length to scale the tail dimensions for the treads will be put on the detail instead of in a chart If you are saving CNC data and the stair length is not to scale the tail chart will be used by default The CNC xdata will be associated with the tail text instead of hole entities If you need to change the tail dimensions in the chart you must use the Replace Dimension command instead of a text editor if you saved CNC data so the xdata will be changed If you would like additional dimensions on the stair you can use the dimension command and use the defaults given since the end of the stair is drawn to scale The stair is also drawn to the exact bevel Blocks are dimensioned to end of member or to clip as set in your Beam configuration Block length is based on Clear dim added for block length as set in your Beam configuration The Beam Configuration can be set even if you did not purchase the Beam and Column package Clips and plates for header connections clips at all upper end stringer connections and clips at lower end of horizontal stringer are by default 1 column and 2 rows You can make them 2 columns and 1 row by entering the two gages separated by a
297. mber of equal spaces you can enter a real number for the spacing or the letter N upper or lower case to enter the Number of equal spaces The spacing is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command Joist Input is in FT ISS JOIST SIDE or END VIEW Pulldown AutoSD gt Erection Tools gt Joist Side or End View Toolbar Erection Tools Ribbon AutoSD I gt Erection Tools sizes are H J or K LH or DLH Girder AAA and Other If Other is selected you will This program draws the side or end view of open web joist and joist girders Joist be prompted to enter the size of the top chord bottom chord and web member 40 AutoSD Steel Detailing Erection Tools Chapter 2 MARK QTY Side View You must pick the insertion point for the bottom of the seat at the edge of support and a point for the length of the joist before you can enter all of the variables For the location of the end of seat from the insertion point seat length location of holes top chord extension and bottom chord extension you can enter a length or pick a point There are two types of top chord extensions The one selected will be shown with a black background End
298. mple of the top portion of a typical shop bill The sequence portion is placed on a separate layer so that it can be frozen or thawed as needed without having to create a different shop bill drawing This layer will be thawed automatically if the shop bill configuration includes at least one sequence It will be frozen automatically if the shop bill configuration does not include any sequences Now that you have the shop bill drawn let s change the color of the lines to red You may use any color you want Command CHANGE Select objects Pick all lines but not the text selected f found Do not pick the border Select objects PROP Properties lt change point gt COLOR New entity color lt BYLAYER gt RED Properties lt change point gt Enter Fa CONFIGURING SHOP BILL The items that can be configured are as follows e Quantity of main mark e Main mark 1B1 3C1 etc e Quantity of sub assembly mark e Sub assembly mark aa pa ma etc e Unit quantity for sub marks e Description main piece and sub piece e Length in feet or mm e Length in inches For architectural and decimal units only e Shape designation W L PL etc e Mill order I D number for main mark e Grade e Remarks e Weight e Sequence quantity for main mark 153 Shop Bill Chapter 10 AutoSD Steel Detailing Pick AutoSD gt Customer Configuration from the pulldown menu and pick Shop bill to change the settings in a configuration
299. n wc the mark or with the command attedit or battman L LOWER LEG LEF Angles Angles may be detailed in any orientation The picture to the left indicates which leg is the Upper and which is the Lower leg If the angle legs are not equal the description in the piece mark attribute must be entered as L Upper leg x Lower leg x thickness HOLES The data information saved with each hole will be the face the hole is in the gage of the face which side from the face center line the hole is in the hole size the tail dimension whether the member is a Beam Angle Column or Brace which end the tail is from and which edge the gage is from Xdata for Column and Brace is treated differently from other members because holes in the web are measured from the centerline and holes in the web of other members are measured from the flange or heel Since the xdata is stored in the hole entity if you erase a hole you erase the xdata for that hole Holes with xdata attached will be drawn using a solid polyline Holes without xdata attached will be drawn using several lines close together This way you can tell if xdata has been saved with a hole just by looking at the hole ASSOCIATE HOLES with TAIL This program is used after you insert a hole for an existing tail dimension to tie the hole tail dimension xdata to the tail dimension text When a tail dimension is placed to a hole the text is associated wit
300. n layers ASD_SECT ASD_MARK HIDDEN and HIDEN will not change layers These entities include main marks sections marks and hidden lines and should remain on these layers CHECK DATA All Drawings This will extract the CNC xdata from all drawings in a selected folder Current Drawing This will extract the CNC xdata from the current drawing Single object This will extract the CNC xdata from the details selected Select the main mark under the detail for beams columns and single member bracing Select the sub mark for stair stringers and double angle bracing The CNC data information will be written to a text file in a format that is easy to read The file name will be CNC_CHECK txt and will be put in the folder the drawing is in Drawing 1 Mark 1B1 Member W16X26 Length 21 10 1 2 Quantity 1 Grade A36 Total number of holes 20 Holes Face Tail Dim Gage Diameter Side Tail from Gage from Web 1 1 2 32 13 16 Left end Top flg Web 1 1 2 6 13 16 Left end Top flg Web 1 1 2 9 13 16 Left end Top flg Web 4 1 2 3 13 16 Left end Top flg Web 4 1 2 6 13 16 Left end Top flg Web 4 1 2 9 13 16 Left end Top flg 212 AutoSD Steel Detailing CNC Chapter 16 Web 5 11 1 2 3 13 16 Left end Top flg Web 5 11 1 2 6 13 16 Left end Top flg Web 6 5 3 13 16 Left end Top flg Web 6 5 6 13 16 Left end Top flg Web 9
301. n number to layer ss gt xf name is unchecked the cloud and delta will be drawn on the ee Pr Nag current layer The delta will be the color of the current layer and zzz not the color set in the configuration Rectangular clouds will be drawn to the angle of the snap angle setting a CI SAFETY GATE Pulldown AutoSD gt Erection Tools gt Ladders Gate Ribbon AutoSD I gt Erection Tools ee This program draws a safety gate using a polyline from three points picked and a given opening size The scale is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command HINGE POINT 77 CLOSE POINT WIDTH gt DIRECTION lt SHAFT OPENING Pulldown AutoSD gt Erection Tools gt Shaft Opening Toolbar Erection Tools Ribbon AutoSD I gt Erection Tools SHAFT LENGTH l CENTER POINT SHAFT WIDTH LENGTH DIRECTION kr This program draws a shaft by supplying the shaft dimensions start point and orientation Shafts can be drawn from a corner center or midpoint of an edge and at any angle The scale is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command CORNER POINT STAIR PLAN 0 Pulldown AutoSD gt Stairs gt Erection gt Complete Plan gt Pulldown AutoSD gt Stairs gt Erection gt Partial Plan Ribbon AutoSD II gt Stairs The partial plan is shown to the left with a
302. nable the new search path Pick the Apply button 224 AutoSD Steel Detailing Installation Appendix A AutoCAD Release 2000 2013 configuration From the pulldown menu select TOOLS and then Options or type CONFIG and press enter A dialog box is displayed Select Files Double click on Support file search path Select Add Add the following line in the newly created box C AUTOSD SUPPORT Where C is the drive where AutoSD is installed AUTOSD is the name you gave for the AutoSD folder Pick the Apply button AutoCAD Release 2014 and later configuration From the pulldown menu select TOOLS and then Options or type CONFIG and press enter A dialog box is displayed Select the Files tab Double click on Support file search path or pick the plus sign next to it Select Add and add the following line in the newly created box C AUTOSD SUPPORT Where C is the drive where AutoSD is installed AUTOSD is the name you gave for the AutoSD folder Pick the Apply button You can add the following to your Trusted Locations to avoid constant warnings about loading files or you can disable the warning feature To add folders to Trusted Locations This is for the full version only not the LT version of AutoCAD Double click on Trusted Locations or pick the plus sign next to it Repeat the following steps for each folder below If you did not purchase the complete AutoSD Steel Detailing program s
303. nable you to TT Edit Chapter 4 AutoSD Steel Detailing draw to different scales in the same drawing when using the OFFSET command SCALE OF OBJECTS Pulldown AutoSD gt Modify gt Scale Of Objects Toolbar Change Ribbon AutoSD I gt Change This is for changing objects from one scale to another This command can be real useful if you draw or insert a section to one scale and decide that it needs to be bigger or smaller If the check boxes for text and arrows are left unchecked the size of text and arrows will remain unchanged after scaling This function also works in Paperspace by changing the zoom scale of the selected viewport SCALE OF BLOCKS SOLIDS TEXT Pulldown AutoSD gt Modify gt Scale Of Blocks Solids Text Toolbar Change Ribbon AutoSD I gt Change This command is similar to the Scale of Drawing command except the base point is the insertion point of the solid block or text When you pick this command you are prompted for Which items to scale All BLocks Solids Text Type the letter of the choice shown by the capitol letter and then select the objects Arrow heads and ticks are solids You are then asked to input a scale factor If you enter 2 the items picked will be made twice as big and will be scaled out from their individual insertion points LAYERS CHANGE OBJECT S LAYER Pulldown AutoSD gt Format gt Change Object s Layer Ribbon AutoSD I gt Utilities This will change all object
304. ng The designation does not have to be part of the mark but is used to separate the descriptions from one another The values that determine which mark will be used in the beam program are Bolt dia C C in OSL Shop Weld Shop Bolt and Staggered The angle size shown for Size 1 will be used up to the maximum rows selected The angle size shown for Size 2 will be used starting with the minimum rows selected If the Max rows is blank the angle size shown for Size 1 will be used for all rows and Size 2 will be disabled The angle size configured will be used in the shop bill when a standard mark is used and will also be used to draw the clip to scale The first leg size will be the outstanding leg The second leg size will be placed against the web of the beam You can enter the angle description manually or pick Select and choose an angle from the list that pops up The next row contains options you can turn on or off by checking or un checking the option Designation and Gage are global settings and apply to all marks For example you cannot have some marks with a gage and some marks without a gage Prefix and Suffix however are applied separately to each angle The row below these options labeled Set Order is for arranging the order of the components of the mark To change the order select the label you want to move The current position will be shown in the Position drop down list and in the Label Position box to the rig
305. ng instructions are similar for Beams Braces CMU wall End Views Girts Joist Ladders and Stairs The top of the dialog box will indicate which bay you are in by listing the column grids and the bay number The default will be the current bay in the main dialog box You can change bays by picking the Next Bay and Prev Bay buttons Pick Add to add a member A dialog box will pop up for you to select a member size and elevation The elevations listed under Main Elevations will be in this dialog box for selecting or you can enter a different elevation in the edit box If the member is sloping simply put a different elevation at each end The Change button lets you change the size and or elevation of the currently selected member The Delete button will remove the currently selected member The size and elevations will be displayed in the list box Beams If you have a beam attached to only one column you need to put a check in Stub Beam box and select either On Left Col or On Right Col of the current bay Next select which side of the column the beam is on and enter the Length of beam in the edit box This is the distance from the center line of the column to the end of the beam If you have a beam that extends over the top of a column you need to put a check in the Cantilever box Next select which column the beam cantilevers and enter the Length of beam in the edit box This is
306. ng the Clear button will clear all selections and labels SAVE RESTORE Weld Symbol Save amp Restore Description Select Symbol 3 16 3 12 TYP 3 16 312 TYP Pox Save Restore Delete This button opens another dialog box that allows you to save delete or restore a weld symbol The symbol in the main dialog window is shown in a window in this box Click on the box to the right of Description to save this symbol Type in a name for the symbol press enter and click the Save button The name will be displayed in the Select Symbol list box and the configuration will be saved in the file weldsym dat You can use any characters in the name and the name can be any length If you have some names in the list box you can restore one of these by selecting it from the list box The window is updated to display the selected symbol Pick the Restore button and you are 69 Draw Chapter 3 AutoSD Steel Detailing returned to the main dialog box and the weld symbol settings will be set to those defined by the configuration you restored SETTINGS Pers Weld Symbol ASD DRAW This button opens another dialog box that allows you to H change the layer the symbol is drawn on the block used for Awek pe se pre the arrow head
307. nger connection options are disabled 1 is from face of CMU to back of wall member 2 is from top of floor to top of header 3 is from top of wall member to top of floor 37 Erection Tools Chapter 2 AutoSD Steel Detailing 4 is floor thickness A is from back of header to center of holes if the frame type is mitered and the header to stringer connection is holes Plan Dimensions shown in plan for the landing 5 amp 6 are from back of frame end member to end of wall and header members 7 amp 8 are from back of built up frame end member to back of stringer or from back of wall member to ends of mitered stringer Only one end at each corner should extend past for a mitered frame so one dimension at each corner should be 0 9 amp 10 are from back of stringers to edge of floor opening or face of CMU walls 11 is width of stairs 12 is from edge to edge of floor opening or face to face of CMU walls 13 amp 14 are the thickness of the CMU walls These can be 0 for no walls 15 is from the column center line to the inside face of the CMU wall The outside line of the CMU end wall is the center of the column line Enter 0 for 15 for no CMU wall The right side of the dialog box is for entering the landing member sizes and selecting which way the wall members are toed Stringer to Header Enter dimension 1 2 amp 3 to locate the holes for this connection Detail landing If landings are built up as a frame and
308. ngle Heg Values for leg 1 Values for leg 2 20007 ham 20000 psie p Anchors Holes LEx3x3 8 Diameter 0008 member press the minus key on the numeric lex keypad while the outline box is displayed to mr m E i a reduce the length the picture will be drawn The je EIE on default is to draw the length to scale and cannot cea E be drawn longer Se Anchors can be a deformed rod FB headed stud hooked rod or holes Nailer holes can be included with anchors You can also have an edge bar on top of the member if the member is an angle and is toed down or a channel The program will automatically calculate the number of studs or holes that will fit a given length The default for the first space is the same as the last space 53 Draw Chapter 3 AutoSD Steel Detailing Example Overall length 20 0 Spacing 1 6 returns 13 SPA 1 6 19 6 Total remainder is 6 First Space 0 03
309. nput is in FT II9 x Between Columns A and B inBay 1 Prev Bay Next Bay Member W 16 x 40 Elevation 110 Add Change Delete V Note size Short Side Vertical r Channels Tees Located from O Toed left Stem down Left column O Toed right Stem up O Right column Center of section to column 0 EE Cancel If the girts extend past the column line at the left end enter a distance for the Girt line under the left side image A negative distance will stop the girts short of the column line The girt line information will be available no matter which bay you are editing but will apply only After adding a girt select the Object Type It can be a Girt Door or Window The center image is changed to show which type is selected and the type is changed in the display list If a door or window is selected the Location Width of opening and Height of opening are enabled to the left of the display list and values must be entered for each The location can be from the left column or from the right column as selected under Located from After making all selections for one girt pick Add to add another girt The selections of the currently selected girt will be the defaults for the new girt Pick OK to save and close the Girt dialog box Pick Cancel to close the Gi
310. nrnnvvrrnnene 58 DDCOPY saker 75 LIST FIELD BOLTS in SHOP BILL 59 DATABASE EDITOR ossee 75 MEASURE 2D LINE ccscecseessescscrsseeconeess 59 EDIT ATTRIBUTE jg see 75 MULTILINE STY EE vvs 59 LINE TYPE Les 76 NAILER ANGLE Chanel 60 EINE WEIGHT ur 76 NAILER HOLES 42 61 RESET DWG SCALES ssvesccsssiaqnesivvetoenstitaves ta 76 NAILER PLATE cennosninrsiunsiinnaini 61 REPLACE DIMENSION oseese 76 OBJECF INFO ne 61 REPLACE TEXT Gees 77 ORFS EAs EE EE TE ETE 62 RELOCATE TEXT sangerne 77 OFFSET w Select Icon has yellow Scale of Drawing mun unmssumeinisinnsvi TT backoroumd rers niese ai 62 SCALE OF OBJECT Serce ouesse 78 OFFSET amp CHANGE LINE TYPE 62 SCALE OF BLOCKS SOLIDS TEXT 78 OSNAP se 62 PAYERS sg 78 PIPE see 63 CHANGE OBJECT S LAYER u scene 78 POUR STOP Shop Attached eee 63 FREEZE LAYER snigstrrresrstuiessreisrdersanssegnte 78 POUR STOP LG0s iiiaicnic stein elcnees 63 ISOLATE LAYER sea 78 RECTANGIS ae 64 SET EAN ERs SAN 79 ROTATE CROSSHAIRS ossee 64 THAW ALL LAYERS oeer 79 ROOF FRAMES i gies ehicieie agents iteeserceaems te 64 Chapter 5 Decimal amp FT IISS Calculators 81 SCALE SHAPE sn 65 ARCS sr 81 SHAPES SS 65 SE SEE AER Aa 81 AutoSD Steel Detailing Contents CAMBER on nen 83 Degrees sciieisiitas pie ahaha oleae 102 DECIMAL to FEET FEET to DECIMAL 84 TAOS als 102 EXTEND WEIGHT suse 84 PARTS 102 LOCATE WEIGHT COLUMN 85 T connection 3 c
311. nsions are added using the DECIMAL format the answer will be in inches If decimal dimensions are added using the FT USS format the answer will be in architectural units with the decimal dimensions representing inches This can be used to convert a number by selecting only one number to add SELECT LINE TO ADD Pulldown AutoSD gt Calculator gt Select Line to Add gt Decimal Pulldown AutoSD gt Calculator gt Select Line to Add gt Architectural Toolbar Calculator Ribbon AutoSD I gt Miscellaneous This command will calculate the total length of all lines and polylines picked You may select the lines one at a time or use crossing or window or a combination of each The length is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command 89 Calculator Chapter 5 AutoSD Steel Detailing TOTAL WT TOTAL WEIGHT Pulldown AutoSD gt Calculator gt Total Weight Toolbar Calculator Ribbon AutoSD I gt Miscellaneous This command will total all of the weights selected and write the total in the shop bill Number of risers Pulldown AutoSD gt Calculator gt Number of risers Ribbon AutoSD I gt Miscellaneous This command will ask for the height from floor to floor and then a riser height to try After entering the riser height you are given the number of risers the actual rise height required and any gain or lose You are again prompted for the number of risers using the previou
312. nt for the leader line and continue picking points Press Enter after selecting the last point and the note will be added to the end of the line If the first leader segment crosses any lines you will be asked if you want to select lines to omit arrowheads If you answer No arrows will be put at each intersection between the first leader segment and each line it crosses If you are saving CNC data you are prompted to Select objects You should select all the holes that this note references The CNC data will be automatically updated This note is NOT associated with the holes If you change the note the hole data will NOT be updated REPLACE TAIL DIMENSION Pulldown AutoSD gt Modify Toolbar Change Ribbon AutoSD I gt Change This program is used to change the tail dimension text If the text is p44 associated with some holes the tail dimensions stored as xdata for the holes will also be changed The tail dimension text will only be associated with holes that the dimension is for In the picture shown to the left the 2 9 1 2 dimension text is associated only with the two holes on the line the text is on The other two holes have no association with any dimension text If you change the dimension text you will need to use the command Change Tail xdata to change the xdata dimension 2 919 located under Modify Change as Replace Dim T stored with the other two holes at 3 3 1 2 The same program is also BURN
313. of the USB lock 1 Install the software before installing the USB lock 2 Connect the USB lock to any open USB port Start AutoSD If you can detail an anchor bolt you have attached the hardware lock and configured AutoCAD properly Starting a NEW drawing To start a new drawing start AutoCAD or BricsCAD If AutoCAD or BricsCAD is already running select Files and New Select Use a Template In the Select a Template window select autosd dwt and pick OPEN If autosd dwt does not show in the template list it can be found in C autosd support Select OK Open or Finish Run Setup from the AutoSD gt Format pulldown menu dialog box is displayed to select the units scale and paper size You must save the drawing before you can use AutoSD commands This must be done before you start drawing This template file is set up to a scale of 1 1 using architectural units on a paper size of 24 x 36 You can create other template files by running SETUP from the AutoSD gt Format pulldown menu to set the units scale and paper size if it is to be different You can also insert your customer s shop bill and create a template for each customer This will eliminate the need to run SETUP each time you start a new drawing Pick Files from the pulldown menu and pick Save As Select Save as file type at the bottom of the dialog box and select Drawing template file Change the file name and folder where it will be saved and pick OK Inte
314. old the CNC data for that piece These files will be saved in the same folder the drawing is in If the main mark or sub mark for a detail with CNC data starts with a letter instead of a number the CNC file name will start with the drawing number The CNC file name for detail A on sheet 3 will be 3A Marks can be rights and lefts If you use Opposite hand for a mark the quantity must include G or G for a left Tail dimension text will be associated with the holes that the tail dimension is for If you change the tail dimension text using the command Replace Dim under Modify Change the tail dimension stored in the xdata will also be changed If you have two sets of holes and tail dimension text to only the first hole the xdata for the second set of holes will NOT be changed when you change the tail dimension text You must change the tail dimension stored in the 207 CNC Chapter 16 AutoSD Steel Detailing xdata of the other holes with the command Change Tail xdata or use the Edit Data command All tail dimensions must go to end of material MAIN MARK The Main mark will be a block with attributes for the mark quantity member size and length UPPER LEG The member size and length attributes will be invisible If you edit the 7 member size or length on the description line of the detail you will also HE need to edit this information in the main mark tag by double clicking o
315. older Previous versions created this file on the root of drive C That file is no longer used and may be deleted Below are the typical contents of C autosd support asd_cfg Isp setvar MENUECHO 0 setvar CMDECHO 0 setq asd_drive C The drive AutoSD is on setq asd_dir Autosd The name of the AutoSD folder setq asd_path C Autosd The path of the AutoSD folder princ If you move AutoSD you will need to edit this file to give the new location of AutoSD SHAPE DATABASE The data base is designed to make it easy to change existing shape properties or add new shapes The data files are located in your C autosd data folder The file asd_data cfg list the names of the files used for each shape There are three lines for each country of shapes supported An example of the three lines for US shapes is given below Line 1 US Line 2 C C HP W M W MC C MT WT S S ST ST WT WT FE TNS NORM RE MENE PE SES NN EST SJ PS PS HSS HSS Line 3 C us c dat HP us hp dat M us m dat MC us mc dat MT us mt dat S us s dat ST us st dat WT us wt dat CB us cb dat W us w dat TS us TS dat CF us cf dat SSC us cf dat DSC us cf dat UC us cf dat Z us cf dat PS us ps dat HSS us hss dat L us L dat The first line US is the country and must not be changed
316. om the elevation to the me top of the angle LENGTH is the cut length of the angle ANGLE IS TOED Up or Down is the direction of the vertical leg ELEVATION JOIST DEPTH x E hr 5 S DIST PL ger am co bra 5 Joist Plate This is a joist bottom chord stabilizer plate m rs wt HORIZ is the horizontal size of the plate VERT is the vertical size of the plate 3 THICKNESS is the thickness of the plate z HORIZ EDGE is the horizontal edge distance for the HOR EDGE hole VERT EDGE is the vertical edge distance for the hole DROP is the distance from the elevation down to the Z EDGE CAN BE O FOR NO HOLES bottom of the plate SEAT L 6 Seat Angle ELEVATION STIEF THICK GAGE is the distance from the center of the column to p the hole This can be 0 if no holes are required e VEW WILL HL C C is the center to center of holes NOT BE DRAWN VERT GA is the gage of the vertical leg This should be 0 if the angle is welded ES f VERT C C is the C C of holes in the vertical leg sce FoR yo es N bama Lee Ver ew o for wo rors n veroa ce LENGTH is the cut length of the angle SEAT DEPTH is the distance from the elevation down to the top of the angle STIFF THICK is the stiffener thickness if the stiffener SEAT PL option is selected
317. ome folders will not exist and AutoCAD will warn you of this In those cases do not include that folder Pick the ADD button and enter the following line in the newly created box or to avoid typo errors pick the Browse button and select the folder C AUTOSD C AUTOSD BM C AUTOSD BONUS C AUTOSD BRACE C AUTOSD CNC C AUTOSD COLUMN 225 Installation Appendix A AutoSD Steel Detailing C AUTOSD DATA C AAUTOSD DATA BACKUP C AUTOSD HIP amp V AL C AUTOSD LADDER C AUTOSD MENUS C AUTOSD RAILS C AUTOSD STAIR C AUTOSD SUPPORT C AUTOSD WELDS Pick the Apply button To disable the warning feature This is for the full version only not the LT version of AutoCAD Select the System tab Pick the Executable File Settings button Pick the option Load from all locations without displaying a warning Pick OK Pick the Apply button To disable the warning feature in AutoCAD LT Use a Windows registry editor such as regedit exe Search for SECURELOAD and change the value to 0 Bricscad 10 and later Pro Platinum configuration Type CONFIG and press enter A dialog box is displayed Expand Program options Expand Files Select Support File Search path Pick the button at the right end of the line with the three dots Double click on the blank line at the bottom of the Folder List and then pick the button at the right end of the line with the three dots Expand My Computer Expand Local
318. one have round holes and you want to use your standard bars in combination with round holes in wing plates you will need to make a copy of each description of standard bars one with short slots and one without short slots Checking Prefix will include the text shown in the Prefix edit box as part of the mark Checking Gage will include the listed gage for a given web thickness The gage will be in the format of inches and 16th s where 2 1 4 is 204 If you want the gage to be represented by a single digit enter it as 0001 for 1 or 0005 for 5 Checking Suffix will include the text shown in the Suffix edit box as part of the mark STANDARD CLIPS Clip file designation Angle description Shape OSL x Web leg x Thickness This box is for creating the marks besanten ATT set aE Selec Mexrows TS for standard bolted and welded ae a Pel_ sizez 205 Select Minrow T r Use the following clips setting the angle descriptions lg Designation ise 7 Gage and default c c for beam end sone connections Start in the upper left ue ess Poston FT corner with the designation The text shown in the designation list Label Position 5 Suffix li Designation 2 Prefix 3 Row 4 Gage Standard Mark Designation Prefix Row Gage Suffix Sample Mark A031145
319. one shown Plates Pratx plato description wih F for plates r Bars Use plate prefix for all bars Prefix description with Minimum thickness pr Flat Bar width Warning If you change the prefix for bars to P you should set the Format 0 0004 in Shear Bars to Thick x Width Width 0 0008 Apply The Width box lists all of the widths that will be described using the prefix in the Prefix descriptions with box Any plate that is the minimum er J ned thickness listed or thicker and whose width is in the Width list will be prefixed with the prefix shown You can add change and delete widths set the minimum thickness and change the prefix To change a width select the width you want to change make the change in the box to the right of the word Width and pick Apply STANDARD SHEAR BARS x This box is for setting the marks for standard shear bars por ZI cae A su The top row contains options you can turn on or off by Fekk Pes checking or un checking
320. op and sections LADDERS WITHOUT CAGE Pulldown AutoSD gt Ladders gt Ladders WO Cage Ladder Input Input is in FT IISS x ANGLE OR CHANNEL RAIL Select Type at 150600 Side step Step through a eoo p Stringer 9 5 FT O Angle Bar OG 8 11 RADIUS Select FB 3 8 x4 0 0800 m Use ALT1 Yr N 5 0 0400 CO Bend stringer from one piece il mlt ALT 1 a E Bar Thickness 0 0006 ung BAR RAIL rR Spacing TOOR a 50600 ung FFL EL 2 H SUPPORT amp Rod O Other OE E ET we oz a og E p Floor BF 2 18 9 2 0000 Chk d plate amp Pungs 5 r Support wo 3 0000 pp GAZ IGA 3 vi wo O Angle Bar BA 6 bo 1 02 7 12 3 u RUNG DIA 2 E me ome Select FB 3 8 x2 172 a 0 ic 0000 Bar Thick 0 0006 E f Bar Width 0 0208 ar Wi 3 GA1 aS 14 EFL EL 1 Lt Quy Ang spect 3 ji 4 pe ms p Bottom ENTERAN FOR WELDED p oS aig 07 amp Clip O Plain C Slot 23 P car 0 0200 Select Clip L5X3x3 8 ae Ga 10200 CJ Long leg out Brackets OK I Sai GAS lo Bolted O Welded Change ladder types by picking a Select Type button for Side step or Ste
321. or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command Insertion is aided with the help of an outline box Press the minus key on the numeric keypad while the outline box is displayed to reduce the length the picture will be drawn The default size is to scale 3 3 BOLTCIRGLE 6 39 4325x134 1W Pulldown AutoSD gt Draw gt Bolt Circle Toolbar Miscellaneous Ribbon AutoSD I gt Miscellaneous This is a symbol that is used to locate the bolts for a field bolted omy FT orem os 9 connection Select the proper options in the dialog box sce ow a er The choices for location are NONE LEFT RIGHT TOP BOT The orv sem owewwwe choices for standard types are A307 A325 A490 ADHESIVE Moises mer ANCHOR EXP LIB SELF TAP SLEEVE and WEDGE ANCHOR SELF TAP and SLEEVE are abbreviated ANCH STAP and SLEV pene ml respectively You can add more diameters and types by picking the More and More types buttons and entering the description in the edit box shown in the dialog box below Pick ADD to add the description to the list on the left side which saves it Put a check in the box below the list if a nut is included when listed in the bill of material for Types only Pick REMOVE to delete a description from the list Pick OK to add the list to the diameters or types in the main dialog box The choi
322. or 1 12 for METRIC regardless of the scale of the drawing You will need to have the shop bill drawing open to use the pick feature accurately If you want to make small adjustments in a column from a known location you may find it easier to adjust the value in the edit box Shop Bil Text and Attribute Configuration Input is in FT IISS x Configuration file Unnamed 24x36 Text Type r Text Type 4 r Sub Mark Type r Location From Left Border S 1 t if t t O Attributes Text o abc Oabl Gaaab O aal abl fee a r Justify r Location pr Select elec 1 you wan O use ain Mar Left w 27 0311 Pick 1 Lines are Numbered From H attributes or text Weigh ONE Assembly Only Main Quantity Center F 26 1009 Pick Describe Repeated Marks Top down Bottom up Sub Mark Left F 31 1106 Pick S k T Carry sub marks through Gant E 280100 Pick ub Mar ype enter v icl Sub Quantity Di ti scriptions ete EE Select the 2nd or last item here Pi Center Pick ut a space after the shape Unit Quantity Put space on each side of x Title block configuration Description Left F 28 0500 Pick to use the sheet number as a Remarks Let These
323. or drawing clip angles The clips can have any number of rows in either or both legs be drawn at any angle and with or without dimensions They will be drawn to the scale set by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command Draw Chapter 3 AutoSD Steel Detailing L do CRANE RAIL Select Crane Rail Pulldown AutoSD gt Draw gt Shapes gt Next T rL I I AL Toolbar Miscellaneous 30 40 50 60 70 8 85 Ribbon AutoSD I gt Miscellaneous Br SG 100 104 135 171 175 This is for drawing the end view of crane rails The insertion O30 040 O50 GS 070 O80 085 point is the bottom center of the rail These shapes will be drawn im om om om ow to the scale selected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt kabler Change gt Scale of Drawing command DISTANCE Pulldown AutoSD gt Tools gt Distance Ribbon AutoSD I gt Utilities This is similar to AutoCAD s DISTANCE command It returns the distance and angle between two points The AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command will affect the lengths returned by this command DITTO Pulldown AutoSD gt Draw gt Ditto Toolbar Miscellaneous Ribbon AutoSD I gt Miscellaneous This draws a do It is used in the shop bill as a ditto symbol The insertion point is the top of the d The second point is the bottom of the d It can be placed at any rot
324. original data base it can be retrieved otherwise it cannot If you are upgrading from an older version your changes to the database will not be overwritten when you install the new version of AutoSD The New version will install the database files in your C autosd data backup folder The database files that you edit are saved in your C autosd data folder If any new shapes are added to the database on the installation CD they will be listed in a dialog box that will allow you to add them to your database files when you use the AISC database editor for the first time The editor only works on US shapes It will not edit the data base files for shapes from other countries EDIT ATTRIBUTE Pulldown AutoSD gt Modify gt Attribute Ribbon AutoSD I gt Modify These commands are for editing attributes Some places you will find attributes are in the title block and in section symbols 75 Edit Chapter 4 AutoSD Steel Detailing CO LINE TYPE Pulldown AutoSD gt Modify gt Line Types Toolbar Change Ribbon AutoSD I gt Change These 8 commands will change the line type of the lines picked to the type selected The line types are continuous dashed hidden center phantom dot dashdot and border LINE WEIGHT Pulldown AutoSD gt Modify gt Line weights Toolbar Change Ribbon AutoSD I gt Change This command will change the line weight of the line or text or both The selection can be filtered by color or all sel
325. ormat gt SETUP or AutoSD I gt Utilities gt SETUP Select a configuration from each of the four boxes Select AutoSD for Detail Variables Unnamed 24x36 for Shop bill None for Material list and AutoSD for Color list and pick OK In the Setup box accept the defaults which are Architect for Unit type 1 1 for Drawing scale D 24 x 36 for drawing size horizontal for paper size and AutoSD Pick OK and the drawing is created Pick File gt Save and save the drawing You can start detailing now A folder called C AUTOSD CUSTOMER is created by the installation program Where C is the drive you installed AutoSD on and AUTOSD is the name of the folder you chose to install AutoSD in You can use the shop bill drawings in this folder CVSPro dwg 24x36BOM dwg and 11x17BOM dwg to create your own shop bill Open the drawing change the name in the title box save and close the drawing Uninstalling AutoSD Open the Control Panel and pick Uninstall programs Scroll down the list of programs until you find AutoSD Steel Detailing 2015 Select it and pick uninstall AutoSD Steel Detailing vi AutoSD Steel Detailing Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS BRICK WALL PLAN VIEW M G 30 COL BASE PLATE WAB Mu sussscceeeeeeerrerersrere 30 COLUMN w BOLT PATTERN 0006 31 DECK EDGE VIEW rronnrrronnrrrnnnrrrnnrrrsnnnsennn 31 AutoSD STEEL DETAILING rnvorornvorrnnvnrrnnvnrrnnr i ELEVATION GENERATOR GG secure 31
326. ou may pick a point or enter the distance with or without an angle If no angle is given the angle will be from the previous point to the cursor The distance is entered in the FT IISS format and is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command To draw a line 2 3 1 4 at an angle of 90 from the last point it would be entered in the following way command FT IISS To point 2 0304 lt 90 enter To draw a line using the cursor for direction command FT IISS To point 2 0304 enter 2 PT VECTOR Pulldown AutoSD gt Draw gt 2 PT Vector Ribbon AutoSD I gt Utilities This program will draw the horizontal and vertical vectors of a sloping line Pick the line and select side for the vectors A horizontal and vertical line will be drawn from the end points of the selected line to form a triangle on the side of the sloping line that was selected for the vectors ADD STUDS Pulldown AutoSD gt Add Studs Toolbar Detail Ribbon AutoSD II gt Detail This program will draw a side view or top view of any size threaded or headed stud along a selected line with or without dimensions The scale of the studs are affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command ADHESIVE ANCHOR Pulldown AutoSD gt Detail gt Adhesive Anchor Toolbar Detail im Ribbon AutoSD II gt Detail fil ane This program will draw a side view of any si
327. p through of rungs above Fin FL is for Side i a 2 eam i step type Enter input 1 15 as required If GA1 ne fem oom is 0 the hole in the OSL will be omitted If GA2 is TPR ig om ms 0 the clip will be welded to the ladder Bzy J fi E ee as Stringer Select Angle Bar or C for channel If eee an angle or channel is used pick the Select oe i VASE pe er button to select the stringer size If a bar is used ET Ft i 2 Ee users for enter the thickness If the ladder is a step through PTE ae mene and the stringer is a bar put a check in the box Em ete mm Bend stringer from one piece if you do not want b the stringer bar to be welded from two pieces x em If the stringer is an angle or channel put a check in the box Stringer at step through is a bar if that is what you want otherwise the stringer at the step through will be the same material as the main stringer Rung Select Rod or Other The other option allows you to enter a different description for the rung and will be detailed as a C shape Bottom clip size Pick the Select button to select the clip size Put a check in the box if the long leg is outstanding for unequal leg angle Bracket Spacing Additional Brackets Put a check in the box if you need more stringer supports Spacing There are four ways to enter the spacing 1 Enter 0 to have only one additional bracket a distance of input
328. p through Enter input 1 16 as required If GA1 is 0 the hole in the OSL will be omitted GA2 and GA3 cannot be 0 Stringer Select Angle Bar or C for channel If an angle or channel is used pick the Select button to select the stringer size If a bar is used enter a thickness 5 is used for the width If the ladder is a step through and the stringer is a bar put a check in the box Bend stringer from one piece if you do not want the stringer bar to be welded from two pieces If the stringer is an angle or channel put a check in the box Stringer at step through is a bar if that is what you want otherwise the stringer at the step through will be the same material as the main stringer Rung Select Rod or Other The other option allows you to enter a different description for the rung and will be detailed as a C shape Floor This option is available for the step through parapet ladder The floor can be either checkered plate or rungs The floor support can be a bar or angle If an angle is used pick the 200 AutoSD Steel Detailing Ladders Chapter 14 w Select button to select the size If a bar is used enter the Width and thickness The Rung spacing is for the horizontal spacing of rungs used for the floor Bottom Select Clip Plain or Slot for the connection of the bottom to the floor If an unequal leg clip is used put a check in the box if the long leg is outstanding Br
329. played to select the m configuration of the end of the beam As shown in the icon oren ft wen sowe menu to the left there are three choices 1 The clip and beam ETG end can both be vertical 2 The clip can be vertical and the Cox beam end can be square 3 The clip and beam end can both be square Caution should be exercised when selecting to cut the beam square if the clip is bolted or if the beam has holes in the web Insertion point When prompted for the insertion point of the left end an image will be drawn representing the depth and slope angle of the beam This will enable you to position the beam so that it will not interfere with other details already drawn For End Plates without holes enter 0 for number of rows You MUST pick YES for Plate length beam depth End reaction used is 23 44 kips Enter number of rows in web lt 3 gt Enter FT IISS Elevation of top of support beam at connection s vertical work line lt 0 gt Enter FT IISS Horiz Minus dimension lt 3 16 gt Enter NOTE Minimum Top flange block depth is 1 1 8 FT IISS Vert Distance down to first hole in outstanding leg from W P lt 3 gt Enter Stagger gages of clips Y N lt N gt Enter This is due to the offset dimension FT IISS Hole C C for web connection lt 6 gt Enter Near Side clip Since the connection is skewed the angle size is selected from a dialog box NOTE Leg on web is
330. put is in FT 1ISS Detail Beam r Detail Beam r Connection Type eg T Tota aS m Choose the beam type grade depth be ce bd 99 Desh EE wee EE ve E m and weight If you choose Girder OTER BotomFlg None El for the type enter the depth in inches vV Import column file data P End conn and Elevation is from bottom of beam or mm for metric r Clip connection Bevel Flange p Support Member Use Safety Connection O YES ONO Suppor Tyre Column Finge fr fw Tr ons OFS Os syk End connection and Elevation are e ei Setback to end of beam 0 0008 45 30 peim Weah nt le from bottom of beam Put a check in Support is a Hip or Valley rafter 1st gage for shop bolts 0 0204 i i Use short slots in OSL Slope in degrees from horizontal 0 a ike Edge dist 0 0104 this box if you want the reference enes is negative Er on elevation and the connection to be r Input skewed angle of end connection N PN Sina Shear je 34 x Shear 563 detailed from the bottom of the Tar Specta PE oh beam If the support member is a CK Cancel Config beam the reference elevation will also be at the bottom for the support Support Member Next choose the support type This can be beam web column flange column web pipe column tube column tube beam or user type User type can be selected if the beam is framing to a masonry wall If user type is not selected you would then choose the shape depth and weight If you chose pipe or
331. quired for the rail detail End of rail at top is Open Splice lt O gt Enter Insertion point section mark Main mark 1HRI Are marks RIGHT and LEFT Y N lt N gt Enter Quantity 1 Ay m Shop bill information on 1HR1 ur L Rows s fm Place shop bill text on LINE lt 4 gt Enter EN D co omg Description of 2 O D rail 1 8 O STD PIPE Mork Piece mark for 2 O STD PIPE SEON 5 te Radius 0 0100 Enter mark or use lt mh gt Enter CUT AT TOP OF ANGLE POST 1 Degrees 2 Description of pickets BAR 8x 8 Description of grab rail support ROD wo Draw section Piece mark for pickets ok Cancel Enter mark or use lt mk gt Enter Command NOTE e If input 6 is negative the end post at the bottom will be on the landing e If input 7 is negative the end post at the top will be on the landing e If a grab rail is included and vertical input 12 is too high to work with horizontal input 11 or 13 to the end the grab rail will not turn horizontally but will end where it crosses input 11 or 13 e If you want the rail to end with a post use an end type with a return type 3 or 5 and the horizontal dimension from the work point to the return must be the same as the dimension from the work point to Vv the post AE e If the rail ends in a splice type 1 or 4
332. r Bolt PL Size Overrides is for entering values to override the calculated values If a side of the plate is bolted you would enter the number of bolts to use If a side is welded you would enter the length of the plate to use If the program calculates a smaller size than the one given the size given will be used Selecting Other under bolt value allows you to enter a User Value for bolt shear 127 Bracing Chapter 8 AutoSD Steel Detailing If you edit an existing gusset plate file these boxes will Gusset Plate Output be filled in to force the program to re calculate the same Angle 39 8056 Bevel 10 to 12 Slope 15 7 7 16 5 roads Boks Wald size size plate If you want to calculate the actual size and Vere i i fe number of bolts needed you should delete the values in these three boxes A 1 0 3 8 C BOTH 5 AND 50 MUST BE Bem SE Bel AX ike ail When you have entered all the information needed oer By select OK Bil al F 1 61 4 G H Ka HRZ EN The gusset plate is calculated and the answers are put in ng another dialog box You can select to Draw Save as Minimum dip ange iake ie 17 and Print at the bottom of the dialog box If you want to ow EJ om de pret Pedais make a change you can select previous to go back to the
333. r To edit an existing value select the item to change from the X Y location list on the left side and enter a new value on the right side Pick the Add button to add an item The defaults are from the item selected Pick OK to add the item pick cancel to void the change Replace all holes This button is in the Holes dialog box You can replace all holes on one or multiple faces by selecting the drawing that was created by drawing the data from the file This drawing is drawn to scale and all editing to it must be to scale If you change any holes the location and size of the hole must be to scale When selecting the drawing all entities of all faces of the drawing should be selected including the text under each face If you only need to replace the holes in the top face for example you could select just that face and holes and text that says TOP VIEW only if the left most end of the top face is at an X value of 0 That is no other face extends to the left of the left end of the top face The program will assume the X value of the left end to be 0 for calculating the X location of the holes Replacing all holes will change the Ref Y from value for all holes Tolerance This lest you add a minimum and maximum tolerance value to the member You can remove a tolerance by removing one or both values and pick OK Replace internal openings This is for adding removing or changing internal opening in a face The hole must
334. r 0 to omit 5 0 182 AutoSD Steel Detailing Stairs Chapter 12 Pick loaction to draw holes for stringer connection Do you have another stringer connection Yes No Y FT IISS Last stringer to next stringer 4 30 FT IISS Back of stringer to first hole 2 lt 1 3 4 gt 0112 FT IISS Top of header to first hole 3 lt 2 1 2 gt Enter FT IISS Hole to hole enter 0 to omit 5 0 Pick loaction to draw holes for stringer connection Do you have another stringer connection Yes No N Shop bill information on mark 1Bl Place shop bill text on LINE lt 4 gt Enter FT IISS Thickness of connection material at LEFT end 0009 FT IISS Thickness of connection material at RIGHT end lt 9 16 gt 0010 For internal connections the default is f SF F F F for the hole to be on the left side of the ey pe pen se eee work line To put the holes on the right 1 x side enter the distance as a negative Vine ki I 7 14 1 1 2 2 11 2 1 0 2 C8x11 5 x 6 10 34 7 0 2 349 A325x2 1W 1B1 2 349 A325x2 1W ONE Landing Decking dus This program is for detailing the decking that covers a stair landing The deck length can run either direction If the center notch is not required enter 0 for dimensions 4 and 5 The layout is drawn to scale Separate marks are given for each piece Landing Dec
335. r AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command This box is also opened by the stair stringer program when you select a grating tread You can pick Bill of material only Do NOT draw or you may pick cancel to omit all output from this program without stopping the stair detail Grating Tread Detail x r Tread type Grating bolted Grating welded Other CHECKERED R lt GRATING lsx1x11x2 1112 Checkered PL Nosing mm Abrasive Nosing Mebac Nosing JE METTET 1 1 Hole Dia 0 0007 7 E Eei BAR 4x2 2 a Slot Length 0 0100 16 HOLE 1 Dimension D 0 0208 1 8 7 OX 74 6x1 SLOT Dimension E 0 0108 Dimension F 1 1 Dimension A 0 0102 Bearing Bar Height 0 0104 Dimension B ee Bearing Bar Thickness 0 0002 T Dimension C 0 0112 Width of Tread 40100 Quantity of Treads 3 4 Length of Tread 3 0000 Mark for Tread i v Bill of material only Do NOT draw LENGTH 3 0 OK Cancel Insertion point at upper left corner of tread Piece mark for support bar Enter mark or use lt a gt Enter Shop bill information on mark T1 Place shop bill text on LINE lt 16 gt Enter Shop bill information on mark T1 Place shop bill text on LINE lt 13 gt Enter 73 PAN TREAD E
336. r and maximum Results tread The tread riser combination is Risers Riser Tread Total Run Act Rise calculated using either Rise Run or 14 0 0705 0 1000 10 1000 8 0606 ee A 14 0 0705 0 1008 11 0408 8 0606 Rise x Run The Precision box 15 0 0614 0 1008 12 0300 8 0702 bee eon e 1106 191905 ee determines the increment of the tread 16 0 0607 0 1100 13 0900 8 0700 width The results are shown in the list 17 0 0601 0 1100 14 0800 8 0701 box at the bottom OK Cancel Code Adjustor Pick Change Code and the dialog box shown to Code Name MaxRiser MinTread the left is displayed Here you can change the 1 BOCA Assem and Inst 0 0708 0 1000 values by picking the box you want to change and 2 BOCA One and two family 0 0804 0 0900 editing the contents All boxes can be edited 3 BOCA Others 2 0800 0 0900 Picking OK saves the changes and takes you back NFPA 100700 TID to the previous box Picking Cancel does not save any changes Calculate using Rise Run To hs Rise Run 70 To 75 Cancel E STAIR ELEVATION This program is for drawing an elevation view of a stair stringer on an erection drawing Input is with icon menus and dialog boxes Command Select AutoSD or AutoSD II gt Stairs gt Erection gt Stair Elevation 179 Stairs Chapter 12 AutoSD Steel Detailing
337. r labeling a section detail or elevation When one is inserted you are a asked to give a mark letter or number a sheet number and a reference number to be put with the symbol ELEVATION A These two blocks are to be used with the block below Insert the circular block below with the triangular points first and then insert one of these flags attaching it to the endpoint of one of the triangular points If you do not want it touching the circular block you can move it after insertion This will keep it lined up with the circular block This block is for cutting a section and giving the section number and sheet number This A block is a two part block The outer circle is the first part You may rotate it to any angle The second part is the mark and sheet number It will always be at a rotation angle of 0 N This is the north arrow The arrow may be rotated to any angle but the N will always be at NORTH a rotation angle of 0 This is a bubble for column line identification You are prompted for the Grid mark The mark will automatically be placed in the center of the bubble Once inserted the bubble may be rotated to the desired direction but the text will have a rotation of 0 Snap mode is automatically set to end snap for easy insertion COL GRID This bubble is for when the column line identification has at least 4 characters The dots in the icons represent the insertion points Rotation is always 0 You are prompted for th
338. r studs with a custom bracket character on each side of the number The stud count can be on the same side of the line as the member size or the opposite side The member size is always printed the camber and stud count are optional Pick 1st end of beam or Select line Select line gt Pick a point to draw just one beam from point to point or press Enter or S and enter to draw multiple beams between existing lines The member size will be placed at the center of the line Dimensions from beam to beam can be placed automatically for the multiple beam option Three existing lines are required to start if you are drawing multiple beams Select a line at each end of the beam for a start and stop point They do not have to be parallel Select a third line parallel to the beam to be drawn as a reference for the first beam and select which side of this reference line to draw the beams The program will continue to ask for the distance to the next beam the offset at the Ist end and the offset at the 2nd end A positive offset is for a cantilevered condition Enter the dimensions and select the member size of the next beam When asked for the distance to the next beam you can enter 0 zero to end the command or press Ctrl C or Esc to stop the command All beam lines will be placed on a layer called BEAM The scale is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command 27 Erection Tools Chapter 2 AutoSD
339. ration to cfg ROTATION Some programs give you the option of rotation All angles are measured in a counter clockwise direction with right being 0 degrees Up is 90 degrees left is 180 degrees and down is 270 degrees Do not change this setting or the programs will not draw the pictures correctly Angles are entered and displayed in degrees by default You can however change the units of a drawing so degrees can be entered in any of the options offered by AutoCAD When drawing the end view of a steel shape such as a wide flange a rotation of 0 degrees is in reference to the flange and the web will be drawn up and down This is the position you would normally view the end of a beam SCALE There are many different scales provided that you can set your drawing up to However when detailing beams columns or stairs you should use a scale of 1 1 1 12 for metric This is the standard scale for detailing steel and should be used for all detail sheets A feature of AutoSD not found in most other CAD detailing software is that of being able to change the scale you are drawing to Even though you have set your drawing up to 1 1 as the base scale you can use the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command and draw sections and details to a different scale See chapter 3 for a list of some of the programs and commands affected by the change drawing scale command The flange and web thickness on thin mem
340. rawing to use this program and then quit the drawing when it is finished 57 Draw Chapter 3 AutoSD Steel Detailing JN LEADER NOTES Pulldown AutoSD gt Draw gt Leader notes cael Ribbon AutoSD I gt Dimension 140 SCH 0 PIPE 1 40 SCH 80 PIPE 180 SCH 40 PIPE 1 80 SCH 80 PIPE 1ST NOTE 2ND NOTE 3RD NOTE This is for adding standard notes using a leader line The one S notes available in the list box can be added to removed HS ONY edited and reset back to the original defaults Multi line p se notes can be created by using the I NO PAINT HOLES character to separate ves are ssvedintetie C Asd nots da the notes as shown in the last example in the list ee gr O Pightjustied ADDNOTE Select the box under Add Note Enter I the text for your note and pick Add nnm BR a REMOVE Select a note and pick Remove to le delete the note EDIT Select a note and pick Edit The note is now displayed in the edit box at the top Make the changes in this box and pick Save to save it back to the list Selecting Save at this time only saves the changes to the list It does not save the list to the file You will need to pick Save a second time to save to the file If you decide not to save the edited changes back to the list just pick any note in the list to cancel the edit function and clear the edit box SAVE Saves t
341. re that were processed The information written to this file is the Mark Quantity Description Length and Grade You have the option of combining all common marks and sorting like material together Sorting will list all W shapes together all L shapes together etc In order to sort by shape the shape designation must be at the left end of the description Shapes recognized to sort are as follows HP M S W C MC MT ST WT HSS TS HSS PS L CF FLAT BAR BAR UM PL FB PL UM PLATE PLATE TUBE 164 AutoSD Steel Detailing Shop Bill Chapter 10 SCH 40 SCH 80 SCH 120 XX STRG X STRG STD PIPE PIPE RAIL A325 A307 A490 BOLT ROD REBAR EXPANDED and GRAT as well as the prefix you set in the configuration for plates under FLAT BARS PLATES EXTENDING WEIGHT If the weight category is not 0 the weight for each piece will be calculated and written in the weight column The weight is the total weight for the quantity of each piece listed The total for the piece shipped is not given You can use the command AutoSD gt Calculator gt Select Dim TO Add gt Decimal from the pulldown menu to quickly get a total if needed Listed below are the valid descriptions that the weight program will recognize KEY WORDS DESCRIPTION EXAMPLES A307 W O A307 or W 0 A307 BOLT A325 W O A325 or W 0 A325 BOLT A490 WOO A490 or WO A490 BOLT BAR BAR W x 18 or BAR WI or BAR W I BOLT W O BOLT C C8x11 5 CLEVIS 278 CLEVIS
342. re with the flange Positive angles are rotated counterclockwise Negative angles are rotated clockwise If a web connection is set to None in the Connection section an import button is enabled Picking Web NS or Web FS will open the dialog box shown to the left This box will list all of the end connections by beam marks that have been saved for the customer you are currently detailing for To make a selection pick a beam mark and look at the information presented to the right of the list The first item will be the end of the beam that connection was detailed for The left end is the piece marked end The right end would be the other end As you detail and save connections most of the beam marks will be listed twice one listing for each end This same box is used to edit connections in the list and can be 108 AutoSD Steel Detailing Beams Chapter 7 accessed from the beam pulldown menu by selecting Edit Internal Connection List You can edit the dimension by picking on an edit box and changing the dimension The Center dimension is used to put a wing plate or shear lug on the center of the work line for a tube or pipe framing connection Select Cancel to close the box without saving any changes The default list displayed in the box is from the current customer Pick the Browse button to open bm conn lst files that you have saved in other folders The Delete button will delete the currently selected connection from the file If the
343. red to the top of the rail Wall Rail is on a Stair or Ramp Choosing ramp reduces the number of options at the ends and the dimensions at the lower end do not include a riser for the first step of a stair Dimensions are to rail or to work points 1 Choosing to rail allows you to enter the dimensions you want to use for the rail shown to the left Choosing to work point as shown in the dialog box on the previous page allows you to enter work lengths and have the program calculate the actual rail lengths Brackets are Near Side or Far Side Select whether you want the section cut at the support brackets to show them on the near side or far side Wall Bracket Omit all brackets Put a check in this box if you do not want any wall brackets Draw section Put a check in this box if you want to draw the section of the support bracket Description This is the description that will be used in the shop bill for the wall bracket The first time you use the Wall Rail program the words Type it will be displayed in this box To add descriptions pick Add and another box will pop up for you to enter a description Pick OK in that box and your description will be added to the list and be displayed If Type it is selected the program will ask for a description to use in the shop bill If something else is selected then that will be used in the shop bill Picking Change will allow you change an exis
344. revious button for backing up one menu at a time and a Go To button where you can go directly to the menu number you enter ADD TO LIBRARY EE Pulldown AutoSD gt Insert gt Add to Library Ribbon AutoSD I gt Utilities nm nN I oo No You can add new or existing blocks to the library menu by selecting Add to library from the AutoSD gt Insert pulldown menu You should be zoomed in on the objects that you want to add to the library What shows on your display screen is what will be shown in the icon menu The icons in each library are numbered starting with number 1 in the upper left corner and counting from left to right top to bottom There are 10 categories with an unlimited number of libraries in each category and 9 items in each library The categories are Beam Brace Column Erection Ladder Miscellaneous Rail Scaled Stair and Views CLEAN SLIDES Pulldown AutoSD gt Insert gt Clean Slides Ribbon AutoSD I gt Utilities This program will insert the blocks of the selected category one at a time center the block zoom to the extents of the block and make another slide This will clean any garbage that may have been in the slide from surrounding lines when it was first made This program will change only the slide picture that is displayed in the icon menu and will not affect the block itself The program will erase all entities in the current drawing therefore you should start a new d
345. rom bottom flange Tail from right end gage from bottom flange 009 CHANGE SIZE This program changes the xdata hole size value of all holes selected dij CHANGE SIDE This program changes the xdata side value of all holes selected The side value for a beam and column flange is near side NS far side FS or both sides BS The side value for a column web are left side of center line right side of center line and both sides of center line The side value is not used if the shape is an angle or channel P CHANGE SLOT ANGLE This program changes the xdata angle value of all slots selected Fa CHANGE SLOT LENGTH This program changes the xdata length value of all slots selected cb CHANGE SLOT WIDTH This program changes the xdata width value of all slots selected 209 CNC Chapter 16 AutoSD Steel Detailing TAIL 4 B 3 NS FS BS REP CHANGE TAIL This program changes the xdata tail value of all holes selected CHANGE HOLE TO SLOT This program changes the xdata of all holes selected to slots and redraws the hole as a slot You must enter the slot length width and angle CHANGE SLOT TO HOLE This program changes the xdata of all slots selected to holes and redraws the slot as a hole NOTE HOLES NS FS or BS These are for labeling holes using a leader line You start with the location for the arrow The NEAR snap is automatically activated for this selection Pick the next poi
346. rom the end of the flanges and 1 2 from the web for wing plate connections 30 degrees will give a clearance of 3 8 from the end of the flanges and web for wing plate connections Loads The end reaction will be determined using the beam size length grade design method for country and percent of uniform load from the customer configuration This load will be compared to the load you enter for the shear load and the greater of the two will be used to calculate the number of bolts in the web connection The shear load may be left blank if it is not known The tension load is used to calculate the thickness of the web connection It may be left blank if there is no tension load Bolts The values in this section are the defaults from the customer configuration but may be changed here on a per beam basis If you cannot find the shear value you need in the pop down list select Other in the list and enter the value in the edit box below the pop down list After making all of your selections pick the OK button At each prompt you may press the enter key to accept the default shown or type in your own dimension Main mark 1BL Are marks RIGHT and LEFT Y N lt N gt Quantity 1 FT IISS Elevation of beam at CL of LEFT end support lt 0 gt Enter FT IISS Elevation of beam at CL of RIGHT end support lt 0 gt 3 HORIZ TO DM If the beam is not level the slide picture shown to the left will be
347. rompt lines in different connections will show things like IMin 4 11 16 l Min will fit is 3 1 2 Min is 3 5 16 or Use 5 1 16 l These are prompts giving recommended minimum or maximum dimensions based on member sizes selected and dimensions enter before the prompt They are meant to be used as guides for entering information A section is cut showing the connection detail of the purlin z giving enough dimensions to be able to detail the purlin as well as the connection on the rafter R38x4716x1 0 FS PURLIN WEB SECTION A I W16x26 204 AutoSD Steel Detailing Hip amp Valley Chapter 15 A complete layout is generated as shown below Be sure to zoom in on Section A and examine this section closely for any interference PURLIN WEB SECTION W1 6x26 ELEVATION OF VERTICAL PLANE 205 Hip amp Valley Chapter 15 AutoSD Steel Detailing Y Level Plane Vertidal Plane ELEVATION OF VERTICAL PLANE In the plan view there is a scale given In this case it is 3 16 1 0 The scale will vary depending on the dimensions given for 1 and 2 in order to keep the drawing a certain size You can use the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command to set the drawing to this scale After doing this you can draw a line 90 degrees to the roof plane line at one end in the elevation of vertical plane view
348. rt dialog box without saving the changes Joist The elevations entered for each end are to the joist bearing The joist size is taken as a literal string for labeling The Depth and seat height is entered in the joist dialog box for each joist Remember to use the correct format for dimensions as shown at the top of the dialog box After making all selections for one joist pick Add to add another joist The settings of the currently selected joist will be the default for the new joist Pick OK to save and close the Joist dialog box Pick Cancel to close the Joist dialog box without saving the changes Joist Input is in FT IISS x Between Columns At and B 1 inBay 1 Prev Bay Next Bay Elevations are at joist bearing El Left end EL Riaht end 20 0000 20 0000 Member K14x22 Delete Type Girder O Joist Change Joist Depth 1 02 Seat height 0208 C Extendbottom chord to column at left end O Extendbottom chord to column at right end OK Cancel Erection Tools Chapter 2 AutoSD Steel Detailing Ladders Under Type select Caged or Non caged and Side step or Step through Under View select Front Left Side or Right Side The location can be from the left column or from the right column as selected under Located from The dimension for the location i
349. s rrrrrenrnnrerrorrerrroronnnnnr 208 Change Facere onen n Mobis aie 208 ERE E E JE EA 209 hole to slot rrrrerrerrooronrrrrrrerrsernnnr 210 Option vesvnassrdanranadadsienss 209 ta cones RE TE Se eae 209 NVE EE EEEE 209 Soter 209 Slotl nsthusasunnshensdddakess 209 sl t tO HOLE ORRE FEE 210 SHOT WAU sah ucs cot aces cota n un 209 DAI Avocet EE NE EN 210 Note NS or ES ups 210 HOGST 208 Mam mark asjpvdketeassauimadadkdsindt 208 Replace tail dimension ssroronvrrnvvnvvrnrrnr 210 Subimark SERBERE ERE e ER FREE SEERNE 221 Write DSTV hes 219 Write DSTV file for clip angles 219 Write DSTV file for plates 220 Column base plate W AB rnnnrrrnrrrnnnrrrrnnrvrrvner 30 Column bubble rororrronnnnnnrrrrrrrrornensnnnnrsrnnnr 42 Column connect1ons annnnrorroorrornonsnnnnrsensnnr 146 Column files rerrrrrorroononnnnrrrnrrrrernennnnrnnnenssennnne 9 Column w bolt pattern eoororororrrnrrrrnnrrrrnnrr 31 E uns 24 Compile quantities from all drawings 164 Configure AutoCAD or BricsCAD iv Configure AutoSD negre velde v Configuring the shop bill eee 153 Describe repeated marks 1 154 Grad ET TE 155 A D E E BEES RESEN aeons 155 Limits for extracting 33 24 155 Lines are numbered from sner 155 Print a amisngsksmenesenttmalkiganet 155 Put a space after the shape eeonrroorrnrrr 155 Put a space each side of the Xo 155 Se 155 MS
350. s entered in the edit box for Center of ladder from left column After making all selections for one ladder pick Add to add another ladder The selections of the currently selected ladder will be the ire euss oe defaults for the new ladder Pick OK to save and close the Ladder dialog box Pick Cancel to close the Ladder dialog box without saving the changes Stairs Ladders Input is in FT NSS Leeds s cater uni a and 3 Bottom FL EL Top FL EL 100 120 Stairs Input is in FTIISS x Stairs between Columns A odB inBey I Member Bottom EL Top EL C 12 x 20 7 100 105 Prev Bay Next Bay To the right of the display list are selections for Slope Slope Upto the Top and Bottom The slope orientation of the stair can be up to the left or up to the right Changing it will change the images shown Select the top and bottom condition and the image below will change to reflect your selections Enter any Two For dimensions 1 2 and 3 you only need 081 to enter 2 of these Those two are subtracted from the bay width to get the third
351. s number as the default Press enter to end the command or enter a different number for a new result 90 AutoSD Steel Detailing Dimensioning Chapter 6 Chapter 6 Dimensioning CUSTOM FONT When you start a new drawing a custom text style is loaded called ASD BKAP Another style is available called ASD FONT ASD FONT uses the tilde character while ASD BKAP uses the backward apostrophe character The tilde requires holding the shift key down while the backward apostrophe does not You may use either style To change styles you must run the program FONT LSP located in the BONUS folder of AUTOSD If you decide to change styles to ASD FONT at a later time after you have created drawings or you have been using an older version of AUTOSD that did not offer this option you can still change styles When you open an old drawing created with the ASD BKAP style and you are now using the ASD FONT style use the program ASD STYLE located in the AutoSD gt Modify pulldown menu or the AutoSD I gt Utilities ribbon menu to change the existing text in the current drawing The following describes the style ASD BKAP If you are using the style ASD FONT simply substitute the with a These text styles give you custom fractions symbols superscript and subscript text Type a backward apostrophe C or tilde and then the character to type in a custom character For example if you want a center line symbol type C A fraction is typed as
352. s or cutouts CHOOSE ONLY ONE FROM EACH LINE FOR MAKING COMBINATIONS AT THE ENDS OF FLG AND WEB END OF WEB BURNS END OF FLG BURNS 1 BEVEL PREP 1 BEVEL PREP 2 BLOCK BEVELED FLG RAT HOLE 2 FLG THIN 3 CONTOUR NOTCH 3 CONTOUR NOTCH 4 SKEWED 4 SKEWED INTERIOR WEB BURNS 5 SLOT 1 CUTOUT INTERIOR FLG BURNS 2 SLOT 1 CUTOUT 2 NOTCH 3 SLOT DO NOT COMBINE END CONTOUR WITH NOTCH A SKEW CAN NOT CROSS A CONTOUR A SKEW MAY CROSS A BLOCK BEVELED FLG RAT HOLE FLG THIN OR NOTCH IF THE ANGLE OF A COPE OR FLG THIN IS NOT 0 THE END OF THE WEB OR FLG MUST HAVE A SKEW CUT TO THE SAME ANGLE ONE TWO PER END PER SURFACE BLOCK FLG THIN RAT HOLE BEVEL PREP BEVELED FLG END NOTCH CONTOUR AND SLOT PER END PER SURFACE SKEWED MULTIPLE PER SURFACE CUTOUT FLG NOTCH BEVEL PREP BEVEL FLANGE BLOCK CONTOUR CUTOUT END NOTCH EEE Er CS I LO FLG NOTCH FLG THINNING RAT HOLE SKEWED SLOT EE ee deg is JIS 216 AutoSD Steel Detailing CNC Chapter 16 WP FOR COPE WHEN TOP IS SKEWED ee SKEW WITH BLOCK a SKEW WITH FLG THIN BLOCK RAT HOL OR BEVELED FLG SKEWED TO SAME ANGLE AS COPE ORIENTATION OF X amp Y OF SKEWED
353. s ore to centerline of joist or centerline of hole if anly one hole is required The DEM TCH Gage and hole Size nesd only be entered onca for each siza unlesa o change is required MARK girder mark number NF naar or far side of girder LOCATIDN distanoe to centerline af joist 2 holes or centerline of hole DBH distance between hola uoist esat alot gage TCH Gage top chord hole gage antered in sb senthe typically 9 or 13 NUCHOR TOP CHORD HOLES dwg 72 AutoSD Steel Detailing Edit Chapter 4 ADJ EZA Chapter 4 Edit ADJUST DIMENSION Pulldown AutoSD gt Modify gt Adjust Dimension Toolbar Change Ribbon AutoSD I gt Change This command will change a dimension by the amount entered All dimensions selected will be changed either increased or decreased It takes a number for input in the FT IISS format ARRAY Pulldown AutoSD gt Modify gt Array Toolbar Modify eee mg Ribbon AutoSD I gt Modify ng The array command is similar to the standard Sa RER AutoCAD array command The exceptions are you can enter the row and column offsets in mn EEE FT IISS MISS DECIMAL OR FT II SS Fr format and these offsets are affected by the pe ER Te E Potete tems os copies AutoSD gt Modify or
354. s to select a saved plate for detailing If you edit a description picking Cancel will cause you to lose all changes Picking OK will save all changes to the file Picking Browse will allow you to select a basecap pl file or an older cap base pl file from another folder Picking Enable All will enable all options and set the hole pattern to the default Delete will remove the current selection Rotate 90 will relocate all dimensions to rotate the plate counter clockwise 90 Select lets you select a preset plate configuration Save As will save the current selection as another mark Plate marks can be saved as upper or lower case but is not case sensitive You cannot save a mark pa and a mark PA The mark you use to save the plate as does not have to be the piece mark used in the detail but it is the default There are two sets of input one for the plate and one for the holes Plate dimensions A B C D and M must be entered All other dimensions are optional Leave the dimension blank if that option is not needed Dimensions B D F H J L N and Q for Holes may be entered as a single dimension or as a list Lists are dimensions separated by commas Example 03 03 03 Leave all dimensions blank if you do not want a hole at that location If the plate is symmetrical about the horizontal or vertical center line you can put a check in the box for that option Enter the dimension for one side and the other side is entered for you when you leave tha
355. s to the current layer FREEZE LAYER Pulldown AutoSD gt Format gt Freeze Layer Ribbon AutoSD I gt Utilities This will freeze all layers that belong to the objects you pick ISOLATE LAYER Pulldown AutoSD gt Format gt Isolate Layer Ribbon AutoSD I gt Utilities 78 AutoSD Steel Detailing Edit Chapter 4 This will freeze all layers except the ones that belong to the objects you pick SET LAYER Pulldown AutoSD gt Format gt Set Layer Ribbon AutoSD I gt Utilities This will set the current layer to that of the object you pick THAW ALL LAYERS Pulldown AutoSD gt Format gt Thaw All Layers Ribbon AutoSD I gt Utilities This will thaw all layers 79 Edit Chapter 4 AutoSD Steel Detailing 80 AutoSD Steel Detailing Calculator Chapter 5 ARC Chapter 5 Decimal amp FT IISS Calculators There are several different programs of each type of calculator The only difference between the two types is the type of input The decimal calculator requires decimal numbers for input and the output will be in decimals The FT IISS calculator requires that numbers be input in the FT IISS format ARCS Pulldown AutoSD gt Calculator gt Arcs Toolbar Calculator Ribbon AutoSD I gt Miscellaneous ETE The arc program is for calculating the height
356. sed but must still be entered You must select None for the frame type in the Landing Setup in this case Rails Select either Pickets or Rail or neither If Rail is selected you need to select the number of lines Treads Select the type of Grating or Pan The image to the right will change to reflect your selections Enter the Number of treads in the edit box and press the enter key or tab key and the first riser will be calculated and put in the First riser R edit box as the default You can change it or leave it as is Stair is Either NS or FS The image of the plan and elevation view will change to reflect your selection After making all selections and entering all values for one stair pick Add to add another stair The selections of the currently selected stair will be the defaults for the new stair Pick OK to save and close the Stairs dialog box Pick Cancel to close the Stairs dialog box without saving the changes Landing Setup Stair Landing Setup Input is in FT IISS n Pick this button to configure the landings for both right and
357. sed to calculate X The side value determines which web gets cut for tubes only X gt 0 Y 0 Flange cut only If side is BS Y is full width of flange If side is NS or FS Y is half width of flange X and Y are used to calculate angle Angle may be 0 or 1 X gt 0 Y 0 Web cut only Y is full depth of web X and Y are used to calculate angle The side value determines which web gets cut for tubes only Angle may be 0 or 1 X 0 Y gt 0 Angle and Y are used to calculate X See note 1 below X gt 0 Y gt 0 X and Y are used to calculate the angle Angle may be 0 or 1 to determine direction of cut See note 1 below Note 1 If side NS or FS there is only one cut If side BS there are two cuts If it is BS of a flange both corners of the flange are cut and Y must less than or equal to the flange width If it is BS of a web both webs are cut on one corner for tubes only A 45 degree full width cut of a flange can be entered as X 0 Y 0 Side BS Angle 45 or 45 This is the most common way X flange width Y 0 Side BS Angle 0 or 1 X flange width Y flange width Angle 0 or 1 X 0 Y flange width Angle 45 or 45 Y must be greater than 0 for a chamfer cut 214 AutoSD Steel Detailing CNC Chapter 16 A 45 degree chamfer cut of a flange can be entered as e X gt 0 Y X Angle 0 or 1 NS or FS cuts one corner BS cuts both corners e X 0 Y gt 0 Angle 45 or 45 NS or FS cuts on
358. something latter Connections to a beam or column can be saved to a file to be used to detail the beam connection or column Channels must be drawn toed far side only when CNC data is saved The angle entered for skewed wing plates is the angle in the plane that is square with the edge of the plate attached to the web of the beam 112 AutoSD Steel Detailing Beams Chapter 7 E ANGLE BEAM Angle Beam input Input is in FT ISS a ee k This draws an angle with either holes or end plates at either end Edie ee P You can have 2 or 4 holes at both ends re E Pi The angle beam will be drawn to the scale set by the AutoSD gt LI Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command 6117 14 9 2 7 I 3 10111 10 0000 2 0 0200 3 0 0300 4 10 0204 5 0 0208 6 0 0104 7 0 0300 3 0 0200 9 0 0200 10 0 0308 11 0 0308 12 0 0600 3 0008 14 0 0008 Bolt Diameter 3 4 v Plate MK pa Cok Cancel E FINGER SHIM PLATE Finger Plates Input is in FT IISS x This program will draw a detail of a shim plate place a main mark under the detail and fill out the shop bill or it can write a DSTV file of the plate Pick OK to draw the plate and end the program Pick Save as DSTV file to create the file and
359. st have a template file The one shown below is supplied as an example and is used by the program extract exe to convert the backward apostrophe gt or tilde characters to the corresponding fraction Attribute extract template file AUTOSD BONUS ASD_SBL TXT ASD MQ C005000 Main quantity ASD MM C011000 Main mark ASD SQ C006000 Sub assembly quantity ASD SM C007000 Sub assembly mark ASD DS C035000 Description ASD FT C003000 Feet ASD IN C009000 Inches ASD SH C004000 Shape designation ASD ID C007000 Mill order number ASD SE C004000 No longer used but included to support older versions ASD SP C007000 Material grade ASD RM C011000 Remarks ASD WT C008000 Weight ASD S1 C010000 S1 S6 are sequence numbers for main marks ASD S2 C010000 They are invisible and have no prompt ASD S3 C010000 ASD S4 C010000 ASD S5 C010000 ASD S6 C010000 ASD Q1 C004000 Q1 Q6 are quantities per sequence for main marks ASD Q2 C004000 ASD Q3 C004000 ASD Q4 C004000 ASD Q5 C004000 ASD Q6 C004000 BL Y N005000 Y coordinate to enable proper sorting The comments must not actually be part of the template file AUTOSD BONUS SHOPBILL TXT is used with version 4 0 and earlier and uses different attribute tag names These older names are still recognized so you can still use your existing shop bill drawings Each line has two fields The first field is the tag name The tag name is the name of one of
360. t Draw button To draw a Move back Move back piece select it and pick the Draw button The Draw Do not Drow box will go away and you will be prompted for me an insertion point After the piece is drawn the box will open back up and the mark that was drawn will be moved to the Drawn column If you want to draw the same piece again select it from the Drawn column and pick the Move back button Now you can select it from the Mark column and pick the Draw button Write DSTV for Note All DSTV files will be saved in the folder of the drawing the file was made from All Drawings This will create a DSTV file for each piece on all drawings in a selected folder It will not create files for plates or clips Current Drawing This will create a DSTV file for each piece on the current drawing It will not create files for plates or clips Single object This will create a DSTV file of the details selected Select the main mark under the detail for beams columns and single member bracing Select the sub mark for stair stringers and double angle bracing It will not create files for plates or clips Base Cap plates This will open the column base cap plate editor Select a mark or create a plate and pick OK A DSTV file will be created for the plate selected Write DSTV file for Clips Tees Angles Note All DSTV files will be saved in the folder of the drawing the file was made from Clip angles include end clips on bea
361. t a hole at the elevation FROM ELEV UP is the location of holes above the given elevation 0 will put a hole at the elevation 12 Flange Plate GAGE is the horizontal distance from center of column to center of the first hole BEAM GAGE is gage of the beam that would bolt to the plate THICKNESS is for both plates in this connection ROWS is the number of rows of bolts in both plates SPACING is the space between each bolt in both plates WIDTH is the width of the plate FROM ELEV DOWN is the location of plates below the given elevation 0 will put the bottom of a plate at the 149 Columns Chapter 9 AutoSD Steel Detailing GUSSET P 13 Gusset Plate BE ESN Must have Bracing package N Work line of brace goes up or down Select the one that suits your brace condition m A is the distance from the elevation up to the work point B is the distance from the elevation down to the work point You cannot have both for one connection 0 will put the WP on the elevation ve BRACE GOES DOWN 14 Saddle GARE tL c c GAGE is the distance from the face of the column to the OFFSET TT senon Va OFFSET holes This can be 0 if no holes are required 38 t HL C C is the center to center of holes 4 A HORIZ is the horizontal length of the plates le OFFSET Horg VERT is the vertical length of the plates z WIDTH is the overall width of the saddle OFFSET is
362. t box by pressing the tab key If you check both horizontal amp vertical enter the dimensions in one corner and then tab through the others to fill them in automatically The rotation of the bolt pattern is based on the column web being horizontal SKEWED PL TOP VIEW This is similar to the program of the same name under the AutoSD gt Beams pulldown menu The program for columns can draw the end view of the column with the plate drawn at any angle including 0 and 90 The column can be any wide flange pipe or tube The scale is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command 142 AutoSD Steel Detailing Columns Chapter 9 SPLICES There are two types of splices One is for columns that are nominally the same depth and the other is for columns that are nominally 2 different in depth Of these two types you can have the flange plates shop bolted or shop welded An icon menu is used to choose Select Column Splice x FLANGE PLATES SHOP WELDED FELD BOLTED DEPTHS NOMINALLY THE SAME FLANGE PLATES SHOP BOLTED FIELO BOLTED DEPTHS NOWINALLY THE SAME i FLANGE PLATES SHOP WELDED FIELD BOLTED UPPER COL 2 LESS THAN LOWER COL FLANGE PLATES SHOP BOLTED FIELD mm UPPER COL 2 LESS THAN LOWER OOL HE Cancel 1 0512 0 0600 Depth
363. tch Ends Input is in MISS Lx E r kx 0 0400 Rx 0 0400 ly 0 0100 Ry 0 0100 OK Cancel If a notch is required in either end in the horizontal leg a top view will be drawn You can also have horizontal studs on the pour stop Under Material select either Bent Plate or Angle If you select Bent plate you will need to enter the size of the vertical and horizontal legs and thickness in the edit boxes under the drop down list for angles If you select Angle these edit boxes will be filled in automatically from the angle size selected If you use the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command to set the scale to a larger scale the side view and end view will be drawn to the larger scale Main mark 1A2 Are marks RIGHT and LEFT Quantity 1 Yes No Shop bill information on mark 1A2 Place shop bill text on LIN Ci RECTANGLE E lt 4 gt lt N gt Enter Enter Pulldown AutoSD gt Draw gt Rectangle Toolbar Miscellaneous Ribbon AutoSD I gt Miscellaneous This draws a rectangle using a POLYLINE with a width may mas IR 1A2 ONE Select Insertion point location x Pick opposite corners Pick Insertion point amp Upper left O Top Mid O Upper rig
364. te the column file If you have wing plates in the web with stiffeners the stiffeners must be listed first if you want the wing plate to extend to the stiffeners Splices and any additional connections can be added after the column is drawn Chain dimensions and tail dimensions are calculated and placed on the drawing for you Column Input is in FT ISS Draw left side Checking this Will Mage D Daiane ee draw face SAR alumi sies V Show edge view Show plan view Pe E 2 5 Top of cap plate elevation 20 0000 Draw right side Checking this will Select w14x34 draw face EN Cantilever member V Rotate cap plate in plan V Stiffeners Beam Girder None i i Column size Pick the button to HEN Angie 00000 ES Sne ng change the size of the column You gerseetaept can detail wide flange channel pipe r Base plate vw Slope cap plate from horizontal and tube columns V Show edge view 7 Show plan view amp Input Angle Input Bevel nge 15 0000 evel Cantilever member If you have a Senebeereeeeveter m ea Include Girt connections beam or girder spanning across the top Fj ma Fam of the column you can enter the depth
365. the Column file configuration button on the main dialog box This box pops up every time for you to select the proper column face but it needs to be configured only 38 AutoSD Steel Detailing Erection Tools Chapter 2 once or when the need requires it If you have girts you will need to select the correct connection for the current column by picking the Girt configuration image button Pick OK to create the column file and return to the main dialog box or Cancel to abort Picking cancel will also cause you to lose all changes made to the configuration If you have two elevation views you can create a single column file that contains the connections for members in both elevations See the picture to the left that represents the plan view of a column at lines 1 and A If you are Column connection configuration x Beam and column combinations Connection on column Wide Flange Beam to Tube column p Wide Flange Beam to Pipe column Wing Plate Tube Beam to Wide Flange column Tube Beam to Tube column Tube Beam to Pipe column bd r Seat angle Tube and Pipe beam r Girt config Seat angle size L3x3x1 4 a 0 0006 B 00112 Y Long leg vertical lt i g eg Seo amp Length 0 0600 r Clips and Split Tee on column r Wing plate 1 02 Number of clips Clip size L31 2x3x5 16
366. the frame as shown in Step 1 with the continuous members and the centerlines of the cross members drawn Pick the HSS in Frame command and pick a cross member centerline Enter the width of the tube for the cross member It will be drawn between the continuous members as shown in Step 2 Complete all of the cross members and then draw the centerlines of the diagonals as shown in Step 3 Pick the HSS in Frame command and pick a diagonal centerline Enter the width of the tube for the diagonal member It will be drawn between the continuous and cross members as shown in Step 4 2 Rod Brace Command Pick AutoSD or AutoSD II gt Bracing gt Draw gt Brace gt Rod w Turnbuckle Fod Brace met FT ISS PE Rod Brace can detail a two piece rod brace with a J EE ti e z Pee turnbuckle The ends can have a clevis 1 nut 2 nuts a ae JPEG nut with a hillside washer or be left plain Rod size is Fe ae rr from 3 8 to 5 Select a rod size The turnbuckle list is GJ R m changed to match the rod size data on the turnbuckle 3 Tr pm i ae selected is given in the lower right corner of the dialog Ss gt ee fe Bele box and a suggested clevis size along with its data is Q q pe Si give in the upper right corner 3 8
367. the main menu give the path to the folder where you want to save the drawing If you want drawing number 1 to be saved in the folder C SSS 9501 where SSS is the customer and 9501 is your job number the correct path for drawing number one is C SSS 9501 1 This will keep the drawings for one job and customer separate from those of another CUSTOMER CONFIGURATION PROGRAM Before you begin using the program you should first create a customer folder and a job sub folder to be used to save drawing files You can use Windows Explorer to do this The root folder should be the name or abbreviation of the customer you are detailing for A sub folder for each job will be set up inside this folder Example C SSS The customer folder SSS C SSS 9501 The job sub folder 9501 Warning AutoCAD 14 only All folder names in the path must be eight characters or less and must not contain any spaces Folder names must conform to DOS restrictions This is a 14 AutoSD Steel Detailing Introduction Chapter I requirement of the extract and import programs for processing multiple drawings Likewise drawing file names must also conform to the DOS restrictions of 8 characters or less Refer to Windows Help on how to use Windows explorer This example is for a customer called Superior Steel Services job number 9501 When you start a new drawing for sheet number one save it to the job folder created for this customer In this case it will be C SS
368. the option Designation and nn SE re FE tom e pen ote oen Gage are global settings and apply to all marks For fat engen Ses eg Sa Lame example you cannot have some marks with a gage and Designation AT 1 k Tawan sro ARETE wxw ER some marks without a gage Prefix and Suffix however ELOT ee I HEL are applied separately to each bar The row below these GM KA Eee bus Bie JE options labeled Set Order is for arranging the order of Pr psp D005 acusigsge fm the components of the mark To change the order select CJ the label you want to move The current position will be shown in the Position drop down list and in the Label Position box to the right Select a new position and the label will be swapped with the one currently in that position The row below Set Order shows how the mark is constructed and a sample of what the mark will look like Checking Designation will include the text that is shown in the designation pop down list in the mark The text shown in the list can be changed using the Add Chg and Del buttons If you delete a designation you will be deleting a description If you add a designation you will be adding a description The description for the new designation will be copied from the current description Different descriptions can have the same designation The number to the right of the designation indicates which description in the designation list you are editing When editing an e
369. tia about the x axis in inches to the 4th Sx Elastic section modulus about the x axis in inches to the 3rd Rx Radius of gyration about the x axis in inches ly Moment of inertia about the y axis in inches to the 4th Sy Elastic section modulus about the y axis in inches to the 3rd Ry Radius of gyration about the y axis in inches Zx Plastic section modulus in inches to the 3rd Zy Plastic section modulus in inches to the 3rd GAGE Common bolt gage of the flange 235 Support Files Appendix B AutoSD Steel Detailing When adding new sizes or creating new shape files you should keep the sizes in order by depth starting with the smallest depth at the beginning of the file Also all sizes of the same nominal depth must be kept together The shapes will be displayed in the selection dialog box by the order they appear in the data file 236 AutoSD Steel Detailing Gusset Plate Details Appendix C Appendix C Gusset Plate Details This appendix provides you with a copy of the slides used in the GUSSET PLATE BRACE program They can be used for reference with the printout of the input and output and by other draftsman to fill out the input form shown on the following page Once the form is filled out it can be entered into the computer by your AutoSD operator to run the calculations and get a print of the results which can then be used by the draftsman to make the details This will speed up the process of detailing brac
370. ting description Picking Delete will allow you delete an existing description Pipe bends Options are Miter long radius or short radius Select how you want the bends to be formed Return Bottom end to wall Put a check in this box if you want a top view of the bottom end of the rail showing a return toward the wall Draw Wall at Bottom end Put a check in this box if you want to draw a reference line for a wall at the bottom end of the rail Return Top end to wall Put a check in this box if you want a top view of the top end of the rail showing a return toward the wall Draw Wall at Top end Put a check in this box if you want to draw a reference line for a wall at the top end of the rail Select the end condition for each end of the rail by picking the icons on either side of the large picture in the center Enter the dimensions as required If the bottom end turns and goes horizontally and if dimension B10 is greater than B8 the first bracket at the bottom will be on the slope at a distance from the bend of B10 horizontal length The same is true at the top end 191 Rails Chapter 13 AutoSD Steel Detailing P RAIL ELEVATION Stair Rail Input is in FT IISS r Slope UP amp tothe Right O to the Left of Rail lines Use pickets ET Start Point O Upper Lower O Pick WPs r Slope VSPA 2 05 4
371. tion line r Finish designations Finish amp Base PL F Finish Cap PL s Disable Finish V Show base cap plan as a section 7 Extend wing plates through Tubes V Extend wing plates through Pipes r Connection plate to Beam flange Gap at Top flange 0 0000 Gap at Bottom flange 0 0006 Cancel pipe column Only for non skewed plates BASE PL EDGE VIEW CAP PL EDGE VIEW These two programs will draw the edge view of a plate on an existing column They are affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command Mark rPlate BASE CAP PLAN H R i 8 Z Symmetrical about vertical CL 2 SEA Symmetrical about horizontal CL This is for creating base cap plates and TL M i drawing the plan view da 0 7 o Fa Symmetrical options A check in these boxes eee iws fo ER THE PLATE AS NEEDED LEAVE THE E L will automatically fill out the symmetrical dd E u fm value when the first value is entered re iim added Symmetrical abo
372. tion type grade of steel used for the connection material and design method 0 2500 ef x Decimal KIPS in tension Decimal KIPS in shear Decimal Web thickness FT ISS C C of holes DR pan 7H 5 BOT DA Enter values in each edit box for your specific connection If FTISS Outstanding leg i p i there is no shear load you can enter a value of 0 or leave the box thickness i 2 Deer fk blank All other boxes must have a value FT ISS Conn length per bolt 0 0300 o sxy oo se yN 5 R FT ISS Fitting length Minimum fitting length 0 0600 numre After entering all values pick the calculate button Close Calculate If prying action is exceeded a dialog box pops up to select how Saramagu to modify the output a minimum 20000 O Maintsinttickness Option 1 will keep the thickness the same and increase the number of bolts A s Option 2 will keep the number of bolts and increase the thickness Option 3 will keep the length and increase the number of bolts and thickness Picking the calculate button again will recalculate and let you choose another option if 85 Calculator Chapter 5 AutoSD Steel Detailing prying action is exceeded LOADS Pulldown AutoSD gt Loads Ribbon AutoSD I gt Utilities This command is for getting the
373. tiple is NOT available for AutoCAD LT For a single file select the dxf file from the dialog box For multiple files select a single file in the folder that contains all of the files to import Only files with a dxf extension will be imported After importing the dxf file the drawing is moved so the lower left corner of the border is at the origin 0 0 The SDS 2 DXF file is scaled up by a factor of 12 to make the scale 1 1 0 and the fractions are changed back to a stacked fraction Xsteel DXF files are scaled to fit the margins set by the setup program for a 24 x 36 sheet Dwg to SDS 2 Dxf Pulldown AutoSD gt Tools gt Dwg to SDS 2 Dxf Ribbon AutoSD I gt Utilities This command will convert your drawing and create a dxf file of the same name as the dwg file and save it to the same folder All attributes will be replaced with text Some information in the field bolts will be lost after converting If you want to save this information you should make a backup copy of the dwg file to another folder before converting it STARTING A NEW DRAWING Starting a new drawing that is compatible in appearance to drawings created by SDS 2 STEELCAD CVSpro or Xsteel Select Files and New Select Use a Template In the Select a Template window select the autosd dwt template and pick OPEN If the templates are not in the window they can be found in your autosd support folder Pick AutoSD gt Format or AutoSD gt
374. tive the plate will be on the opposite side of the work line The offset locates the side of the plate next to the work line in either case TOP VIEW skewed connection Right end or Left end This program is for drawing the top view of a skewed end connection on the web of a beam The connection can be on either end or any angle It uses the same dialog box as the one for detailing the end of a beam so all of the web connection options are available The first example uses an end plate with the skew angle entered manually Positive angles rotate counterclockwise and negative angles rotate clockwise FT IISS Elevation of beam at CL of LEFT end support lt 0 gt Enter FT IISS Elevation of beam at CL of RIGHT end support lt 0 gt Enter Enter angle 36 A slide is displayed to show positive and negative angle rotation FT IISS End plate thickness 0006 Stagger gage of end plate Y N lt Y gt N FT IISS Horiz Minus dimension lt 1 4 gt Enter FT IISS Elevation of support beam lt 0 gt Enter Insertion point Pick a point FT IISS Hole C C in end plate lt 6 gt Enter FT IISS Edge distance to sides of end plate lt 1 1 4 gt Enter 118 AutoSD Steel Detailing Beams Chapter 7 The following example uses bent plates on both sides of the web with the skew angle entered automatically by entering an offset FT IISS Elevation of beam at CL of LEFT end support lt 0 gt Enter FT I
375. to draw the end view I STIFFENER PLATE attached This will draw the edge view of a stiffener plate on an existing detail It will not put any dimensions The stiffener plate will be drawn to the scale set by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command Select a line at one end of stiffener plate Select a line at other end of stiffener plate Location of center of stiffener plate The stiffener plate will be drawn square to the second line picked and will be bounded at the ends by the two lines picked 116 AutoSD Steel Detailing Beams Chapter 7 STIFFENER PLATE loose This will draw a side view detail of a stiffener plate mme p Skewed plate with a main mark or it can write a DSTV file of the ramma Viewed from the top Control dimension in top view amp Angle 0 0000 plate or do both Check the box for Plate is oss sn degrees to web Base skewed if the stiffener is not square with the web and enter the angle bevel or two control Select Slope of beam in degrees from horizontal 0 0000 0 0006 WIB65 dimensions to calculate the angle vote mer Bevel Parallel with web Rise Referenced from Web 0 0309 bf 0 0708 1 0413 0 0010 0 0012 0 0012 0 0006 Pick Select to select a member size for v
376. toSD gt Ladders gt Security Guard Add a Security guard detail to an existing ladder detail The guard may be made from sheet metal or an angle frame with wire mesh The hinges and latch may be on either side 201 Ladders Chapter 14 AutoSD Steel Detailing Insert reference If you check this option a rectangle representing the outline of the security guard will be inserted using the lower left corner as the insertion point You will be asked if the ladder detail is a front view or a side view Pick a point on the ladder stringer near the bottom to insert the reference outline ERECTION ELEVATION This command is for drawing the elevation view of a ladder on an erection drawing There is a caged and non caged ladder Both can be drawn in front view or side view All ladders can be drawn as a side step or step through The programs require three points to locate the ladder The first pick is the top of the upper floor If you are drawing the side view this pick should be the outside corner of the landing The second pick is the top of the lower floor The third pick is the center line of the ladder rails The scale is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command Select Ladder Type SIDE MEW 1 WITH GAGE SIDE STEP STEP THROUGH FRONT VIEW WITH GAGE a ae STEP RO E SE STEP RO FRONT VIEW WITHOUT CAGE se ae STEP ou SIDE M
377. toSD II gt Detail This program will draw a pipe bollard with or without anchors near the bottom The scale is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command BOLT w N amp W Pulldown AutoSD gt Detail gt Bolt w n amp w Ribbon AutoSD II gt Detail Q E This program will draw a detailed view of a variety of bolt types You can draw a side view or end view of the head or nut with or without washers There is also a 3D option The scale is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command CLEVIS EE Pulldown AutoSD gt Draw gt Clevis re 3 Toolbar Miscellaneous FIN OIA vw 9 Ribbon AutoSD I gt Miscellaneous GRIP THK lam HESA This will draw the side or edge view of a clevis The insertion point is the center of the pin hole for the side view and the center of the pin Es Ola midway of the grip for the edge view The rotation is the angle from the insertion point to the center of the threaded end The scale is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing 55 FEE command GAP 3 4 7 8 w 1124 3 4 11 2 5 16 21 2 11 8 kips 33 4 4 Weight 091 Ib 3500 OK Cancel CLIP Pulldown AutoSD gt Draw gt Clip Toolbar Miscellaneous Ribbon AutoSD I gt Miscellaneous This is f
378. tract program Select Extract program from the AutoSD gt Extract pulldown menu Select the tab Merge Files Change the drive and then the folder to where the kss files are located Change the Type to kss Enter a file name in the File Name box Do not give an extension If the file does not exist it will be created to hold the merged files If it does exist the files selected will be merged to it Select the files that you want to merge and select OK You can merge files into an existing file or create a new file to merge all files into You cannot merge a file onto itself where new file and merging file have the same name EXTRACT for KISS uses some support files located in the AUTOSD BONUS folder They are kiss Isp and asd kiss txt Do NOT modify asd_kiss txt or the program will not work EXTRACT for Fabtrol using Text Pulldown AutoSD gt Extract gt for Fabtrol Using Text Ribbon AutoSD I gt Shop bill This program will extract the information when text is used in the shop bill The program uses the shop bill configuration file to locate the columns of text therefore you must select the customer configuration file that was used to place the text in the shop bill The text must be lined up in columns and rows with the following restrictions Columns The insertion points of the text in a column must line up within 1 on either side of the item picked to define the location of that column Rows The insertion points of the
379. ts Line 2 of 2 lt 0 gt Enter you want to add ac to the shop bill Y N lt Y gt Enter you want to add ad to the shop bill Y N lt Y gt Enter Shop bill information on mark 1B1 Add connection to beam file Y N lt Y gt Enter The beam is finished en NOTE The beam is drawn to actual depth Flange thickness is drawn to 3 4 at a 1 1 0 scale o Blocks are drawn to scale Holes are located above negative or below positive the top flange to ee scale ae The elevation will be written at both ends if the beam is sloping The minimum block depth is 1 39 Vwi 1 7588 2515 12 p Wi4x34 3 s 3 0 16 4 3 16 15 712 14 15 71518 25mm i You must finish one beam before starting another and before closing ae the drawing FT IISS Total grip less washers lt 5 8 gt This prompt shows the grip for the bolts in the end connection It is equal to the clip angle thickness and the web or flange thickness of the support member If you are framing into a web and you have a beam connecting on the other side increase the grip by the clip thickness for the other beam If you are detailing a beam for a wing plate connection the program assumes 3 8 for the wing plate to determine the grip All material is automatically put in the shop bill Inserting an internal connection without selecting a connection will place dimension lines at the insertion point To be used to add
380. tsman to write in the input Your CAD operator can input the information and get a print of the output to be used by the draftsman to detail the gusset by hand This will be a big time saver for those that have only one CAD station 128 AutoSD Steel Detailing Bracing Chapter 8 Connection NO 1 Load on brace 3 Total area of brace s tension comp both Smaller radius of gyration Is brace X Yes No Percent of tensil strength Percent of compressive strength Bolt size Edge distance Bolt value single shear Bolt spacing Grade of steel Fy Grade of gusset plate Fy Bolts in 1 Single or 2 Double shear Thickness of brace Thickness of gusset plate Horizontal connection is Vertical connection is Actual clearance is Corner is clipped Brace is bolted to gusset plate INPUT OUTPUT 1 12 0000 A 1 0006 Load Slope 2 10 0000 B 1 0300 Load Horiz 3 0 0000 C 0 0608 Load Vert 4 0 0600 D 0 0415 Bolt Slope 5 0 0000 E 1 0900 Bolt Horiz 5a 0 0000 F 1 0604 Bolt Vert 6 0 0200 G Weld Slope 6a 0 0200 H Weld Horiz 7 0 0300 K Weld Vert 7a Angle 8 0 0300 Bevel 9 0 0000 Slope 10 0 0300 11 0 0000 12 0 0000 13 0 0310 13a 0 0310 Minimum clip angle thickness is 1 4 Minimum gusset plate thickness is 5 16 VIEWING FILE DATE 5 16 5 16 welded BOD NN W HB O 00 LO OD 3 16 Min 3 16 Min
381. u are repeating the same command over and over again such as the copy or erase command AutoSD takes advantage of this same time saver in many of its commands such as editing and dimensioning and many programs FILE NAMES AutoSD uses several different file name extensions All of these except for the cfg bak dat and sld files are saved in the folder of the current drawing The extensions and their uses are as follows bit Bolt list extracted from your drawing AutoSD Steel Detailing Introduction Chapter 1 bak cfg col CSV dat dwg err gus imp kss Ast mom ne pl Sbl Configuration bakup files File name Folder Purpose CUSTBOM BAK C autosd Shop bill program CUSTBOMM BAK C autosd Metric shop bill program CUSTCLR BAK C autosd Color list CUSTMAT BAK C autosd Material list CUSTMATM BAK C autosd Metric material list CUSTVAR BAK C autosd Detail variable configuration CUSTVARM BAK C autosd Metric detail variable configuration SCHMAKER BAK C autosd Schedule maker SDS2CLR BAK C autosd SDS 2 colors SETUP12 BAK C autosd Custom setup settings WELD BAK C autosd welds Weld symbols Configuration files File name Folder Purpose ASD_DATA CFG C autosd List of data files for each shape CUSTBOM CFG C autosd Shop bill program CUSTBOMM CFG C autosd Metric shop bill program CUSTCLR CFG C autosd Color list CUSTMAT CFG C autosd Material list CUSTMATM CFG C autosd Metri
382. used to find a given text string in the selected text A hand pointer is placed on the text when a match is found The pointer is on a layer called POINTER FLG HOLE Pulldown AutoSD gt Draw gt Flg Hole Toolbar Miscellaneous Ribbon AutoSD I gt Miscellaneous This is used for putting holes in the flange of a beam or other member where the thickness of material is drawn as 3 4 thick It will put only one hole at a time The scale is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command If you have configured your customer to save CNC data you will be asked to select the tail dimension If there is no tail dimension then select any line The CNC editor will pop up for you to verify the gage hole size layer and tail dimension Change it if needed pick Apply and OK HOLES Pulldown AutoSD gt Draw gt Holes eon tl za Fa SG GT gt Toolbar Miscellaneous riere g aa she i Ribbon AutoSD I gt Miscellaneous el FE cee If you have configured your customer to save due sense 0 anve Ku CNC data you will get the dialog box shown f mm o we
383. ut a check in Extend wing plates through Tubes or Extend wing plates through Pipes all non skewed wing plates will be detailed going through the tube or pipe column EDITING A COLOR CONFIGURATION Pulldown AutoSD gt Customer Configuration Ribbon AutoSD I gt Shop bill Pick Color list select one of the names under File name and pick Edit The first time you open the configuration box and pick Colors list you will have 5 configuration files in it You can edit and use these files You can rename them or copy them and make more files If you have more than one file you can delete them but you cannot delete the last one There will always be at least one file All of the color configurations are stored in one file called custCLR cfg located in your autosd folder You can also import individual configurations from other custCLR cfg files Configuration file AutoSD Object Lines Grab Rails 3 green Cal Grid Text 7 white Col Grid Bubble Col Grid line 7 white Main Marks layer 7white Section marks layer r 7 white 7 white 7 white 2 yellow 7 white 7white 6 magenta Substitute for Color toolbar importing DWG s from O spsyz CO SteelCaD Line weights
384. ut horizontal Browse Look in other folders for the re BL p a 3 0 0408 basecap pl file H Hi 3 DE i I 0 0408 Enable all Turns on all input boxes po mi nos E pmo Q Delete Deletes the select mark KANE S ounen wae me p k Pe fm A y FALLS ON GENTERUNE ENTER O FOR THE Hole size in plan view Rotate 90 Rotates all input so plate will be E O T rere AS r oom Oos Teton rotated counter clockwise 90 degrees Browse Enable all Delet Rotate 90 Save As Select Save As Saves current plate as a different ET mark 141 Columns Chapter 9 AutoSD Steel Detailing Select Opens a dialog box for selecting standard plate configurations Input boxes will be disabled to make it easier to input for a particular plate type and hole pattern Hole size in plan view These options are for noting the hole size Omit will not put a hole size Circle plate will put a rectangular hidden line around the plate with a hole size Text only will note the hole size under the plate size This setting is separate for base and cap plates The scale is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command when drawing a plate VIEW BASE CAP FILE Base and cap plates are both saved in a file called BASECAP PL and is located in your customer job folder Descriptions can be replaced added to edited and deleted from this file This dialog box is also used by other program
385. vious Next OK Cancel Previous Next This will display an icon menu for the selection of piece mark section marks break lines north arrow column bubble column AISC symbol revision symbols and UP and DOWN arrows This places attributes in the drawing for piece marking an item and giving its quantity There are two formats MARK over QUANTITY and QUANTITY BEAM MARK If 41 Erection Tools Chapter 2 AutoSD Steel Detailing you are saving CNC data the mark will also have two hidden attributes for the size and length If you change the size of the member or the length in the detail view you will need to change the values of these attributes with the ATTEDIT command The length will be in the FT IISS format There is one more attribute that is left blank When you edit the attributes the prompt for this attribute is REF and is used for inserting a single line reference note under the mark This is for drawing break lines Pick the start and end points and the break line will be drawn The line will extend 1 1 2 at a scale of 1 1 past each point picked These two are for cutting sections A letter or number of your choice is placed with the symbol SECT A F a Eme a These two are for labeling a section or a detail When either one is inserted you are asked to give a mark letter or number to be put with the symbol These three are fo
386. vrvennervrnvernneer 20 EADDERS sk 41 BEAMS ee 21 MARKS SECT TAGS sceccdsedieasionseacareeses 41 COLUMNS fesecitsnivesccsbdetatestin adecaseccessasebocs 24 MEMBER Gps 43 EDITING A COLOR CONFIGURATION 24 REVISION CLOUD errenannrorvvrvrrrernensnnnnrsensenr 43 LINE WEIGHTS ereervovrrnnervennernnnernnerennneenneee 26 SAFETY GATE ves sete nra testis a 44 ARROW HEADS oorsien neinteresa saih 26 SHAFT OPENING snina aana 44 Chapter 2 Erection Tools rrsnrnrrvrorrvrovrrnenrnnre 27 STAIR PEAN 55457 regeret ones herrer 44 ANCHOR BOLT SIDE VIEW 0 cc0c00 27 TAGS DNA 45 BEAM LINES w DESC oseere 27 TEXT DESCRIPTION nrrrnnnrrronrrrrnnrnrrnnnnennn 45 BEAM ON PLATE w AB rnrrrronrrrrnnrrrrnnrnernn 28 U BLOCK SECTION VIEW rnrrrrvrerenrrnrrnrnn 45 BEARING PLATE EDGE VIEW rsrorerrvverrn 28 WOOD END VIEW vLisspagaamsekvesin 45 BRACE LINES w DESC erorvrrerrrernsrsnnrsrseserer 28 Chapter 3 Don sere ee 47 BLOCK WALL SECTION essrrrovvvnnervvnvvrnneer 28 LINE arks vi 47 BRICK w BLOCK WALL SECTION 29 ZPE VECTOR asuinn ana a 47 BRICK WALL SECTION eeravornrevvvnnervvnvvrnneer 29 ADD STUDS syster e re e 47 BLOCK WALL PLAN VIEW 29 ADHESIVE ANCHOR c cccessseceseeeesseees 47 BRICK w BLOCK WALL PLAN VIEW 30 ANCHOR BOLT dda aa a 48 ARCHED TEXT 48 Contents AutoSD Steel Detailing ASSEMBLY MARKS eeerrnnrorrvnrersvrrrrsvserreeen 48 Wshapedw uugsadssaagasparveasge 65 BEARING PLATE spe
387. ween the first two points the blocks are on The blocks are drawn 15 5 8 long with a 3 8 mortar joint The scale is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command 29 Erection Tools Chapter 2 AutoSD Steel Detailing i BRICK w BLOCK WALL PLAN VIEW Pulldown AutoSD gt Erection Tools gt Brick w Block Wall Plan View Toolbar Erection Tools Ribbon AutoSD I gt Erection Tools This program is similar to Block Wall Plan View above but combines brick and block wall plan view into one program You input the total thickness of the wall The scale is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command BRICK WALL PLAN VIEW Pulldown AutoSD gt Erection Tools gt Brick Wall Plan View Toolbar Erection Tools Ribbon AutoSD I gt Erection Tools This program draws the plan view of a brick wall The first point you pick will be a corner point of the first whole brick at one end of the wall The second point will be the other end of the brick wall The third point determines which side of the line between the first two points the bricks are on The bricks are drawn 3 3 4 wide 7 5 8 long and with a 3 8 mortar joint 2 brick equals one block in length The scale is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command COL BASE PLATE w AB Pulldown AutoSD gt Erection Tools gt Col Base Plate w AB Toolb
388. wings in a selected folder You select one file in the folder in order to select the entire folder It will create a file for each drawing with the same name as the drawing but with a blt extension and puts the file in the same folder as the drawing The file will contain a list bolts created with the Bolt Circle program EXTRACT BOLTS Current Drawing Pulldown AutoSD gt Extract gt Bolts Current drawing Ribbon AutoSD I gt Shop bill Use this command to extract the bolts from the current drawing The default output file name for EXTRACT BOLTS is the drawing name with a TXT extension and is located in the same folder as the drawing The program EXTRACTW EXE is automatically run to convert the txt file to a blt file that can be used by the BOLT LIST program You must purchase the CALCULATOR programs to get the BOLT LIST program After the blt file is created the txt file is deleted 54 AutoSD Steel Detailing Draw Chapter 3 ABC Warning AutoCAD 14 and BricsCAD only If the file name is longer than eight characters only the first six will be used to create the blt file and the name will end with 1 For example the extracted file name 1998 402 09 txt will become 1998 4 1 blt This could be a problem if the first six characters of two or more drawing names are the same because only one bolt list file will be created FIND TEXT STRING Pulldown AutoSD gt Tools Ribbon AutoSD I gt Utilities This is
389. with pan or grating treads If Grating Treads Horiz dim from W P to hole lt 1 1 Horiz dim from hole to hole lt 7 gt Vert dim from W P to hole lt 1 3 If PanTreads See page 177 Standard Tread name 8 gt TSi First Bottom Tread name Are tail dimensions required Minus dimension at upper end Include Handrail holes Yes 250 AutoSD Steel Detailing Stair Forms Appendix E Slope UP Toe channel Tails for sloping stringer go to to the Right O WP Left end to the Left O End of material Right end Header or Clip size FS Dimensiion to Top of tread End R or Clip size File 1 Bottom of pan 2 C Draw Length to Scale 3 C Use Plate for Stringers 4 Connection at top 5 Setback to clip Or Thickness 6 Connection at bottom 47 Setback to clip r Thickiwee z Upper stringer size Upper support size Sloping stringer size d Lower support size Lower stringer size Closure plate thickness N nN Stair Forms Appendix E AutoSD Steel Detailing Butterfly stair with pre cast treads on top of stringer Toe channel O NS Tails for sloping stringer qo to O WP Left end Slope UP to the Right to the Left End or Clip size File C Draw Length to Scale C Use Plote for Stringers Connection at top tec
390. xisting mark or creating a new mark you start with the designation list The designation does not have to be part of the mark but is used to separate the descriptions from one another 19 Introduction Chapter I AutoSD Steel Detailing Format is where you select which you want listed first the thickness or the width This setting is for all descriptions of standard shear bars and the descriptions of flat bars listed in the FLAT BAR configuration The bar or plate size shown in the Description box will be used in the shop bill when a standard mark is used and will also be used to draw the bar to scale The bar size shown for Size 1 will be used up to the maximum rows selected The bar size shown for Size 2 will be used starting with the minimum rows selected If the Max rows is blank the bar size shown for Size 1 will be used for all rows and Size 2 will be disabled The values that determine which mark will be used are Bolt dia No of Columns Gage from edge of bar to center of hole and if the bar has slots or not A bar with slots will be selected ONLY if the Use short slot is checked and Use standard shear bar with slots in the BEAMS dialog box is checked If you want the holes drawn as slots you need to check the options Show short slots in wing plates on beams and or Show short slots in wing plates on columns in the BOLTS EDGE dialog box If all of your standard shear bars use short slots and n
391. xtracted as long as the Paper space layout name does not begin with Layout All output will be in one file with the same name as the drawing file FabSuite kss file The file C autosd bonus FabSuite Shape List pdf is a list of Key words the Extract for KISS program will recognize when creating the kss files for FabSuite You must use the text from the BOM TEXT column of this file in your description in your bill of materials in order to export that material to the kss file Your material description may be upper or lower case COMPILE QUANTITIES From ALL DRAWINGS Pulldown AutoSD gt Compile Qtys from All drawings using attributes Pulldown AutoSD gt Compile Qtys from All drawings using text Ribbon AutoSD I gt Shop bill Warning Attributes must not be used if you are drawing in Model space and Paper space or just Paper space with multiple layouts Use this command to extract the shop bill using attributes or text from all drawings in one folder If more than one drawing is in the selected folder each drawing will be opened one at a time and the bill of material extracted The text in the shop bill for Model space and each Paper space layout will be extracted as long as the Paper space layout name does not begin with Layout After all drawings have been processed the extracted files are merged into one file and converted The converted file name is bom qty txt and will be located in the folder where the drawings a
392. you want as the default for Angles Channels Flange shapes Plates Bars Pipes and Tubes Enter the grade for studs COLUMNS This box is for setting the parameters for dimensioning columns It controls where the overall length and tails are dimensioned to the location of the overall length the symbol to be used for finishing each end of the column and whether to put the mark at the end of the description line or not Connection plate to Beam flange controls the gap between the beam flanges and the horizontal plates that will be welded to the Column Detail Configuration Input is in FT IISS r Overall length is Above description Below description To top of base plate amp To bottom of base plate amp To top of cap plate To bottom of cap plate m Tail dimensions go to Top of base plate O Bottom of base plate Put Mark at end of description line Finish designations Finish Base PL Finish Cap PL Disable Finish 7 Show base cap plan as a section 7 Extend wing plates through Tubes 7 Extend wing plates through Pipes r Connection plate to Beam flange Gap at Top flange 0 0000 Gap at Bottom flange 0 0006 OK Cancel column when you save the beam to column file while detailing the beam If you p
393. ze bolt The head will be solid lines the shaft will be hidden lines with a cloud around the shaft representing the hole in the c 41 Draw Chapter 3 AutoSD Steel Detailing Command Command concrete The insertion point is the underside of the nut The second point is the face of the concrete The last point is the end of bolt inside the concrete The first and last points determine the rotation The scale is affected by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Scale of Drawing command ANCHOR BOLT Pulldown AutoSD gt Detail gt Anchor Bolt Toolbar Detail Ribbon AutoSD II gt Detail Anchor Detail view Input is in FT IISS This program will detail six different types of anchor bolts The insertion point is the top of the bolt The description and type of washer used is set with the Config washers button Select a washer and nut type for each anchor diameter Washers can be hardened non hardened or plate If a plate is used you also enter the thickness and width for a square plate Threaded rod DE is an option for three of the types The scale is affected OG EE by the AutoSD gt Modify or AutoSD I gt Change gt Akk Scale of Drawing command ARCHED TEXT Pulldown AutoSD gt Arched T

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

SmartOption™ Bundle Setup for  Descargar PDF... - Mantenimiento cubiertas Ecuador  中古委託商品情報記入シート - BE  GTU C 120-1200 300006631-001  新規申請用PDFをダウンロード  Kathrein ZVP 13    MARYINitt.  Progress Lighting P4023-77 Installation Guide  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file